mikroElektronika 8051 User Manual

Below you will find brief information for 8051. mikroBasic for 8051 is intuitive, quick and easy for 8051 Microcontrollers. The IDE provides power with simplicity of Windows. With its tools, code examples, routines and help, it's a reliable tool.
PDF
Document
mikroBASIC for 8051
Develop your applications quickly and easily with the world's
most intuitive mikroBASIC for 8051 Microcontrollers.
Highly sophisticated IDE provides the power you need with
the simplicity of a Windows based point-and-click
environment.
With useful implemented tools, many practical code
examples, broad set of built-in routines, and a
comprehensive Help, mikroBASIC for 8051 makes a fast
and reliable tool, which can satisfy needs of experienced
engineers and beginners alike.
mikroBasic for 8051
December 2008.
Reader’s note
DISCLAIMER:
Reader’s Note
mikroBasic for 8051 and this manual are owned by mikroElektronika and are protected by
copyright law and international copyright treaty. Therefore, you should treat this manual like
any other copyrighted material (e.g., a book). The manual and the compiler may not be
copied, partially or as a whole without the written consent from the mikroEelktronika. The
PDF-edition of the manual can be printed for private or local use, but not for distribution.
Modifying the manual or the compiler is strictly prohibited.
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES:
The mikroBasic for 8051 compiler is not fault-tolerant and is not designed, manufactured or
intended for use or resale as on-line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring
fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in
which the failure of the Software could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage (&quot;High Risk Activities&quot;). mikroElektronika and its suppliers
specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities.
LICENSE AGREEMENT:
By using the mikroBasic for 8051 compiler, you agree to the terms of this agreement.
Only one person may use licensed version of mikroBasic for 8051 compiler at a time.
Copyright &copy; mikroElektronika 2003 - 2008.
This manual covers mikroBasic for 8051 version 1.1 and the related topics. Newer versions may contain changes without prior notice.
COMPILER BUG REPORTS:
The compiler has been carefully tested and debugged. It is, however, not possible to
guarantee a 100 % error free product. If you would like to report a bug, please contact us at
the address [email protected]. Please include next information in your bug report:
- Your operating system
- Version of mikroBasic for 8051
- Code sample
- Description of a bug
CONTACT US:
mikroElektronika
Voice: + 381 (11) 36 28 830
Fax:
+ 381 (11) 36 28 831
Web:
www.mikroe.com
E-mail: [email protected]
Windows is a Registered trademark of Microsoft Corp. All other trade and/or services marks
are the property of the respective owners.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051 Environment
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic for 8051 Specifics
CHAPTER 4
8051 Specifics
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051 Language Reference
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051 Libraries
mikroBasic for 8051
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Where to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
mikroElektronika Associates License Statement and Limited Warranty 4
IMPORTANT - READ CAREFULLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
LIMITED WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
GENERAL PROVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
How to Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Who Gets the License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
How to Get License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
After Receving the License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CHAPTER 2
IDE Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Main Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
File Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Edit Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Find Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Find In Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Go To Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Dialog box for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Regular expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
View Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
File Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Edit Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Edit Toolbar is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Advanced Edit Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Find/Replace Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
IV
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic for 8051
Table of Contents
Project Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Build Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Debugger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Styles Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
23
24
25
25
Project Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Run Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Tools Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Help Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
IDE Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Customizing IDE Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Docking Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Saving Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Auto Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Advanced Code Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Advanced Editor Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Code Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Code Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Parameter Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Code Templates (Auto Complete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Auto Correct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Spell Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Goto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Comment / Uncomment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Code Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Routine List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Project Settings Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Error Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Memory Usage Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
RAM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
V
Table of Contents
mikroBasic for 8051
Data Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
XData Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
iData Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
bData Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
PData Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Displays PData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Special Function Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
General Purpose Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
ROM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
ROM Memory Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
ROM Memory Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Procedures Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Procedures Size Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Procedures Locations Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Integrated Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
USART Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
ASCII Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
EEPROM Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7 Segment Display Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
UDP Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Graphic LCD Bitmap Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
LCD Custom Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Code editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Regular Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Simple matches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Escape sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Character classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Metacharacters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Metacharacters - Line separators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Metacharacters - Predefined classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Metacharacters - Word boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Metacharacters - Iterators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
VI
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic for 8051
Table of Contents
Metacharacters - Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Metacharacters - Subexpressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Metacharacters - Backreferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
mikroBasic for 8051 Command Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
New Project Wizard Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Customizing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Edit Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Managing Project Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Add/Remove Files from Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Source Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Managing Source Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Creating new source file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Opening an existing file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Printing an open file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Saving file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Saving file under a different name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Closing file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Clean Project Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Clean Project Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
81
81
82
Compiler Error Messages: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Linker Error Messages: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Hint Messages: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Software Simulator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Watch Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Stopwatch Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
RAM Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Software Simulator Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Creating New Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Multiple Library Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
VII
mikroBasic for 8051
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 3
Basic Standard Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Divergence from the Basic Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Basic Language Exstensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Predefined Globals and Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
SFRs and related constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Math constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Accessing Individual Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Accessing Individual Bits Of Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
sbit type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
bit type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Function Calls from Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Interrupt Priority Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Linker Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Directive absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Directive org . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Built-in Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Lo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Highest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delay_us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delay_ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vdelay_ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delay_Cyc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock_KHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock_MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SetFuncCall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uart_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
101
101
101
102
102
102
103
103
103
104
104
104
105
105
Code Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
VIII MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic for 8051
Table of Contents
Constant folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Constant propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Copy propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Value numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
&quot;Dead code&quot; ellimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Stack allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Local vars optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Better code generation and local optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Types Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
CHAPTER 4
Nested Calls Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
8051 Memory Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Program Memory (ROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Internal Data Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
External Data Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
SFR Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Memory Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Small model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Compact model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Large model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Memory Type Specifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
idata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bdata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xdata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pdata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
113
113
113
114
114
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic Language Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Lexical Elements Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Whitespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
IX
Table of Contents
mikroBasic for 8051
Newline Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Whitespace in Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Tokens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Token Extraction Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Literals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Integer Literals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floating Point Literals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character Literals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
String Literals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
121
122
122
Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Case Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Uniqueness and Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Identifier Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Punctuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parentheses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Colon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
130
130
130
130
Program Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Organization of Main Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Organization of Other Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Scope and Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
The visibili . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Include Clause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Main Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Other Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Interface Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Implementation Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
X
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic for 8051
Table of Contents
Variables and 8051 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Functions and Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Calling a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Calling a procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Function Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Example: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Example: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Forward declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Type Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Simple Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Array Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Constant Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
@ Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Structure Member Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Types Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Implicit Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Promotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Explicit Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Operators Precedence and Associativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Arithmetic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
XI
Table of Contents
mikroBasic for 8051
Division by Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Unary Arithmetic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Relational Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Relational Operators in Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Bitwise Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Bitwise Operators Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Logical Operations on Bit Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
The bitwise operators and, or, an . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Unsigned and Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Signed and Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Bitwise Shift Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Boolean Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Assignment Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Conditional Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
If Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Nested if statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Select Case Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Nested Case Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Iteration Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
For Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Endless Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
While Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Do Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Jump Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
asm Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Compiler Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Directives #DEFINE and #UNDEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Directives #IFDEF, #ELSEIF and #ELSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Predefined Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Linker Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Directive absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Directive org . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
XII
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic for 8051
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 6
Hardware 8051-specific Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Miscellaneous Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Library Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
CANSPI Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
The SPI module i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
External dependecies of CANSPI Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
CANSPISetOperationMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
CANSPIGetOperationMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
CANSPIInitialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
CANSPISetBaudRate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
CANSPISetMask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
CANSPISetFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
CANSPIread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
CANSPIWrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
The following routines are for an internal use by the lib . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
CANSPISetOperationMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
CANSPIGetOperationMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
CANSPIInitialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
CANSPISetBaudRate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
CANSPISetMask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
CANSPISetFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
CANSPIRead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
CANSPIWrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
CANSPI Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
CANSPI_OP_MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
CANSPI_TX_MSG_FLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
CANSPI_RX_MSG_FLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
CANSPI_MASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
CANSPI_FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
XIII
Table of Contents
mikroBasic for 8051
EEPROM Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Eeprom_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Eeprom_Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Eeprom_Write_Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Graphic LCD Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
The mikroBasic for 80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
of Graphic LCD Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Basic routines: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Glcd_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Glcd_Set_Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Glcd_Set_X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Glcd_Set_Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Glcd_Read_Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Glcd_Write_Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Glcd_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Glcd_Set_Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Glcd_Set_X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Glcd_Set_Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Glcd_Read_Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Glcd_Write_Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Glcd_Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Glcd_Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Glcd_Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Glcd_V_Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Glcd_H_Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Glcd_Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Glcd_Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Glcd_Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Glcd_Set_Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Glcd_Write_Char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Glcd_Write_Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Glcd_Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
XIV MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic for 8051
Table of Contents
The following exa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Keypad Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
External dependencies of Keypad Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Keypad_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Keypad_Key_Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Keypad_Key_Click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
This is a simple example of using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
he Keypad Librar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
LCD Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
External dependencies of LCD Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Lcd_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Lcd_Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Lcd_Out_Cp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Lcd_Chr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Lcd_Chr_Cp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Lcd_Cmd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Available LCD Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
OneWire Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
External dependencies of OneWire Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Ow_Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Ow_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Ow_Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Manchester Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Man_Receive_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Man_Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
XV
Table of Contents
mikroBasic for 8051
Man_Send_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Man_Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Man_Synchro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Man_Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Port Expander Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
External dependencies of Port Expander Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Expander_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Expander_Read_Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Expander_Write_Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Expander_Read_PortA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Expander_Read_PortB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Expander_Read_PortAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Expander_Write_PortA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Expander_Write_PortB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Expander_Write_PortAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
PS/2 Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
External dependencies of PS/2 Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Ps2_Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Ps2_Key_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Special Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
RS-485 Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
External dependencies of RS-485 Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
XVI MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic for 8051
Table of Contents
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
RS485master_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
RS485master_Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
RS485master_Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
RS485slave_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
RS485slave_Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
RS485slave_Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
This is a simple demonstration o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Message format and CRC calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Software I&sup2;C Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
External dependecies of Soft_I2C Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Soft_I2C_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Soft_I2C_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Soft_I2C_Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Soft_I2C_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Soft_I2C_Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Soft_I2C_Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Software SPI Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Soft_Spi_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Soft_Spi_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Soft_Spi_Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Software UART Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
External dependencies of Software UART Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Soft_Uart_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Soft_Uart_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Soft_Uart_Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Sound Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
XVII
Table of Contents
mikroBasic for 8051
External dependencies of Sound Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Sound_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Sound_Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Sound_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Sound_Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
The example is a simple demo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
SPI Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Spi_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Spi_Init_Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Spi_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Spi_Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
SPI Ethernet Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
External dependencies of SPI Ethernet Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Spi_Ethernet_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Spi_Ethernet_Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Spi_Ethernet_Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Spi_Ethernet_doPacket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Spi_Ethernet_putByte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Spi_Ethernet_putBytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Spi_Ethernet_putConstBytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Spi_Ethernet_putString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Spi_Ethernet_putConstString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Spi_Ethernet_getByte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Spi_Ethernet_getBytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Spi_Ethernet_UserTCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Spi_Ethernet_UserUDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
SPI Graphic LCD Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
XVIII MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic for 8051
Table of Contents
External dependencies of SPI Graphic LCD Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Spi_Glcd_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Spi_Glcd_Set_Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Spi_Glcd_Set_Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Spi_Glcd_Set_X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Spi_Glcd_Read_Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Spi_Glcd_Write_Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Spi_Glcd_Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Spi_Glcd_Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Spi_Glcd_Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Spi_Glcd_V_Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Spi_Glcd_H_Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Spi_Glcd_Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Spi_Glcd_Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Spi_Glcd_Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Spi_Glcd_Set_Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Spi_Glcd_Write_Char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Spi_Glcd_Write_Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Spi_Glcd_Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
SPI LCD Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
External dependencies of SPI LCD Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Spi_Lcd_Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Spi_Lcd_Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Spi_Lcd_Out_Cp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Spi_Lcd_Chr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Spi_Lcd_Chr_Cp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Spi_Lcd_Cmd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Available LCD Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
SPI LCD8 (8-bit interface) Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
External dependencies of SPI LCD Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
XIX
Table of Contents
mikroBasic for 8051
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Spi_Lcd8_Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Spi_Lcd8_Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Spi_Lcd8_Out_Cp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Spi_Lcd8_Chr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Spi_Lcd8_Chr_Cp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Spi_Lcd8_Cmd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Available LCD Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
SPI T6963C Graphic LCD Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
External dependencies of Spi T6963C Graphic LCD Library . . . . . . . . 347
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Spi_T6963C_Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Spi_T6963C_WriteData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
pi_T6963C_WriteCommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Spi_T6963C_SetPtr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Spi_T6963C_WaitReady . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Spi_T6963C_Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Spi_T6963C_Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Spi_T6963C_Write_Char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Spi_T6963C_Write_Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Spi_T6963C_Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Spi_T6963C_Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Spi_T6963C_Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Spi_T6963C_Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Spi_T6963C_Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Spi_T6963C_Sprite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Spi_T6963C_Set_Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Spi_T6963C_ClearBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Spi_T6963C_SetBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Spi_T6963C_NegBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Spi_T6963C_DisplayGrPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Spi_T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Spi_T6963C_SetGrPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Spi_T6963C_SetTxtPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
XX
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic for 8051
Table of Contents
Spi_T6963C_PanelFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Spi_T6963C_GrFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Spi_T6963C_TxtFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Spi_T6963C_Cursor_Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Spi_T6963C_Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Spi_T6963C_Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Spi_T6963C_Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Spi_T6963C_Cursor_Blink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
T6963C Graphic LCD Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
External dependencies of T6963C Graphic LCD Library . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
T6963C_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
T6963C_WriteData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
T6963C_WriteCommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
T6963C_SetPtr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
T6963C_WaitReady . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
T6963C_Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
T6963C_Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
T6963C_Write_Char . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
T6963C_Write_Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
T6963C_Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
T6963C_Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
T6963C_Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
T6963C_Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
T6963C_Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
T6963C_Sprite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
T6963C_Set_Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
T6963C_ClearBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
T6963C_SetBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
T6963C_NegBit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
T6963C_DisplayGrPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
T6963C_SetGrPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
T6963C_SetTxtPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
XXI
Table of Contents
mikroBasic for 8051
T6963C_PanelFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
T6963C_GrFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
T6963C_TxtFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
T6963C_Cursor_Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
T6963C_Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
T6963C_Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
T6963C_Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
T6963C_Cursor_Blink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
UART Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Uart_Init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Uart_Data_Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Uart_Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Uart_Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
HW Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Button Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
External dependecies of Button Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Conversions Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
ByteToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
ShortToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
WordToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
IntToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
LongintToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
LongWordToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
FloatToStr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Dec2Bcd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Bcd2Dec16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Dec2Bcd16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Math Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
XXII MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
mikroBasic for 8051
Table of Contents
Library Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
acos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
asin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
atan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
atan2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
ceil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
cosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
eval_poly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
exp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
fabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
frexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
ldexp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
log10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
modf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
pow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
sin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
sinh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
sqrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
tan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
tanh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
String Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Library Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
memchr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
memcmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
memcpy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
memmove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
memset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
strcat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
strchr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
strcmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
strcpy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
strcspn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
strlen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
XXIII
Table of Contents
mikroBasic for 8051
strncat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
strncmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
strncpy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
strpbrk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
strrchr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
strspn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
strstr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
413
413
414
414
414
414
414
Time Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Time_dateToEpoch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Time_epochToDate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Time_dateDiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Library Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
TimeStruct type definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Trigonometry Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
sinE3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
cosE3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
XXIV MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER
1
Introduction to
mikroBasic for 8051
The mikroBasic 8051 is a powerful, feature-rich development tool 8051 microcontrollers. It is designed to provide the programmer with the easiest possible solution
to developing applications for embedded systems, without compromising performance or control.
1
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic for 8051
Introduction
Features
mikroBasic for 8051 allows you to quickly develop and deploy complex applications:
- Write your Basic source code using the built-in Code Editor (Code and
Parameter Assistants, Code Folding, Syntax Highlighting, Spell Checker,
Auto Correct, Code Templates, and more.)
- Use included mikroBasic libraries to dramatically speed up the development: data acquisition, memory, displays, conversions, communication etc.
- Monitor your program structure, variables, and functions in the Code
Explorer.
- Generate commented, human-readable assembly, and standard HEX
compatible with all programmers.
- Inspect program flow and debug executable logic with the integrated Software Simulator.
- Get detailed reports and graphs: RAM and ROM map, code statistics,
assembly listing, calling tree, and more.
- mikroBasic 8051 provides plenty of examples to expand, develop, and use
as building bricks in your projects. Copy them entirely if you deem fit –
that’s why we included them with the compiler.
2
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic for 8051
Introduction
Where to Start
- In case that you’re a beginner in programming 8051 microcontrollers, read
carefully the 8051 Specifics chapter. It might give you some useful pointers on 8051 constraints, code portability, and good programming practices.
- If you are experienced in Basic programming, you will probably want to
consult mikroBasic Specifics first. For language issues, you can always
refer to the comprehensive Language Reference. A complete list of included libraries is available at mikroBasic Libraries.
- If you are not very experienced in Basic programming, don’t panic!
mikroBasic 8051 provides plenty of examples making it easy for you to go
quickly. We suggest that you first consult Projects and Source Files, and
then start browsing the examples that you're the most interested in.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
3
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic for 8051
Introduction
MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES LICENSE STATEMENT AND
LIMITED WARRANTY
IMPORTANT - READ CAREFULLY
This license statement and limited warranty constitute a legal agreement (“License
Agreement”) between you (either as an individual or a single entity) and mikroElektronika (“mikroElektronika Associates”) for software product (“Software”) identified
above, including any software, media, and accompanying on-line or printed documentation.
BY INSTALLING, COPYING, OR OTHERWISE USING SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE
TO BE BOUND BY ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE LICENSE
AGREEMENT.
Upon your acceptance of the terms and conditions of the License Agreement,
mikroElektronika Associates grants you the right to use Software in a way provided
below.
This Software is owned by mikroElektronika Associates and is protected by copyright law and international copyright treaty. Therefore, you must treat this Software
like any other copyright material (e.g., a book).
You may transfer Software and documentation on a permanent basis provided. You
retain no copies and the recipient agrees to the terms of the License Agreement.
Except as provided in the License Agreement, you may not transfer, rent, lease,
lend, copy, modify, translate, sublicense, time-share or electronically transmit or
receive Software, media or documentation. You acknowledge that Software in the
source code form remains a confidential trade secret of mikroElektronika Associates
and therefore you agree not to modify Software or attempt to reverse engineer,
decompile, or disassemble it, except and only to the extent that such activity is
expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
If you have purchased an upgrade version of Software, it constitutes a single product with the mikroElektronika Associates software that you upgraded. You may use
the upgrade version of Software only in accordance with the License Agreement.
4
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic for 8051
Introduction
LIMITED WARRANTY
Respectfully excepting the Redistributables, which are provided “as is”, without warranty of any kind, mikroElektronika Associates warrants that Software, once updated and properly used, will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying documentation, and Software media will be free from defects in materials and
workmanship, for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt. Any implied
warranties on Software are limited to ninety (90) days.
mikroElektronika Associates’ and its suppliers’ entire liability and your exclusive
remedy shall be, at mikroElektronika Associates’ option, either (a) return of the price
paid, or (b) repair or replacement of Software that does not meet mikroElektronika
Associates’ Limited Warranty and which is returned to mikroElektronika Associates
with a copy of your receipt. DO NOT RETURN ANY PRODUCT UNTIL YOU HAVE
CALLED MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES FIRST AND OBTAINED A RETURN
AUTHORIZATION NUMBER. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of Software has
resulted from an accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement of Software
will be warranted for the rest of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES AND ITS SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDED, BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH REGARD TO SOFTWARE, AND THE PROVISION
OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT SERVICES.
IN NO EVENT SHALL MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES OR ITS SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES
FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS AND BUSINESS INFORMATION, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION, OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE SOFTWARE PRODUCT OR THE PROVISION OF
OR
FAILURE
TO
PROVIDE
SUPPORT
SERVICES,
EVEN
IF
MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ANY CASE, MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES’
ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
SOFTWARE PRODUCT PROVIDED, HOWEVER, IF YOU HAVE ENTERED INTO
A MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES SUPPORT SERVICES AGREEMENT,
MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES’ ENTIRE LIABILITY REGARDING
SUPPORT SERVICES SHALL BE GOVERNED BY THE TERMS OF THAT
AGREEMENT.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
5
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic for 8051
Introduction
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES
Software is not fault-tolerant and is not designed, manufactured or intended for use
or resale as on-line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe
performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or
communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons
systems, in which the failure of Software could lead directly to death, personal injury,
or severe physical or environmental damage (“High Risk Activities”). mikroElektronika Associates and its suppliers specifically disclaim any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
This statement may only be modified in writing signed by you and an authorised officer of mikroElektronika Associates. If any provision of this statement is found void
or unenforceable, the remainder will remain valid and enforceable according to its
terms. If any remedy provided is determined to have failed for its essential purpose,
all limitations of liability and exclusions of damages set forth in the Limited Warranty shall remain in effect.
This statement gives you specific legal rights; you may have others, which vary, from
country to country. mikroElektronika Associates reserves all rights not specifically
granted in this statement.
mikroElektronika
Visegradska 1A,
11000 Belgrade,
Europe.
Phone: + 381 11 36 28 830
Fax: +381 11 36 28 831
Web: www.mikroe.com
E-mail: [email protected]
6
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic for 8051
Introduction
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
In case you encounter any problem, you are welcome to our support forums at
www.mikroe.com/forum/. Here, you may also find helpful information, hardware tips,
and practical code snippets. Your comments and suggestions on future development of the mikroBasic for 8051 are always appreciated — feel free to drop a note
or two on our Wishlist.
In our Knowledge Base www.mikroe.com/en/kb/ you can find the answers to Frequently Asked Questions and solutions to known problems. If you can not find the
solution to your problem in Knowledge Base then report it to Support Desk
www.mikroe.com/en/support/. In this way, we can record and track down bugs more
efficiently, which is in our mutual interest. We respond to every bug report and question in a suitable manner, ever improving our technical support.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
7
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic for 8051
Introduction
HOW TO REGISTER
The latest version of the mikroBasic for 8051 is always available for downloading
from our website. It is a fully functional software libraries, examples, and comprehensive help included.
The only limitation of the free version is that it cannot generate hex output over 2
KB. Although it might sound restrictive, this margin allows you to develop practical,
working applications with no thinking of demo limit. If you intend to develop really
complex projects in the mikroBasic for 8051, then you should consider the possibility of purchasing the license key.
Who Gets the License Key
Buyers of the mikroBasic for 8051 are entitled to the license key. After you have
completed the payment procedure, you have an option of registering your mikroBasic. In this way you can generate hex output without any limitations.
How to Get License Key
After you have completed the payment procedure, start the program. Select Help ›
How to Register from the drop-down menu or click the How To Register Icon
.
Fill out the registration form (figure below), select your distributor, and click the Send
button.
8
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic for 8051
Introduction
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
9
CHAPTER 1
mikroBasic for 8051
Introduction
This will start your e-mail client with message ready for sending. Review the information you have entered, and add the comment if you deem it necessary. Please,
do not modify the subject line.
Upon receiving and verifying your request, we will send the license key to the e-mail
address you specified in the form.
After Receving the License Key
The license key comes as a small autoextracting file – just start it anywhere on your
computer in order to activate your copy of compiler and remove the demo limit. You
do not need to restart your computer or install any additional components. Also,
there is no need to run the mikroBasic for 8051 at the time of activation.
Notes:
- The license key is valid until you format your hard disk. In case you need
to format the hard disk, you should request a new activation key.
- Please keep the activation program in a safe place. Every time you
upgrade the compiler you should start this program again in order to reactivate the license.
10
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER
2
mikroBasic for
8051 Environment
The mikroBasic for 8051 is an user-friendly and intuitive environment:
11
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
IDE Overview
- The Code Editor features adjustable Syntax Highlighting, Code Folding,
Code Assistant, Parameters Assistant, Spell Checker, Auto Correct for
common typos and Code Templates (Auto Complete).
- The Code Explorer (with Keyboard shortcut browser and Quick Help
browser) is at your disposal for easier project management.
- The Project Manager alows multiple project management
- General project settings can be made in the Project Settings window
- Library manager enables simple handling libraries being used in a project
- The Error Window displays all errors detected during compiling and linking.
- The source-level Software Simulator lets you debug executable logic stepby-step by watching the program flow.
- The New Project Wizard is a fast, reliable, and easy way to create a project.
- Help files are syntax and context sensitive.
- Like in any modern Windows application, you may customize the layout of
mikroBasic for 8051 to suit your needs best.
- Spell checker underlines identifiers which are unknown to the project. In
this way it helps the programmer to spot potential problems early, much
before the project is compiled.
Spell checker can be disabled by choosing the option in the Preferences
dialog (F12).
12
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
MAIN MENU OPTIONS
Available Main Menu options are:
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
13
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
FILE MENU OPTIONS
The File menu is the main entry point for manipulation with the source files.
File
Description
Open a new editor window.
Open source file for editing or image file for viewing.
Reopen recently used file.
Save changes for active editor.
Save the active source file with the different name or
change the file type.
Close active source file.
Print Preview.
Exit IDE.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, File Toolbar, Managing Source Files
14
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
EDIT MENU OPTIONS
Edit
Description
Undo last change.
Redo last change.
Cut selected text to clipboard.
Copy selected text to clipboard.
Paste text from clipboard.
Delete selected text.
Select all text in active editor.
Find text in active editor.
Find next occurence of text in active editor.
Find previous occurence of text in active editor.
Replace text in active editor.
Find text in current file, in all opened files, or in files
from desired folder.
Goto to the desired line in active editor.
Advanced Code Editor options.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
15
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Advanced&gt;&gt;
Description
Comment selected code or put single line comment if
there is no selection.
Uncomment selected code or remove single line comment if there is no selection.
Indent selected code.
Outdent selected code.
Changes selected text case to lowercase.
Changes selected text case to uppercase.
Changes selected text case to titlercase.
Find Text
Dialog box for searching the document for the specified text. The search is performed in the direction specified. If the string is not found a message is displayed.
16
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Replace Text
Dialog box for searching for a text string in file and replacing it with another text
string.
Find In Files
Dialog box for searching for a text string in current file, all opened files, or in files on
a disk.
The string to search for is specified in the Text to find field. If Search in directories option
is selected, The files to search are specified in the Files mask and Path fields.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
17
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Go To Line
Dialog box that allows the user to specify the line number at which the cursor should
be positioned.
Replace Text
Dialog box for searching for a text string in file and replacing it with another text
string.
18
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Regular expressions
By checking this box, you will be able to advance your search, through Regular
expressions.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Edit Toolbar, Advanced Edit Toolbar
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
19
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
VIEW MENU OPTIONS
View
Description
Show/Hide toolbars.
Show/Hide debug windows.
Show/Hide Routine List in active editor.
Show/Hide Project Settings window.
Show/Hide Code Explorer window.
Show/Hide Project Manager window.
Show/Hide Library Manager window.
Show/Hide Bookmarks window.
Show/Hide Error Messages window.
Show/Hide Macro Editor window.
Show Window List window.
20
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
TOOLBARS
File Toolbar
File Toolbar is a standard toolbar with following options:
Icon
Description
Opens a new editor window.
Open source file for editing or image file for viewing.
Save changes for active window.
Save changes in all opened windows.
Close current editor.
Close all editors.
Print Preview.
Edit Toolbar
Edit Toolbar is a standard toolbar with following options:
Icon
Description
Undo last change.
Redo last change.
Cut selected text to clipboard.
Copy selected text to clipboard.
Paste text from clipboard.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
21
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Advanced Edit Toolbar
Advanced Edit Toolbar comes with following options:
Icon
Description
Comment selected code or put single line comment if there is no selection
Uncomment selected code or remove single line comment if there is no
selection.
Select text from starting delimiter to ending delimiter.
Go to ending delimiter.
Go to line.
Indent selected code lines.
Outdent selected code lines.
Generate HTML code suitable for publishing current source code on the web.
Find/Replace Toolbar
Find/Replace Toolbar is a standard toolbar with following options:
Icon
Description
Find text in current editor.
Find next occurence.
Find previous occurence.
Replace text.
Find text in files.
22
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Project Toolbar
Project Toolbar comes with following options:
Icon
Description
Open new project wizard. wizard.
Open Project
Save Project
Add existing project to project group.
Remove existing project from project group.
Add File To Project
Remove File From Project
Close current project.
Build Toolbar
Build Toolbar comes with following options:
Icon
Description
Build current project.
Build all opened projects.
Build and program active project.
Start programmer and load current HEX file.
Open assembly code in editor.
View statistics for current project.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
23
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Debugger
Debugger Toolbar comes with following options:
Icon
Description
Start Software Simulator.
Run/Pause debugger.
Stop debugger.
Step into.
Step over.
Step out.
Run to cursor.
Toggle breakpoint.
Toggle breakpoints.
Clear breakpoints.
View watch window
View stopwatch window
24
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Styles Toolbar
Styles toolbar allows you to easily customize your workspace.
Tools Toolbar
Tools Toolbar comes with following default options:
Icon
Description
Run USART Terminal
EEPROM
ASCII Chart
Seven segment decoder tool.
The Tools toolbar can easily be customized by adding new tools in Options(F12)
window.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Integrated Tools, Debugger Windows
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
25
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
PROJECT MENU OPTIONS
26
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Project
Description
Build active project.
Build all projects.
Build and program active project.
View Assembly.
Edit search paths.
Clean Project Folder
Add file to project.
Remove file from project.
Open New Project Wizard
Open existing project.
Save current project.
Open project group.
Close project group.
Save active project file with the different name.
Open recently used project.
Close active project.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Project Toolbar, Creating New Project, Project
Manager, Project Settings
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
27
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
RUN MENU OPTIONS
Run
Description
Start Software Simulator.
Stop debugger.
Pause Debugger.
Step Into.
Step Over.
Step Out.
Jump to interrupt in current project.
Toggle Breakpoint.
Breakpoints.
Clear Breakpoints.
Show/Hide Watch Window
Show/Hide Stopwatch Window
Toggle between Basic source and disassembly.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Debug Toolbar
28
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
TOOLS MENU OPTIONS
Tools
Description
Run mikroElektronika Programmer
Run USART Terminal
Run EEPROM Editor
Run ASCII Chart
Run 7 Segment Display Decoder
Generate HTML code suitable for publishing source
code on the web.
Generate your own custom LCD characters
Generate bitmap pictures for GLCD
UDP communication terminal.
Open Options window
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Tools Toolbar
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
29
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
HELP MENU OPTIONS
Help
Description
Open Help File.
Quick Help.
Check if new compiler version is available.
Open mikroElektronika Support Forums in a
default browser.
Open mikroElektronika Web Page in a default
browser.
Information on how to register
Open About window.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts
30
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
Below is a complete list of keyboard shortcuts available in mikroBasic for 8051 IDE.
You can also view keyboard shortcuts in the Code Explorer window, tab Keyboard.
IDE Shortcuts
Ctrl+X
Cut
F1
Help
Ctrl+Y
Delete entire line
Ctrl+N
New Unit
Ctrl+Z
Undo
Ctrl+O
Open
Ctrl+Shift+Z
Redo
Ctrl+Shift+O
Open Project
Ctrl+Shift+N
Open New Project
Ctrl+Space
Code Assistant
Ctrl+K
Close Project
Ctrl+Shift+Space
Parameters Assistant
Ctrl+F9
Compile
Ctrl+D
Find declaration
Shift+F9
Compile All
Ctrl+E
Incremental Search
Ctrl+F11
Compile and Program
Ctrl+L
Routine List
Shift+F4
View breakpoints
Ctrl+G
Goto line
Ctrl+Shift+F5
Clear breakpoints
Ctrl+J
Insert Code Template
F11
Start 8051Flash Programmer
Ctrl+Shift+.
Comment Code
Ctrl+Shift+,
Uncomment Code
F12
Preferences
Ctrl+number
Goto bookmark
Basic Editor Shortcuts
F3
Find, Find Next
Shift+F3
Find Previous
Alt+F3
Grep Search, Find in Files
Ctrl+A
Select All
Ctrl+C
Copy
Ctrl+F
Find
Ctrl+R
Replace
Ctrl+P
Print
Ctrl+S
Save unit
Ctrl+Shift+S
Save All
Ctrl+V
Paste
Advanced Editor Shortcuts
Ctrl+Shift+number Set bookmark
Ctrl+Shift+I
Indent selection
Ctrl+Shift+U
Unindent selection
TAB
Indent selection
Shift+TAB
Unindent selection
Alt+Select
Select columns
Ctrl+Alt+Select
Select columns
Ctrl+Alt+L
Convert selection to lowercase
Ctrl+Alt+U
Convert selection to
uppercase
Ctrl+Alt+T
Convert to Titlecase
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
31
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Software Simulator Shortcuts
32
F2
Jump To Interrupt
F4
Run to Cursor
F5
Toggle Breakpoint
F6
Run/Pause Debugger
F7
Step into
F8
Step over
F9
Debug
Ctrl+F2
Reset
Ctrl+F5
Add to Watch List
Ctrl+F8
Step out
Alt+D
Dissasembly view
Shift+F5
Open Watch Window
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
IDE OVERVIEW
The mikroBasic for 8051 is an user-friendly and intuitive environment:
- The Code Editor features adjustable Syntax Highlighting, Code Folding, Code
Assistant, Parameters Assistant, Spell Checker, Auto Correct for common typos
and Code Templates (Auto Complete).
- The Code Explorer (with Keyboard shortcut browser and Quick Help browser) is at
your disposal for easier project management.
- The Project Manager alows multiple project management
- General project settings can be made in the Project Settings window
- Library manager enables simple handling libraries being used in a project
- The Error Window displays all errors detected during compiling and linking.
- The source-level Software Simulator lets you debug executable logic step-by-step
by watching the program flow.
- The New Project Wizard is a fast, reliable, and easy way to create a project.
- Help files are syntax and context sensitive.
- Like in any modern Windows application, you may customize the layout of
mikroBasic for 8051 to suit your needs best.
- Spell checker underlines identifiers which are unknown to the project. In this way
it helps the programmer to spot potential problems early, much before the project
is compiled.
- Spell checker can be disabled by choosing the option in the Preferences dialog (F12).
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
33
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
CUSTOMIZING IDE LAYOUT
Docking Windows
You can increase the viewing and editing space for code, depending on how you
arrange the windows in the IDE.
Step 1: Click the window you want to dock, to give it focus.
Step 2: Drag the tool window from its current location. A guide diamond appears.
The four arrows of the diamond point towards the four edges of the IDE.
34
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Step 3: Move the pointer over the corresponding portion of the guide diamond. An
outline of the window appears in the designated area.
Step 4: To dock the window in the position indicated, release the mouse button.
Tip: To move a dockable window without snapping it into place, press CTRL while
dragging it.
Saving Layout
Once you have a window layout that you like, you can save the layout by typing the
name for the layout and pressing the Save Layout Icon
.
To set the layout select the desired layout from the layout drop-down list and click
the Set Layout Icon
.
To remove the layout from the drop-down list, select the desired layout from the list
and click the Delete Layout Icon
.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
35
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Auto Hide
Auto Hide enables you to see more of your code at one time by minimizing tool windows along the edges of the IDE when not in use.
- Click the window you want to keep visible to give it focus.
- Click the Pushpin Icon
on the title bar of the window.
When an auto-hidden window loses focus, it automatically slides back to its tab on
the edge of the IDE. While a window is auto-hidden, its name and icon are visible
on a tab at the edge of the IDE. To display an auto-hidden window, move your pointer over the tab. The window slides back into view and is ready for use.
36
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
ADVANCED CODE EDITOR
The Code Editor is advanced text editor fashioned to satisfy needs of professionals.
General code editing is the same as working with any standard text-editor, including
familiar Copy, Paste and Undo actions, common for Windows environment.
Advanced Editor Features
- Adjustable Syntax Highlighting
- Code Assistant
- Code Folding
- Parameter Assistant
- Code Templates (Auto Complete)
- Auto Correct for common typos
- Spell Checker
- Bookmarks and Goto Line
- Comment / Uncomment
You can configure the Syntax Highlighting, Code Templates and Auto Correct from
the Editor Settings dialog. To access the Settings, click Tools › Options from the
drop-down menu, click the Show Options Icon
or press F12 key.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
37
CHAPTER 2
Environment
38
mikroBasic for 8051
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Code Assistant
If you type the first few letters of a word and then press Ctrl+Space, all valid identifiers matching the letters you have typed will be prompted in a floating panel (see
the image below). Now you can keep typing to narrow the choice, or you can select
one from the list using the keyboard arrows and Enter.
Code Folding
Code folding is IDE feature which allows users to selectively hide and display sections of a source file. In this way it is easier to manage large regions of code within
one window, while still viewing only those subsections of the code that are relevant
during a particular editing session.
While typing, the code folding symbols (
and
) appear automatically. Use the
folding symbols to hide/unhide the code subsections.
If you place a mouse cursor over the tooltip box, the collapsed text will be shown in
a tooltip style box.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
39
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Parameter Assistant
The Parameter Assistant will be automatically invoked when you open parenthesis
“(” or press Shift+Ctrl+Space. If the name of a valid function precedes the parenthesis, then the expected parameters will be displayed in a floating panel. As you type
the actual parameter, the next expected parameter will become bold.
Code Templates (Auto Complete)
You can insert the Code Template by typing the name of the template (for instance,
whiles), then press Ctrl+J and the Code Editor will automatically generate a code.
You can add your own templates to the list. Select Tools › Options from the drop-down
menu, or click the Show Options Icon
and then select the Auto Complete Tab. Here
you can enter the appropriate keyword, description and code of your template.
Autocomplete macros can retreive system and project information:
-
40
%DATE% - current system date
%TIME% - current system time
%DEVICE% - device(MCU) name as specified in project settings
%DEVICE_CLOCK% - clock as specified in project settings
%COMPILER% - current compiler version
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
These macros can be used in template code, see template ptemplate provided with
mikroBasic for 8051 installation.
Auto Correct
The Auto Correct feature corrects common typing mistakes. To access the list of recognized typos, select Tools › Options from the drop-down menu, or click the Show
Options Icon
and then select the Auto Correct Tab. You can also add your own
preferences to the list.
Also, the Code Editor has a feature to comment or uncomment the selected code by simple click of a mouse, using the Comment Icon
and Uncomment Icon
from the
Code Toolbar.
Spell Checker
The Spell Checker underlines unknown objects in the code, so it can be easily
noticed and corrected before compiling your project.
Select Tools › Options from the drop-down menu, or click the Show Options Icon
and then select the Spell Checker Tab.
Bookmarks
Bookmarks make navigation through a large code easier. To set a bookmark, use
Ctrl+Shift+number. To jump to a bookmark, use Ctrl+number.
Goto Line
The Goto Line option makes navigation through a large code easier. Use the shortcut Ctrl+G to activate this option.
Comment / Uncomment
Also, the Code Editor has a feature to comment or uncomment the selected code by simple click of a mouse, using the Comment Icon
and Uncomment Icon
from the
Code Toolbar.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
41
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
CODE EXPLORER
The Code Explorer gives clear view of each item declared inside the source code.
You can jump to a declaration of any item by right clicking it. Also, besides the list of
defined and declared objects, code explorer displays message about first error and
it's location in code.
Following options are available in the Code Explorer:
Icon
Description
Expand/Collapse all nodes in tree.
Locate declaration in code.
42
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
ROUTINE LIST
Routine list diplays list of routines, and enables filtering routines by name. Routine
list window can be accessed by pressing Ctrl+L.
You can jump to a desired routine by double clicking on it.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
43
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
PROJECT MANAGER
Project Manager is IDE feature which allows users to manage multiple projects.
Several projects which together make project group may be open at the same time.
Only one of them may be active at the moment.
Setting project in active mode is performed by double click on the desired project in
the Project Manager.
Following options are available in the Project Manager:
44
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Icon
Description
Save project Group.
Open project group.
Close the active project.
Close project group.
Add project to the project group.
Remove project from the project group.
Add file to the active project.
Remove selected file from the project.
Build the active project.
Run mikroElektronika's Flash programmer.
For details about adding and removing files from project see Add/Remove Files from
Project.
Related topics: Project Settings, Project Menu Options, File Menu Options, Project
Toolbar, Build Toolbar, Add/Remove Files from Project
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
45
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
PROJECT SETTINGS WINDOW
Following options are available in the Project Settings Window:
- Device - select the appropriate device from the device drop-down list.
- Oscillator - enter the oscillator frequency value.
- Memory Model - Select the desired memory model.
Related topics: Memory Model, Project Manager
46
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
LIBRARY MANAGER
Library Manager enables simple handling libraries being used in a project. Library
Manager window lists all libraries (extencion .mcl) which are instantly stored in the
compiler Uses folder. The desirable library is added to the project by selecting check
box next to the library name.
In order to have all library functions accessible, simply press the button Check All
and all libraries will be selected. In case none library is needed in a project,
press the button Clear All
and all libraries will be cleared from the project.
Only the selected libraries will be linked.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
47
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Icon
Description
Refresh Library by scanning files in &quot;Uses&quot; folder.Useful when new
libraries are added by copying files to &quot;Uses&quot; folder.
Rebuild all available libraries. Useful when library sources are available and
need refreshing.
Include all available libraries in current project.
No libraries from the list will be included in current project.
Restore library to the state just before last project saving.
Related topics: mikroBasic for 8051 Libraries, Creating New Library
48
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
ERROR WINDOW
In case that errors were encountered during compiling, the compiler will report them
and won’t generate a hex file. The Error Window will be prompted at the bottom of
the main window by default.
The Error Window is located under message tab, and displays location and type of
errors the compiler has encountered. The compiler also reports warnings, but these
do not affect the output; only errors can interefere with the generation of hex.
Double click the message line in the Error Window to highlight the line where the
error was encountered.
Related topics: Error Messages
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
49
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
STATISTICS
After successful compilation, you can review statistics of your code. Click the Statistics Icon
.
Memory Usage Windows
Provides overview of RAM and ROM usage in the form of histogram.
RAM Memory
Data Memory
Displays Data memory usage in form of histogram.
50
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
XData Memory
Displays XData memory usage in form of histogram.
iData Memory
Displays iData memory usage in form of histogram.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
51
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
bData Memory
Displays bData memory usage in form of histogram.
PData Memory
Displays PData memory usage in form of histogram.
52
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Special Function Registers
Summarizes all Special Function Registers and their addresses.
General Purpose Registers
Summarizes all General Purpose Registers and their addresses. Also displays symbolic names of variables and their addresses.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
53
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
ROM Memory
ROM Memory Usage
Displays ROM memory usage in form of histogram.
ROM Memory Allocation
Displays ROM memory allocation.
54
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Procedures Windows
Provides overview procedures locations and sizes.
Procedures Size Window
Displays size of each procedure.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
55
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Procedures Locations Window
Displays how functions are distributed in microcontroller’s memory.
56
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
INTEGRATED TOOLS
USART Terminal
The mikroBasic for 8051 includes the USART communication terminal for RS232
communication. You can launch it from the drop-down menu Tools › USART Terminal or by clicking the USART Terminal Icon
from Tools toolbar.
ASCII Chart
The ASCII Chart is a handy tool, particularly useful when working with LCD display.
You can launch it from the drop-down menu Tools › ASCII chart or by clicking the
View ASCII Chart Icon
from Tools toolbar.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
57
CHAPTER 2
Environment
58
mikroBasic for 8051
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
EEPROM Editor
The EEPROM Editor is used for manipulating MCU's EEPROM memory. You can
launch it from the drop-down menu Tools › EEPROM Editor. When Use this
EEPROM definition is checked compiler will generate Intel hex file
project_name.ihex that contains data from EEPROM editor.
When you run mikroElektronika programmer software from mikroBasic for 8051 IDE
- project_name.hex file will be loaded automatically while ihex file must be loaded
manually.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
59
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
7 Segment Display Decoder
The 7 Segment Display Decoder is a convenient visual panel which returns decimal/hex value for any viable combination you would like to display on 7seg. Click on
the parts of 7 segment image to get the requested value in the edit boxes. You can
launch it from the drop-down menu Tools › 7 Segment Decoder or by clicking the
Seven Segment Icon
from Tools toolbar.
UDP Terminal
The mikroBasic for 8051 includes the UDP Terminal. You can launch it from the
drop-down menu Tools › UDP Terminal.
60
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
61
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Graphic LCD Bitmap Editor
The mikroBasic for 8051 includes the Graphic LCD Bitmap Editor. Output is the
mikroBasic for 8051 compatible code. You can launch it from the drop-down menu
Tools › GLCD Bitmap Editor.
62
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
LCD Custom Character
mikroBasic for 8051 includes the LCD Custom Character. Output is mikroBasic for
8051 compatible code. You can launch it from the drop-down menu Tools › LCD
Custom Character.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
63
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
OPTIONS
Options menu consists of three tabs: Code Editor, Tools and Output settings
Code editor
The Code Editor is advanced text editor fashioned to satisfy needs of professionals.
Tools
The mikroBasic for 8051 includes the Tools tab, which enables the use of shortcuts
to external programs, like Calculator or Notepad.
You can set up to 10 different shortcuts, by editing Tool0 - Tool9.
64
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
65
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Output settings
By modifying Output Settings, user can configure the content of the output files.
You can enable or disable, for example, generation of ASM and List file.
66
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
REGULAR EXPRESSIONS
Introduction
Regular Expressions are a widely-used method of specifying patterns of text to
search for. Special metacharacters allow you to specify, for instance, that a particular string you are looking for, occurs at the beginning, or end of a line, or contains n
recurrences of a certain character.
Simple matches
Any single character matches itself, unless it is a metacharacter with a special
meaning described below. A series of characters matches that series of characters
in the target string, so the pattern &quot;short&quot; would match &quot;short&quot; in the target string.
You can cause characters that normally function as metacharacters or escape
sequences to be interpreted by preceding them with a backslash &quot;\&quot;.
For instance, metacharacter &quot;^&quot; matches beginning of string, but &quot;\^&quot; matches
character &quot;^&quot;, and &quot;\\&quot; matches &quot;\&quot;, etc.
Examples :
integer matches string 'integer'
\^integer matches string '^integer'
Escape sequences
Characters may be specified using a escape sequences: &quot;\n&quot; matches a newline, &quot;\t&quot;
a tab, etc. More generally, \xnn, where nn is a string of hexadecimal digits, matches the character whose ASCII value is nn.
If you need wide(Unicode)character code, you can use '\x{nnnn}', where 'nnnn' - one
or more hexadecimal digits.
- \xnn - char with hex code nn
- \x{nnnn)- char with hex code nnnn (one byte for plain text and two bytes
for Unicode)
- \t - tab (HT/TAB), same as \x09
- \n - newline (NL), same as \x0a
- \r - car.return (CR), same as \x0d
- \f - form feed (FF), same as \x0c
- \a - alarm (bell) (BEL), same as \x07
- \e - escape (ESC) , same as \x1b
Examples:
sub\x20procedure matches 'sub procedure' (note space in the middle)
\tlongint matches 'longint' (predecessed by tab)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
67
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Character classes
You can specify a character class, by enclosing a list of characters in [], which will
match any of the characters from the list. If the first character after the &quot;[&quot; is &quot;^&quot;,
the class matches any character not in the list.
Examples:
count[aeiou]r finds strings 'countar', 'counter', etc. but not
'countbr', 'countcr', etc.
count[^aeiou]r finds strings 'countbr', 'countcr', etc. but not
'countar', 'counter', etc.
Within a list, the &quot;-&quot; character is used to specify a range, so that a-z represents
all characters between &quot;a&quot; and &quot;z&quot;, inclusive.
If you want &quot;-&quot; itself to be a member of a class, put it at the start or end of the list,
or escape it with a backslash.
If you want ']', you may place it at the start of list or escape it with a backslash.
Examples:
[-az] matches 'a', 'z' and '-'
[az-] matches 'a', 'z' and '-'
[a\-z] matches 'a', 'z' and '-'
[a-z] matches all twenty six small characters from 'a' to 'z'
[\n-\x0D] matches any of #10,#11,#12,#13.
[\d-t] matches any digit, '-' or 't'.
[]-a] matches any char from ']'..'a'.
Metacharacters
Metacharacters are special characters which are the essence of regular expressions.There are different types of metacharacters, described below.
Metacharacters - Line separators
^ - start of line
$ - end of line
\A - start of text
\Z - end of text
. - any character in line
68
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Examples:
^PORTA - matches string ' PORTA ' only if it's at the beginning of line
PORTA$ - matches string ' PORTA ' only if it's at the end of line
^PORTA$ - matches string ' PORTA ' only if it's the only string in line
PORT.r - matches strings like 'PORTA', 'PORTB', 'PORT1' and so on
The &quot;^&quot; metacharacter by default is only guaranteed to match beginning of the input
string/text, and the &quot;$&quot; metacharacter only at the end. Embedded line separators
will not be matched by ^&quot; or &quot;$&quot;.
You may, however, wish to treat a string as a multi-line buffer, such that the &quot;^&quot; will
match after any line separator within the string, and &quot;$&quot; will match before any line
separator.
Regular expressons works with line separators as recommended at
www.unicode.org ( http://www.unicode.org/unicode/reports/tr18/ ):
Metacharacters - Predefined classes
\w
\W
\d
\D
\s
\S
-
an alphanumeric character (including &quot;_&quot;)
a nonalphanumeric
a numeric character
a non-numeric
any space (same as [\t\n\r\f])
a non space
You may use \w, \d and \s within custom character classes.
Example:
routi\de - matches strings like 'routi1e', 'routi6e' and so on, but not
'routine', 'routime' and so on.
Metacharacters - Word boundaries
A word boundary (&quot;\b&quot;) is a spot between two characters that has a &quot;\w&quot; on one
side of it and a &quot;\W&quot; on the other side of it (in either order), counting the imaginary
characters off the beginning and end of the string as matching a &quot;\W&quot;.
\b - match a word boundary)
\B - match a non-(word boundary)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
69
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Metacharacters - Iterators
Any item of a regular expression may be followed by another type of metacharacters - iterators. Using this metacharacters,you can specify number of occurences of
previous character, metacharacter or subexpression.
* - zero or more (&quot;greedy&quot;), similar to {0,}
+ - one or more (&quot;greedy&quot;), similar to {1,}
? - zero or one (&quot;greedy&quot;), similar to {0,1}
{n} - exactly n times (&quot;greedy&quot;)
{n,} - at least n times (&quot;greedy&quot;)
{n,m} - at least n but not more than m times (&quot;greedy&quot;)
*? - zero or more (&quot;non-greedy&quot;), similar to {0,}?
+? - one or more (&quot;non-greedy&quot;), similar to {1,}?
?? - zero or one (&quot;non-greedy&quot;), similar to {0,1}?
{n}? - exactly n times (&quot;non-greedy&quot;)
{n,}? - at least n times (&quot;non-greedy&quot;)
{n,m}? - at least n but not more than m times (&quot;non-greedy&quot;)
So, digits in curly brackets of the form, {n,m}, specify the minimum number of times
to match the item n and the maximum m. The form {n} is equivalent to {n,n} and
matches exactly n times. The form {n,} matches n or more times. There is no limit
to the size of n or m, but large numbers will chew up more memory and slow down
execution.
If a curly bracket occurs in any other context, it is treated as a regular character.
Examples:
count.*r &szlig;- matches strings like 'counter', 'countelkjdflkj9r' and
'countr'
count.+r - matches strings like 'counter', 'countelkjdflkj9r' but
not 'countr'
count.?r - matches strings like 'counter', 'countar' and 'countr'
but not 'countelkj9r'
counte{2}r - matches string 'counteer'
counte{2,}r - matches strings like 'counteer', 'counteeer',
'counteeer' etc.
counte{2,3}r - matches strings like 'counteer', or 'counteeer' but
not 'counteeeer'
A little explanation about &quot;greediness&quot;. &quot;Greedy&quot; takes as many as possible, &quot;nongreedy&quot; takes as few as possible.
For example, 'b+' and 'b*' applied to string 'abbbbc' return 'bbbb', 'b+?'
returns 'b', 'b*?' returns empty string, 'b{2,3}?' returns 'bb', 'b{2,3}'
returns 'bbb'.
70
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Metacharacters - Alternatives
You can specify a series of alternatives for a pattern using &quot;|&quot; to separate them, so
that bit|bat|bot will match any of &quot;bit&quot;, &quot;bat&quot;, or &quot;bot&quot; in the target string (as
would b(i|a|o)t)). The first alternative includes everything from the last pattern
delimiter (&quot;(&quot;, &quot;[&quot;, or the beginning of the pattern) up to the first &quot;|&quot;, and the last
alternative contains everything from the last &quot;|&quot; to the next pattern delimiter. For
this reason, it's common practice to include alternatives in parentheses, to minimize
confusion about where they start and end.
Alternatives are tried from left to right, so the first alternative found for which the
entire expression matches, is the one that is chosen. This means that alternatives
are not necessarily greedy. For example: when matching rou|rout against &quot;routine&quot;, only the &quot;rou&quot; part will match, as that is the first alternative tried, and it successfully matches the target string (this might not seem important, but it is important
when you are capturing matched text using parentheses.) Also remember that &quot;|&quot;
is interpreted as a literal within square brackets, so if you write [bit|bat|bot],
you're really only matching [biao|].
Examples:
rou(tine|te) - matches strings 'routine' or 'route'.
Metacharacters - Subexpressions
The bracketing construct ( ... ) may also be used for define regular subexpressions. Subexpressions are numbered based on the left to right order of their opening parenthesis. First subexpression has number '1'
Examples:
(int){8,10} matches strings which contain 8, 9 or 10 instances of the 'int'
routi([0-9]|a+)e matches 'routi0e', 'routi1e' , 'routine',
'routinne', 'routinnne' etc.
Metacharacters - Backreferences
Metacharacters \1 through \9 are interpreted as backreferences. \ matches previously matched subexpression #.
Examples:
(.)\1+ matches 'aaaa' and 'cc'.
(.+)\1+ matches 'abab' and '123123'
(['&quot;]?)(\d+)\1 matches &quot;13&quot; (in double quotes), or '4' (in single
quotes) or 77 (without quotes) etc
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
71
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
MIKROBASIC FOR 8051 COMMAND LINE OPTIONS
Usage: mikroBasic8051 [-'opts' [-'opts']]
'opts']]
Infile can be of *.mbas and *.mcl type.
['infile'
[-'opts']]
[-
The following parameters and some more (see manual) are valid:
- P : MCU for which compilation will be done.
- FO : Set oscillator.
- SP : Add directory to the search path list.
- N : Output files generated to file path specified by filename.
- B : Save compiled binary files (*.mcl) to 'directory'.
- O : Miscellaneous output options.
- DBG : Generate debug info.
- E : Set memory model opts ( S | C | L (small, compact, large)).
- L : Check and rebuild new libraries.
- C : Turn on case sensitivity.
Example:
mikroBasic8051.exe -MSF -DBG -pAT89S8253 -ES -O11111114 -fo10
-N&quot;C:\Lcd\Lcd.mbproj&quot;
-SP&quot;C:\Program
Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroBasic 8051\defs\&quot;
-SP&quot;C:\Program Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroBasic 8051\uses\&quot;
-SP&quot;C:\Lcd\&quot;
&quot;Lcd.mbas&quot;
&quot;System.mcl&quot;
&quot;Math.mcl&quot;
&quot;Math_Double.mcl&quot; &quot;Delays.mcl&quot; &quot;__Lib_Lcd.mcl&quot; &quot;__Lib_LcdConsts.mcl&quot;
Parameters used in the example:
-MSF : Short Message Format; used for internal purposes by IDE.
-DBG : Generate debug info.
-pAT89S8253 : MCU AT89S8253 selected.
-ES : Set small memory model.
-O11111114 : Miscellaneous output options.
-fo10 : Set oscillator frequency [in MHz].
-N&quot;C:\Lcd\Lcd.mbproj&quot; -SP&quot;C:\Program
Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroBasic 8051\defs\&quot; : Output files
generated to file path specified by filename.
-SP&quot;C:\Program Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroBasic 8051\defs\&quot; :
Add directory to the search path list.
-SP&quot;C:\Program Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroBasic 8051\uses\&quot; :
Add directory to the search path list.
-SP&quot;C:\Lcd\&quot; : Add directory to the search path list.
&quot;Lcd.mbas&quot;
&quot;System.mcl&quot;
&quot;Math.mcl&quot;
&quot;Math_Double.mcl&quot;
&quot;Delays.mcl&quot; &quot;__Lib_Lcd.mcl&quot; &quot;__Lib_LcdConsts.mcl&quot; : Specify input files.
72
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
PROJECTS
The mikroBasic 8051 organizes applications into projects, consisting of a single
project file (extension .mbproj) and one or more source files (extension .mbas).
mikroBasic for 8051 IDE allows you to manage multiple projects (see Project Manager). Source files can be compiled only if they are part of a project.
The project file contains the following information:
-
project name and optional description,
target device,
memory model,
device flags (config word),
device clock,
list of the project source files with paths,
binary files (*.mcl),
image files,
other files.
Note that the project does not include files in the same way as preprocessor does,
see Add/Remove Files from Project.
New Project
The easiest way to create a project is by means of the New Project Wizard, dropdown menu Project › New Project or by clicking the New Project Icon
from Pro-
ject Toolbar.
New Project Wizard Steps
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
73
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Step One- Provides basic information on settings in the following steps.
Step Two - Select the device from the device drop-down list.
74
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Step Three - enter the oscillator frequency value.
Step Four - Select the desired memory model.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
75
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Step Five - Specify the location where your project will be saved.
Step Six - Add project file to the project if they are avaiable at this point. You can
always add project files later using Project Manager
Related topics: Project Manager, Project Settings, Memory Model
76
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
CUSTOMIZING PROJECTS
Edit Project
You can change basic project settings in the Project Settings window. You can
change chip, oscillator frequency, and memory model. Any change in the Project
Setting Window affects currently active project only, so in case more than one project is open, you have to ensure that exactly the desired project is set as active one
in the Project Manager.
Managing Project Group
mikroBasic for 8051 IDE provides covenient option which enables several projects
to be open simultaneously. If you have several projects being connected in some
way, you can create a project group.
The project group may be saved by clicking the Save Project Group Icon from the
Project Manager window. The project group may be reopend by clicking the Open
Project Group Icon . All relevant data about the project group is stored in the project
group file (extension .mpg)
ADD/REMOVE FILES FROM PROJECT
The project can contain the following file types:
- .mbas source files
- .mcl binary files
- .pld project level defines files (future
upgrade)
- image files
- .hex, .asm and .lst files, see output
files. These files can not be added or
removed from project.
- other files
The list of relevant source files is stored in the project file (extension .mbproj).
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
77
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
To add source file to the project, click the Add File to Project Icon
. Each added
source file must be self-contained, i.e. it must have all necessary definitions after
preprocessing.
To remove file(s) from the project, click the Remove File from Project Icon
.
Note: For inclusion of the module files, use the include clause. See File Inclusion
for more information.
Related topics: Project Manager, Project Settings, Memory Model
SOURCE FILES
Source files containing Basic code should have the extension .mbas. The list of
source files relevant to the application is stored in project file with extension
.mbproj, along with other project information. You can compile source files only if
they are part of the project.
Use the preprocessor directive #include to include header files with the extension
.h. Do not rely on the preprocessor to include source files other than headers — see
Add/Remove Files from Project for more information.
Managing Source Files
Creating new source file
To create a new source file, do the following:
1. Select File › New Unit from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+N, or click
the New File Icon
from the File Toolbar.
2. A new tab will be opened. This is a new source file. Select File › Save
from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+S, or click the Save File Icon
from the File Toolbar and name it as you want.
If you use the New Project Wizard, an empty source file, named after the project with
extension .mbas, will be created automatically. The mikroBasic 8051 does not
require you to have a source file named the same as the project, it’s just a matter of
convenience.
78
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Opening an existing file
1. Select File › Open from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+O, or click
the Open File Icon
from the File Toolbar. In Open Dialog browse
to the location of the file that you want to open, select it and click the Open
button.
2. The selected file is displayed in its own tab. If the selected file is already
open, its current Editor tab will become active.
Printing an open file
1. Make sure that the window containing the file that you want to print is the
active window.
2. Select File › Print from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+P.
3. In the Print Preview Window, set a desired layout of the document and
click the OK button. The file will be printed on the selected printer.
Saving file
1. Make sure that the window containing the file that you want to save is the
active window.
2. Select File › Save from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+S, or click the
Save File Icon
from the File Toolbar.
Saving file under a different name
1. Make sure that the window containing the file that you want to save is the
active window.
2. Select File › Save As from the drop-down menu. The New File Name dialog will be displayed.
3. In the dialog, browse to the folder where you want to save the file.
4. In the File Name field, modify the name of the file you want to save.
5. Click the Save button.
Closing file
1. Make sure that the tab containing the file that you want to close is the
active tab.
2. Select File › Close from the drop-down menu, or right click the tab of the
file that you want to close and select Close option from the context menu.
3. If the file has been changed since it was last saved, you will be prompted to save your changes.
Related topics:File Menu, File Toolbar, Project Manager, Project Settings,
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
79
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
CLEAN PROJECT FOLDER
Clean Project Folder
This menu gives you option to choose which files from your current project you want
to delete.
Files marked in bold can be easily recreated by building a project. Other files should
be marked for deletion only with a great care, because IDE cannot recover them.
80
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
COMPILATION
When you have created the project and written the source code, it's time to compile
it. Select Project › Build from the drop-down menu, or click the Build Icon
from
the Project Toolbar. If more more than one project is open you can compile all open
projects by selecting Project › Build All from the drop-down menu, or click the Build
All Icon
from the Project Toolbar.
Progress bar will appear to inform you about the status of compiling. If there are
some errors, you will be notified in the Error Window. If no errors are encountered,
the mikroBasic for 8051 will generate output files.
OUTPUT FILES
Upon successful compilation, the mikroBasic for 8051 will generate output files in
the project folder (folder which contains the project file .mbproj). Output files are
summarized in the table below:
Format
Description
File Type
Intel HEX
Intel style hex records. Use this file to program
8051 MCU.
Binary
mikro Compiled Library. Binary distribution of appli.mcl
cation that can be included in other projects.
List File
Overview of 8051 memory allotment: instruction
addresses, registers, routines and labels.
.lst
Assembler File
Human readable assembly with symbolic names,
extracted from the List File.
.asm
.hex
ASSEMBLY VIEW
After compiling the program in the mikroBasic for 8051, you can click the View
Assembly icon
or select Project › View Assembly from the drop-down menu
to review the generated assembly code (.asm file) in a new tab window. Assembly
is human-readable with symbolic names.
Related topics:Project Menu, Project Toolbar, Error Window, Project Manager, Project Settings
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
81
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
ERROR MESSAGES
Compiler Error Messages:
- &quot;%s&quot; is not valid identifier.
- Unknown type &quot;%s&quot;.
- Identifier &quot;%s&quot; was not declared.
- Syntax error: Expected &quot;%s&quot; but &quot;%s&quot; found.
- Argument is out of range &quot;%s&quot;.
- Syntax error in additive expression.
- File &quot;%s&quot; not found.
- Invalid command &quot;%s&quot;.
- Not enough parameters.
- Too many parameters.
- Too many characters.
- Actual and formal parameters must be identical.
- Invalid ASM instruction: &quot;%s&quot;.
- Identifier &quot;%s&quot; has been already declared in &quot;%s&quot;.
- Syntax error in multiplicative expression.
- Definition file for &quot;%s&quot; is corrupted.
- ORG directive is currently supported for interrupts only.
- Not enough ROM.
- Not enough RAM.
- External procedure &quot;%s&quot; used in &quot;%s&quot; was not found.
- Internal error: &quot;%s&quot;.
- Unit cannot recursively use itself.
- &quot;%s&quot; cannot be used out of loop.
- Supplied and formal parameters do not match (&quot;%s&quot; to &quot;%s&quot;).
- Constant cannot be assigned to.
- Constant array must be declared as global.
- Incompatible types (&quot;%s&quot; to &quot;%s&quot;).
- Too many characters (&quot;%s&quot;).
- Soft_Uart cannot be initialized with selected baud rate/device clock.
- Main label cannot be used in modules.
- Break/Continue cannot be used out of loop.
- Preprocessor Error: &quot;%s&quot;.
- Expression is too complicated.
- Duplicated label &quot;%s&quot;.
- Complex type cannot be declared here.
- Record is empty.
- Unknown type &quot;%s&quot;.
- File not found &quot;%s&quot;.
- Constant argument cannot be passed by reference.
- Pointer argument cannot be passed by reference.
82
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
- Operator &quot;%s&quot; not applicable to these operands &quot;%s&quot;.
- Exit cannot be called from the main block.
- Array parameter must be passed by reference.
- Error occured while compiling &quot;%s&quot;.
- Recursive types are not allowed.
- Adding strings is not allowed, use &quot;strcat&quot; procedure instead.
- Cannot declare pointer to array, use pointer to structure which has array field.
- Return value of the function &quot;%s&quot; is not defined.
- Assignment to for loop variable is not allowed.
- &quot;%s&quot; is allowed only in the main program.
- Start address of &quot;%s&quot; has already been defined.
- Simple constant cannot have a fixed address.
- Invalid date/time format.
- Invalid operator &quot;%s&quot;.
- File &quot;%s&quot; is not accessible.
- Forward routine &quot;%s&quot; is missing implementation.
- &quot;;&quot; is not allowed before &quot;else&quot;.
- Not enough elements: expected &quot;%s&quot;, but &quot;%s&quot; elements found.
- Too many elements: expected &quot;%s&quot; elements.
- &quot;external&quot; is allowed for global declarations only.
- Integer const expected.
- Recusion in definition.
- Array corupted.
- Arguments cannot have explicit memory specificator.
- Bad storage class.
- Pointer to function required.
- Function required.
- Pointer required.
- Illegal pointer conversion to double.
- Integer type needed.
- Members can not have memory specifier.
- Members can not be of bit or sbit type.
- Too many initializers.
- Too many initializers of subaggregate.
- Already used [%s].
- Address must be greater than 0.
- [%s] Identifier redefined.
- User abort.
- Expression must be greater then 0.
- Invalid declarator expected '(' or identifier.
- Typdef name redefined: [%s].
- Declarator error.
- Specifer/qualifier list expected.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
83
CHAPTER 2
Environment
mikroBasic for 8051
- [%s] already used.
- ILevel can be used only with interrupt service routines.
- ';' expected but [%s] found.
- Expected'[{'.
- [%s] Identifier redefined.
- '(' expected but [%s] found.
- ')' expected but [%s] found.
- 'case' out of switch.
- ':' expected but [%s] found.
- 'default' label out of switch.
- Switch expression must evaluate to integral type.
- While expected but [%s] found.
- 'continue' outside of loop.
- Unreachable code.
- Label redefined.
- Too many chars.
- Unresolved type.
- Arrays of objects containing zero-size arrays are illegal.
- Invalid enumerator.
- ILevel can be used only with interrupt service routines.
- ILevel value must be integral constant.
- ILevel out of range [0..4].
- '}' expected but [%s] found.
- '(' expected but [%s] found.
- 'break' outside of loop or switch.
- Empty char.
- Nonexistent field [%s].
- Illegal char representation: [%s].
- Initializer syntax error: multidimension array missing subscript.
- Too many initializers of subaggregate.
- At least one Search Path must be specified.
- Not enough RAM for call satck.
- Parameter [%s] must not be of bit or sbit type.
- Function must not have return value of bit or sbit type.
- Redefinition of [%s] already defined in [%s].
- Main function is not defined.
- System routine not found for initialization of: [%s].
- Bad agregate definition [%s].
- Unresolved extern [%s].
- Bad function absolute address [%s].
- Not enough RAM [%s].
- Compilation Started.
- Compiled Successfully.
- Finished (with errors): 01 Mar 2008, 14:22:26
- Project Linked Successfully.
- All files Preprocessed in [%s] ms.
- All files Compiled in [%s] ms.
- Linked in [%s] ms.
- Project [%s] completed: [%s] ms.
84
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
LINKER ERROR MESSAGES:
- Linker error: &quot;%s&quot; &quot;%s&quot;.
- Warning: Variable &quot;%s&quot; is not initialized.
- Warning: Return value of the function &quot;%s&quot; is not defined.
- Hint: Constant &quot;%s&quot; has been declared, but not used.
- Warning: Identifier &quot;%s&quot; overrides declaration in unit &quot;%s&quot;.
- Constant &quot;%s&quot; was not found.
- Address of the routine has already been defined.
- Duplicated label &quot;%s&quot;.
- File &quot;%s&quot; not found.
HINT MESSAGES:
-
Hint: Variable &quot;%s&quot; has been declared, but not used.
Warning: Variable &quot;%s&quot; is not initialized.
Warning: Return value of the function &quot;%s&quot; is not defined.
Hint: Constant &quot;%s&quot; has been declared, but not used.
Warning: Identifier &quot;%s&quot; overrides declaration in unit &quot;%s&quot;.
Warning: Generated baud rate is &quot;%s&quot; bps (error =&quot;%s&quot; percent).
Warning: Result size may exceed destination array size.
Warning: Infinite loop.
Warning: Implicit typecast performed from &quot;%s&quot; to &quot;%s&quot;.
Hint: Unit &quot;%s&quot; has been recompiled.
Hint: Variable &quot;%s&quot; has been eliminated by optimizer.
Warning: Implicit typecast of integral value to pointer
Warning: Library &quot;%s&quot; was not found in search path.
Warning: Interrupt context saving has been turned off.
Hint: Compiling unit &quot;%s&quot;.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
85
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
SOFTWARE SIMULATOR OVERVIEW
The Source-level Software Simulator is an integral component of the mikroBasic for
8051 environment. It is designed to simulate operations of the 8051 MCUs and
assist the users in debugging Basic code written for these devices.
After you have successfully compiled your project, you can run the Software Simulator by selecting Run › Start Debugger from the drop-down menu, or by clicking
the Start Debugger Icon
from the Debugger Toolbar. Starting the Software Sim-
ulator makes more options available: Step Into, Step Over, Step Out, Run to Cursor,
etc. Line that is to be executed is color highlighted (blue by default).
Note: The Software Simulator simulates the program flow and execution of instruction lines, but it cannot fully emulate 8051 device behavior, i.e. it doesn’t update
timers, interrupt flags, etc.
Watch Window
The Software Simulator Watch Window is the main Software Simulator window
which allows you to monitor program items while simulating your program. To show
the Watch Window, select View › Debug Windows › Watch from the drop-down
menu.
The Watch Window displays variables and registers of the MCU, along with their
addresses and values.
There are two ways of adding variable/register to the watch list:
- by its real name (variable's name in &quot;Basic&quot; code). Just select desired variable/register from Select variable from list drop-down menu and click the
Add Button
.
- by its name ID (assembly variable name). Simply type name ID of the variable/register you want to display into Search the variable by assemby
name box and click the Add Button
.
Variables can also be removed from the Watch window, just select the variable that
you want to remove and then click the Remove Button
Add All Button
86
.
adds all variables.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Remove All Button
Environment
removes all variables.
You can also expand/collapse complex variables, i.e. struct type variables, strings...
Values are updated as you go through the simulation. Recently changed items are
colored red.
Double clicking a variable or clicking the Properties Button
opens the
Edit Value window in which you can assign a new value to the selected variable/register. Also, you can choose the format of variable/register representation between
decimal, hexadecimal, binary, float or character. All representations except float are
unsigned by default. For signed representation click the check box next to the
Signed label.
An item's value can be also changed by double clicking item's value field and typing
the new value directly.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
87
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
Stopwatch Window
The Software Simulator Stopwatch Window is available from the drop-down menu,
View › Debug Windows › Stopwatch.
The Stopwatch Window displays a current count of cycles/time since the last Software Simulator action. Stopwatch measures the execution time (number of cycles)
from the moment Software Simulator has started and can be reset at any time. Delta
represents the number of cycles between the lines where Software Simulator action
has started and ended.
Note: The user can change the clock in the Stopwatch Window, which will recalculate values for the latest specified frequency. Changing the clock in the Stopwatch
Window does not affect actual project settings – it only provides a simulation.
88
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic for 8051
Specifics
RAM Window
The Software Simulator RAM Window is available from the drop-down menu, View
› Debug Windows › RAM.
The RAM Window displays a map of MCU’s RAM, with recently changed items colored red. You can change value of any field by double-clicking it.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
89
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
SOFTWARE SIMULATOR OPTIONS
Name
Description:
Start Debugger
Start Software Simulator.
Run/Pause Debugger
Run or pause Software Simulator.
Stop Debugger
Stop Software Simulator.
Toggle Breakpoints
Toggle breakpoint at the current cursor position. To view
all breakpoints, select Run &gt; View Breakpoints from the
drop–down menu. Double clicking an item in the Breakpoints Window List locates the breakpoint.
Run to cursor
Execute all instructions between the current instruction
and cursor position.
Step Into
Execute the current Basic (single or multi–cycle) instruction, then halt. If the instruction is a routine call, enter the
routine and halt at the first instruction following the call.
Step Over
Execute the current Basic (single or multi–cycle) instruction, then halt.
Step Out
Execute all remaining instructions in the current routine,
return and then halt.
Related topics: Run Menu, Debug Toolbar
90
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 2
mikroBasic for 8051
Environment
CREATING NEW LIBRARY
mikroBasic for 8051 allows you to create your own libraries. In order to create a
library in mikroBasic for 8051 follow the steps bellow:
1. Create a new Basic source file, see Managing Source Files
2. Save the file in the compiler's Uses folder:
DriveName:\Program
8051\Uses\__Lib_Example.mbas
Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroBasic
3. Write a code for your library and save it.
4. Add __Lib_Example.mbas file in some project, see Project Manager.
Recompile the project.
5. Compiled file __Lib_Example.mcl should appear in ...\mikroBasic
8051\Uses\ folder.
6. Open the definition file for the MCU that you want to use. This file is
placed in the compiler's Defs folder:
DriveName:\Program
Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroBasic
8051\Defs\
and it is named MCU_NAME.mlk, for example AT89S8253.mlk
7. Add the Library_Alias and Library_Name at the end of the definition
file, for example #pragma SetLib([Example_Library, __Lib_Example])
8. Add Library to mlk file for each MCU that you want to use with your library.
9. Click Refresh button in Library Manager
Multiple Library Versions
Library Alias represents unique name that is linked to corresponding Library .mcl
file. For example UART library for AT89S8253 is different from UART library for
AT89S4051 MCU. Therefore, two different UART Library versions were made, see
mlk files for these two MCUs. Note that these two libraries have the same Library
Alias (UART) in both mlk files. This approach enables you to have identical representation of UART library for both MCUs in Library Manager.
Related topics: Library Manager, Project Manager, Managing Source Files
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
91
CHAPTER 2
Environment
92
mikroBasic for 8051
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER
3
mikroBasic for
8051 Specific
The following topics cover the specifics of mikroBasic compiler:
- Basic Standard Issues
- Predefined Globals and Constants
- Accessing Individual Bits
- Interrupts
- 8051 Pointers
- Linker Directives
- Built-in Routines
- Code Optimization
93
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic for 8051
Specifics
BASIC STANDARD ISSUES
Divergence from the Basic Standard
Function recursion is not supported because of no easily-usable stack and limited
memory 8051 Specific
Basic Language Exstensions
mikroBasic for 8051 has additional set of keywords that do not belong to the standard Basic language keywords:
-
code
data
idata
bdata
xdata
pdata
small
compact
large
at
sbit
bit
sfr
ilevel
Related topics: Keywords, 8051 Specific
94
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic for 8051
Specifics
PREDEFINED GLOBALS AND CONSTANTS
In order to facilitate 8051 programming, mikroBasic for 8051 implements a number
of predefined globals and constants.
SFRs and related constants
All 8051 SFRs are implicitly declared as global variables of volatile word type.
These identifiers have an external linkage, and are visible in the entire project.
When creating a project, the mikroBasic for 8051 will include an appropriate
(*.mbas) file from defs folder, containing declarations of available SFRs and constants (such as PORTB, ADPCFG, etc). All identifiers are in upper case, identical to
nomenclature in the Microchip datasheets.
For a complete set of predefined globals and constants, look for “Defs” in the
mikroBasic for 8051 installation folder, or probe the Code Assistant for specific letters (Ctrl+Space in the Code Editor).
Math constants
In addition, several commonly used math constants are predefined in mikroBasic for
8051:
PI
PI_HALF
TWO_PI
E
= 3.1415926
= 1.5707963
= 6.2831853
= 2.7182818
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
95
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic for 8051
Specifics
ACCESSING INDIVIDUAL BITS
The mikroBasic for 8051 allows you to access individual bits of 8-bit variables. It also
supports sbit and bit data types
Accessing Individual Bits Of Variables
Simply use the direct member selector (.) with a variable, followed by one of identifiers 0, 1, … , 15 with 15 being the most significant bit.
There is no need of any special declarations. This kind of selective access is an
intrinsic feature of mikroBasic for 8051 and can be used anywhere in the code. Identifiers 0–15 are not case sensitive and have a specific namespace. You may override them with your own members 0–15 within any given structure.
If you are familiar with a particular MCU, you can also access bits by name:
' Clear Bit 3 on Port0
P0.B3 = 0
See Predefined Globals and Constants for more information on register/bit names.
sbit type
The mikroBasic Compiler have sbit data type which provides access to bit-addressable SFRs. For example:
dim LEDA as sbit at P0.0
dim Name as sbit at sfr-name.&lt;Bbit-position&gt;
The previously declared SFR (sfr-name) is the base address for the sbit. It must be
evenly divisible by 8. The bit-position (which must be a number from 0-7) follows the
dot symbol ('.') and specifies the bit position to access. For example:
dim OV as sbit at PSW.2
dim CY as sbit at PSW.7
96
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic for 8051
Specifics
bit type
The mikroBasic Compiler provides a bit data type that may be used for variable
declarations. It can not be used for argument lists, and function-return values.
dim bf as bit
' bit variable
All bit variables are stored in a bit addressable portion 0x20-0x2F segment located
in the internal memory area of the 8051. Because this area is only 16 bytes long, a
maximum of 128 bit variables may be declared within any one scope.
There are no pointers to bit variables:
dim ptr as ^bit
' invalid
An array of type bit is not valid:
dim arr as array[5] of bit
' invalid
Bit variables can not be initialized nor they can be members of structures and
unions.
Related topics: Predefined globals and constants
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
97
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic for 8051
Specifics
INTERRUPTS
8051 derivates acknowledges an interrupt request by executing a hardware generated LCALL to the appropriate servicing routine ISRs. ISRs are organized in IVT.
ISR is defined as a standard function but with the org directive afterwards which
connects the function with specific interrupt vector. For example org 0x000B is IVT
address of Timer 0 Overflow interrupt source of the AT89S8253.
For more information on interrupts and IVT refer to the specific data sheet.
Function Calls from Interrupt
Calling functions from within the interrupt routine is allowed. The compiler takes care
about the registers being used, both in &quot;interrupt&quot; and in &quot;main&quot; thread, and performs
&quot;smart&quot; context-switching between them two, saving only the registers that have
been used in both threads. It is not recommended to use function call from interrupt.
In case of doing that take care of stack depth.
Interrupt Priority Level
8051 MCUs has possibilty to assign different priority level trough setting appropriate
values to coresponding SFRs. You should also assign ISR same priority level by
ilevel keyword followed by interrupt priority number.
Available interrupt priority levels are: 0 (default), 1, 2 and 3.
sub procedure Timer0ISR() org 0x000B ilevel 2
//set Timer0ISR to be ISR for Timer 0 Overflow priority level 2.
end sub
Related topics: Basic standard issues
98
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic for 8051
Specifics
LINKER DIRECTIVES
mikroBasic for 8051 uses internal algorithm to distribute objects within memory. If
you need to have a variable or routine at the specific predefined address, use the
linker directives absolute and org.
Note: You must specify an even address when using the linker directives.
Directive absolute
The directive absolute specifies the starting address in RAM for a variable. If the
variable spans more than 1 word (16-bit), higher words will be stored at the consecutive locations.
The absolute directive is appended to the declaration of a variable:
dim x as word absolute 0x32
' Variable x will occupy 1 word (16 bits) at address 0x32
dim y as longint absolute 0x34
' Variable y will occupy 2 words at addresses 0x34 and 0x36
Be careful when using absolute directive, as you may overlap two variables by
accident. For example:
dim i as word absolute 0x42
' Variable i will occupy 1 word at address 0x42;
dim jj as longint absolute 0x40
' Variable will occupy 2 words at 0x40 and 0x42; thus,
' changing i changes jj at the same time and vice versa
Note: You must specify an even address when using the directive absolute.
Directive org
The directive org specifies the starting address of a routine in ROM. It is appended
to the declaration of routine. For example:
sub procedure proc(dim par as word) org 0x200
' Procedure will start at the address 0x200;
...
end sub
Note: You must specify an even address when using the directive org.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
99
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic for 8051
Specifics
BUILT-IN ROUTINES
The mikroBasic for 8051 compiler provides a set of useful built-in utility functions.
The Lo, Hi, Higher, Highest routines are implemented as macros. If you want
to use these functions you must include built_in.h header file (located in the inlclude folder of the compiler) into your project.
The Delay_us and Delay_ms routines are implemented as “inline”; i.e. code is generated in the place of a call, so the call doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
The Vdelay_ms, Delay_Cyc and Get_Fosc_kHz are actual Basic routines. Their
sources can be found in Delays.mbas file located in the uses folder of the compiler.
-
Lo
Hi
Higher
Highest
- Inc
- Dec
-
Delay_us
Delay_ms
Vdelay_ms
Delay_Cyc
- Clock_Khz
- Clock_Mhz
- SetFuncCall
- Uart_Init
100
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic for 8051
Specifics
Lo
Prototype
sub function Lo(number as longint) as byte
Returns
Lowest 8 bits (byte) of number, bits 7..0.
Function returns the lowest byte of number. Function does not interpret bit patterns of number – it merely returns 8 bits as found in register.
Description
This is an “inline” routine; code is generated in the place of the call, so the call
doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
Requires
Arguments must be variable of scalar type (i.e. Arithmetic Types and Pointers).
Example
d = 0x1AC30F4
tmp = Lo(d) ' Equals 0xF4
Hi
Prototype
sub function Hi(number as longint) as byte
Returns
Returns next to the lowest byte of number, bits 8..15.
Function returns next to the lowest byte of number. Function does not interpret
bit patterns of number – it merely returns 8 bits as found in register.
Description
This is an “inline” routine; code is generated in the place of the call, so the call
doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
Requires
Arguments must be variable of scalar type (i.e. Arithmetic Types and Pointers).
Example
d = 0x1AC30F4
tmp = Hi(d) ' Equals 0x30
Higher
Prototype
sub function Higher(number as longint) as byte
Returns
Returns next to the highest byte of number, bits 16..23.
Function returns next to the highest byte of number. Function does not interpret
bit patterns of number – it merely returns 8 bits as found in register.
Description
This is an “inline” routine; code is generated in the place of the call, so the call
doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
Requires
Arguments must be variable of scalar type (i.e. Arithmetic Types and Pointers).
Example
d = 0x1AC30F4
tmp = Higher(d)
' Equals 0xAC
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
101
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic for 8051
Specifics
Highest
Prototype
sub function Highest(number as longint) as byte
Returns
Returns the highest byte of number, bits 24..31.
Function returns the highest byte of number. Function does not interpret bit patterns of number – it merely returns 8 bits as found in register.
Description
This is an “inline” routine; code is generated in the place of the call, so the call
doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
Requires
Arguments must be variable of scalar type (i.e. Arithmetic Types and Pointers).
Example
d = 0x1AC30F4
tmp = Highest(d)
' Equals 0x01
Inc
Prototype
sub procedure Inc(dim byref par as longint)
Returns
Nothing.
Description Increases parameter par by 1.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
p = 4
Inc(p)
' p is now 5
Dec
Prototype
sub procedure Dec(dim byref par as longint)
Returns
Nothing.
Description Decreases parameter par by 1.
102
Requires
Nothing.
Example
p = 4
Dec(p)
' p is now 3
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic for 8051
Specifics
Delay_us
Prototype
sub procedure Delay_us(const time_in_us as longword)
Returns
Nothing.
Creates a software delay in duration of time_in_us microseconds (a constant).
Range of applicable constants depends on the oscillator frequency.
Description
This is an “inline” routine; code is generated in the place of the call, so the call
doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
Delay_us(1000)
' One millisecond pause
Delay_ms
Prototype
sub procedure Delay_ms(const time_in_ms as longword)
Returns
Nothing.
Creates a software delay in duration of time_in_ms milliseconds (a constant).
Range of applicable constants depends on the oscillator frequency.
Description
This is an “inline” routine; code is generated in the place of the call, so the call
doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
Delay_ms(1000)
' One second pause
Vdelay_ms
Prototype
sub procedure Vdelay_ms(time_in_ms as word)
Returns
Nothing.
Creates a software delay in duration of time_in_ms milliseconds (a variable).
Generated delay is not as precise as the delay created by Delay_ms.
Description
Note that Vdelay_ms is library function rather than a built-in routine; it is presented in this topic for the sake of convenience.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
pause = 1000
' ...
Vdelay_ms(pause)
' ~ one second pause
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
103
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic for 8051
Specifics
Delay_Cyc
Prototype
sub procedure Delay_Cyc(Cycles_div_by_10 as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Creates a delay based on MCU clock. Delay lasts for 10 times the input parameter in MCU cycles.
Description
Note that Delay_Cyc is library function rather than a built-in routine; it is presented in this topic for the sake of convenience. There are limitations for
Cycles_div_by_10 value. Value Cycles_div_by_10 must be between 2 and 257.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
Delay_Cyc(10)
' Hundred MCU cycles pause
Clock_KHz
Prototype
sub function Clock_Khz() as word
Returns
Device clock in KHz, rounded to the nearest integer.
Function returns device clock in KHz, rounded to the nearest integer.
Description
This is an “inline” routine; code is generated in the place of the call, so the call
doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
clk = Clock_kHz()
Clock_MHz
Prototype
sub function Clock_MHz() as byte
Returns
Device clock in MHz, rounded to the nearest integer.
Function returns device clock in MHz, rounded to the nearest integer.
Description
104
This is an “inline” routine; code is generated in the place of the call, so the call
doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
clk = Clock_Mhz()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic for 8051
Specifics
SetFuncCall
Prototype
sub procedure SetFuncCall(FuncName as string)
Returns
Nothing.
Function informs the linker about a specific routine being called. SetFuncCall
has to be called in a routine which accesses another routine via a pointer.
Description
Function prepares the caller tree, and informs linker about the procedure usage,
making it possible to link the called routine.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
sub procedure first(p, q as byte)
...
SetFuncCall(second) ' let linker know that we will call the
routine 'second'
...
end sub
Uart_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Uart_Init(baud_rate as longword)
Returns
Nothing.
Configures and initializes the UART module.
The internal UART module module is set to:
Description
-
8-bit data, no parity
1 STOP bit
disabled automatic address recognition
timer1 as baudrate source (mod2 = autoreload 8bit timer)
Parameters :
- baud_rate: requested baud rate
Refer to the device data sheet for baud rates allowed for specific Fosc.
Requires
MCU with the UART module and TIMER1 to be used as baudrate source.
Example
// Initialize hardware UART and establish communication at 2400
bps
Uart_Init(2400)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
105
CHAPTER 3
mikroBasic for 8051
Specifics
CODE OPTIMIZATION
Optimizer has been added to extend the compiler usability, cut down the amount of
code generated and speed-up its execution. The main features are:
Constant folding
All expressions that can be evaluated in the compile time (i.e. are constant) are
being replaced by their results. (3 + 5 -&gt; 8);
Constant propagation
When a constant value is being assigned to a certain variable, the compiler recognizes this and replaces the use of the variable by constant in the code that follows,
as long as the value of a variable remains unchanged.
Copy propagation
The compiler recognizes that two variables have the same value and eliminates one
of them further in the code.
Value numbering
The compiler &quot;recognizes&quot; if two expressions yield the same result and can therefore eliminate the entire computation for one of them.
&quot;Dead code&quot; ellimination
The code snippets that are not being used elsewhere in the programme do not affect
the final result of the application. They are automatically removed.
Stack allocation
Temporary registers (&quot;Stacks&quot;) are being used more rationally, allowing VERY complex expressions to be evaluated with a minimum stack consumption.
Local vars optimization
No local variables are being used if their result does not affect some of the global or
volatile variables.
Better code generation and local optimization
Code generation is more consistent and more attention is payed to implement specific solutions for the code &quot;building bricks&quot; that further reduce output code size.
106
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER
4
8051 Specifics
Types Efficiency
First of all, you should know that 8051 ALU, which performs arithmetic operations,
is optimized for working with bytes. Although mikroBasic is capable of handling very
complex data types, 8051 may choke on them, especially if you are working on
some of the older models. This can dramatically increase the time needed for performing even simple operations. Universal advice is to use the smallest possible
type in every situation. It applies to all programming in general, and doubly so with
microcontrollers. Types efficiency is determined by the part of RAM memory that is
used to store a variable/constant. See the example.
107
CHAPTER 4
mikroBasic for 8051
8051 Specifics
Nested Calls Limitations
There are no Nested Calls Limitations, except by RAM size. A Nested call represents a function call to another function within the function body. With each function
call, the stack increases for the size of the returned address. Number of nested calls
is equel to the capacity of RAM which is left out after allocation of all variables.
Note: There are many different types of derivates, so it is necessary to be familiar
with characteristics and special features of the microcontroller in you are using.
8051 MEMORY ORGANIZATION
The 8051 microcontroller's memory is divided into Program Memory and Data
Memory. Program Memory (ROM) is used for permanent saving program being executed, while Data Memory (RAM) is used for temporarily storing and keeping intermediate results and variables.
Program Memory (ROM)
Program Memory (ROM) is used for permanent saving program (CODE) being executed. The memory is read only. Depending on the settings made in compiler, program memory may also used to store a constant variables. The 8051 executes programs stored in program memory only. code memory type specifier is used to refer
to program memory.
8051 memory organization alows external program memory to be added.
How does the microcontroller handle external memory depends on the pin EA logical state.
108
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 4
mikroBasic for 8051
8051 Specifics
Internal Data Memory
Up to 256 bytes of internal data memory are available depending on the 8051 derivative. Locations available to the user occupy addressing space from 0 to 7Fh, i.e.
first 128 registers and this part of RAM is divided in several blocks. The first 128
bytes of internal data memory are both directly and indirectly addressable. The
upper 128 bytes of data memory (from 0x80 to 0xFF) can be addressed only indirectly.
Since internal data memory is used for CALL stack also and there is only 256 bytes
splited over few different memory areas fine utilizing of this memory is crucial for fast
and compact code. See types efficiency also.
Memory block in the range of 20h to 2Fh is bit-addressable, which means that each
bit being there has its own address from 0 to 7Fh. Since there are 16 such registers,
this block contains in total of 128 bits with separate addresses ( Bit 0 of byte 20h
has the bit address 0, and bit 7 of byte 2Fh has the bit address 7Fh).
Three memory type specifiers can be used to refer to the internal data memory:
data, idata, and bdata.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
109
CHAPTER 4
mikroBasic for 8051
8051 Specifics
External Data Memory
Access to external memory is slower than access to internal data memory. There
may be up to 64K Bytes of external data memory. Several 8051 devices provide onchip XRAM space that is accessed with the same instructions as the traditional
external data space. This XRAM space is typically enabled via proper setting of SFR
register and overlaps the external memory space. Setting of that register must be
manualy done in code, before any access to external memory or XRAM space is
made.
The mikroBasic for 8051 has two memory type specifiers that refers to external
memory space: xdata and pdata.
SFR Memory
The 8051 provides 128 bytes of memory for Special Function Registers (SFRs).
SFRs are bit, byte, or word-sized registers that are used to control timers, counters,
serial I/O, port I/O, and peripherals.
Refer to Special Function Registers for more information. See sbit also.
Related topics: Accessing individual bits, SFRs, Memory type specifiers, Memory
models
110
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 4
mikroBasic for 8051
8051 Specifics
MEMORY MODELS
The memory model determines the default memory type to use for function arguments, automatic variables, and declarations that include no explicit memory type.
The mikroBasic for 8051 provides three memory models:
- Small
- Compact
- Large
You may also specify the memory model on a function-by-function basis by adding
the memory model to the function declaration.
Small memory model generates the fastest, most efficient code. This is default
memory model. You may override the default memory type imposed by the memory model by explicitly declaring a variable with a memory type specifier.
Small model
In this model, all variables, by default, reside in the internal data memory of the 8051
system—as if they were declared explicitly using the data memory type specifier.
In this memory model, variable access is very efficient. However, all objects (that are
not explicitly located in another memory area) and the call stack must fit into the
internal RAM.
Call Stack size is critical because the stack space used depends on the nesting
depth of the various functions.
Compact model
Using the compact model, by default, all variables are allocated in a single page 256
bytes of external data memory of the 8051 system—as if they were explicitly
declared using the pdata memory type specifier. This memory model can accommodate a maximum of 256 bytes of variables. The limitation is due to the addressing scheme used which is indirect through registers R0 and R1 (@R0, @R1). This
memory model is not as efficient as the small model and variable access is not as
fast. However, the compact model is faster than the large model. mikroBasic for
8051 uses the @R0 and @R1 operands to acess external memory with instructions
that use 8 bit wide pointers and provide only the low-order byte of the address. The
high-order address byte (or page) is provided by Port 2 on most 8051 derivates (see
data sheet for details).
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
111
CHAPTER 4
mikroBasic for 8051
8051 Specifics
Large model
In the large model all variables reside in external data memory (which may be up to
64K Bytes). This is the same as if they were explicitly declared using the xdata
memory type specifier. The DPTR is used to address external memory. Instruction
set is not optimized for this memory model(access to external memory) so it neeeds
more code than the small or compact model to manipulate with the variables.
sub function xadd(dim a1 as byte, dim a2 as byte) as byte; large
'allocate parameters and local variables in xdata space
return xadd = a1+a2
end sub
Related topics: Memory type specifiers, 8051 Memory Organization, Accessing individual bits, SFRs, Project Settings
MEMORY TYPE SPECIFIERS
The mikroBasic for 8051 supports usage of all memory areas. Each variable may be
explicitly assigned to a specific memory space by including a memory type specifier in the declaration, or implicitly assigned (based on a memory model).
The following memory type specifiers can be used:
-
code
data
idata
bdata
xdata
pdata
Memory type specifiers can be included in svariable declaration.
For example:
data data_buffer as byte
xdata x_data as array[100] of byte
ory
idata ibuffer as real
' puts data_buffer in data ram
' puts array in external mem' puts ibuffer in idata ramm
If no memory type is specified for a variable, the compiler locates the variable in the
memory space determined by the memory model: Small, Compact, or Large.
112
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 4
mikroBasic for 8051
8051 Specifics
code
Program memory (64 KBytes); accessed by opcode MOVC @A+DPTR.
Description
Example
The code memory type may be used for constants and functions. This memory
is accessed using 16-bit addresses and may be on-chip or external.
' puts txt in program memory
code const txt as string[11] = 'Enter text:'
data
Directly addressable internal data memory; fastest access to variables (128
bytes).
Description
Example
This memory is directly accessed using 8-bit addresses and is the on-chip RAM
of the 8051. It has the shortest (fastest) access time but the amount of data is
limited in size (to 128 bytes or less).
' puts x in data ram
data x as byte
idata
Indirectly addressable internal data memory; accessed across the full internal
address space (256 bytes).
Description
Example
This memory is indirectly accessed using 8-bit addresses and is the on-chip
RAM of the 8051. The amount of idata is limited in size (to 128 bytes or less) it
is upper 128 addresses of RAM
' puts x in idata ram
idata x as byte
bdata
Bit-addressable internal data memory; supports mixed bit and byte access (16
bytes).
Description
This memory is directly accessed using 8-bit addresses and is the on-chip bitaddressable RAM of the 8051. Variables declared with the bdata type are bitaddressable and may be read and written using bit instructions.
For more information about the bdata type refer to the Accessing Individual Bits.
Example
' puts x in bdata
bdata x as byte
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
113
CHAPTER 4
mikroBasic for 8051
8051 Specifics
xdata
External data memory (64 KBytes); accessed by opcode MOVX @DPTR.
Description
Example
This memory is indirectly accessed using 16-bit addresses and is the external
data RAM of the 8051. The amount of xdata is limited in size (to 64K or less).
' puts x in xdata
xdata x as byte
pdata
Paged (256 bytes) external data memory; accessed by opcode MOVX @Rn.
Description This memory is indirectly accessed using 8-bit addresses and is one 256-byte
page of external data RAM of the 8051. The amount of pdata is limited in size
(to 256 bytes).
Example
' puts x in pdata
pdata x as byte
Related topics: 8051 Memory Organization, Memory models, Accessing individual bits, SFRs,
Constants, Functions
114
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER
5
mikroBasic
Language Reference
The mikroBasic for 8051 Language Reference describes the syntax, semantics and
implementation of the mikroBasic for 8051 language.
The aim of this reference guide is to provide a more understandable description of
the mikroBasic for 8051 language to the user.
115
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
MIKROBASIC LANGUAGE REFERENCE
Lexical Elements
Whitespace
Comments
Tokens
Literals
Keywords
Identifiers
Punctuators
Program Organization
Program Organization
Scope and Visibility
Modules
Variables
Constants
Labels
Symbols
Functions and Procedures
Functions
Procedures
Types
Simple Types
Arrays
Strings
Pointers
Structures
Types Conversions
Implicit Conversion
Explicit Conversion
Operators
Introduction to Operators
Operators Precedence and Associativity
Arithmetic Operators
Relational Operators
Bitwise Operators
Boolean Operators
Expressions
Expressions
116
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
Statements
Introduction to Statements
Assignment Statements
Conditional Statements
If Statement
Select Case Statement
Iteration Statements (Loops)
For Statement
While Statement
Do Statement
Jump Statements
Break and Continue Statements
Exit Statement
Goto Statement
Gosub Statement
asm Statement
Directives
Compiler Directives
Linker Directives
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
117
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
LEXICAL ELEMENTS OVERVIEW
These topics provide a formal definition of the mikroBasic for 8051 lexical elements.
They describe different categories of word-like units (tokens) recognized by the language.
In tokenizing phase of compilation, the source code file is parsed (that is, broken
down) into tokens and whitespace. The tokens in mikroBasic are derived from a
series of operations performed on your programs by the compiler.
A mikroBasic program starts as a sequence of ASCII characters representing the
source code, created by keystrokes using a suitable text editor (such as the
mikroBasic Code Editor). The basic program unit in mikroBasic is a file. This usually corresponds to a named file located in RAM or on disk, having the extension
.mbas.
WHITESPACE
Whitespace is a collective name given to spaces (blanks), horizontal and vertical
tabs, and comments. Whitespace serves to indicate where tokens start and end, but
beyond this function, any surplus whitespace is discarded.
For example, the two sequences
dim tmp as byte
dim j as word
and
dim
dim
tmp
j
as
as
byte
word
are lexically equivalent and parse identically.
Newline Character
Newline character (CR/LF) is not a whitespace in BASIC, and serves as a statement
terminator/separator. In mikroBasic for 8051, however, you may use newline to
break long statements into several lines. Parser will first try to get the longest possible expression (across lines if necessary), and then check for statement terminators.
118
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
Whitespace in Strings
The ASCII characters representing whitespace can occur within string literals, where
they are protected from the normal parsing process (they remain as a part of the
string). For example, statement
some_string = &quot;mikro foo&quot;
parses to four tokens, including a single string literal token:
some_string
=
&quot;mikro foo&quot;
newline character
COMMENTS
Comments are pieces of text used to annotate a program, and are technically another form of whitespace. Comments are for the programmer’s use only; they are
stripped from the source text before parsing.
Use the apostrophe to create a comment:
' Any text between an apostrophe and the end of the
' line constitutes a comment. May span one line only.
There are no multi-line comments in mikroBasic for 8051
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
119
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
TOKENS
Token is the smallest element of a mikroBasic for 8051 program, meaningful to the
compiler. The parser separates tokens from the input stream by creating the longest
token possible using the input characters in a left–to–right scan.
mikroBasic for 8051 recognizes the following kinds of tokens:
-
keywords
identifiers
constants
operators
punctuators (also known as separators)
Token Extraction Example
Here is an example of token extraction. See the following code sequence:
end_flag = 0
The compiler would parse it into four tokens:
end_flag
=
0
newline
' variable identifier
' assignment operator
' literal
' statement terminator
Note that end_flag would be parsed as a single identifier, rather than the keyword
end followed by the identifier _flag.
120
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
LITERALS
Literals are tokens representing fixed numeric or character values.
The data type of a constant is deduced by the compiler using such clues as numeric value and format used in the source code.
Integer Literals
Integral values can be represented in decimal, hexadecimal or binary notation.
In decimal notation, numerals are represented as a sequence of digits (without commas, spaces or dots), with optional prefix + or - operator to indicate the sign. Values
default to positive (6258 is equivalent to +6258).
The dollar-sign prefix ($) or the prefix 0x indicates a hexadecimal numeral (for
example, $8F or 0x8F).
The percent-sign prefix (%) indicates a binary numeral (for example, %0101).
Here are some examples:
11
$11
0x11
%11
'
'
'
'
decimal literal
hex literal, equals decimal 17
hex literal, equals decimal 17
binary literal, equals decimal 3
The allowed range of values is imposed by the largest data type in mikroBasic for
8051 – longword. The compiler will report an error if the literal exceeds 4294967295
($FFFFFFFF).
Floating Point Literals
A floating-point value consists of:
-
Decimal integer
Decimal point
Decimal fraction
e or E and a signed integer exponent (optional)
You can omit either decimal integer or decimal fraction (but not both).
Negative floating constants are taken as positive constants with the unary operator
minus (-) prefixed.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
121
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
mikroBasic limits floating-point constants to the range of &plusmn;1.17549435082 * 10-38 ..
&plusmn;6.80564774407 * 1038.
Here are some examples:
0.
-1.23
23.45e6
2e-5
3E+10
.09E34
'
'
'
'
'
'
=
=
=
=
=
=
0.0
-1.23
23.45 * 10^6
2.0 * 10^-5
3.0 * 10^10
0.09 * 10^34
Character Literals
Character literal is one character from the extended ASCII character set, enclosed
with quotes (for example, &quot;A&quot;). Character literal can be assigned to variables of byte
and char type (variable of byte will be assigned the ASCII value of the character).
Also, you can assign character literal to a string variable.
String Literals
String literal is a sequence of characters from the extended ASCII character set,
enclosed with quotes. Whitespace is preserved in string literals, i.e. parser does not
“go into” strings but treats them as single tokens.
Length of string literal is a number of characters it consists of. String is stored internally as the given sequence of characters plus a final null character. This null
character is introduced to terminate the string, it does not count against the string’s
total length.
String literal with nothing in between the quotes (null string) is stored as a single
null character.
You can assign string literal to a string variable or to an array of char.
Here are several string literals:
&quot;Hello world!&quot;
&quot;Temperature is stable&quot;
&quot; &quot;
&quot;C&quot;
&quot;&quot;
' message, 12 chars long
' message, 21 chars long
' two spaces, 2 chars long
' letter, 1 char long
' null string, 0 chars long
The quote itself cannot be a part of the string literal, i.e. there is no escape
sequence. You could use the built-in function Chr to print a quote: Chr(34). Also,
see String Splicing.
122
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
KEYWORDS
Keywords are special-purpose words which cannot be used as normal identifier
names.
Beside standard BASIC keywords, all relevant SFR are defined as global variables
and represent reserved words that cannot be redefined (for example: P0, TMR1,
T1CON, etc). Probe Code Assistant for specific letters (Ctrl+Space in Editor) or refer
to Predefined Globals and Constants.
Here is the alphabetical listing of keywords in mikroBasic for 8051:
-
abs
and
appactivate
array
as
asc
asm
atn
attribute
base
bdata
beep
begin
bit
boolean
byte
call
case
cbool
cbyte
ccur
cdate
cdate
cdbl
char
chdir
chdrive
chr
cint
circle
class
clear
clng
close
code
command
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
123
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
-
124
compact
compare
const
cos
createobject
csng
cstr
curdir
currency
cvar
cverr
date
dateadd
datediff
datepart
dateserial
datevalue
ddb
deftype
dim
dir
div
do
doevents
double
each
empty
end
end
environ
eof
eqv
erase
err
error
exit
exp
explicit
explicit
fileattr
fileattr
filecopy
filedatetime
filelen
fix
float
for
form
format
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
-
forward
freefile
fv
get
getattr
getobject
gosub
goto
hex
hour
idata
if
iif
ilevel
imp
include
input
instr
int
integer
ipmt
irr
is
isarray
isdate
isempty
iserror
ismissing
isnull
isnumeric
isobject
kill
large
lbound
lcase
left
len
let
line
loc
lock
lof
log
long
longint
loop
lset
ltrim
me
mid
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
125
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
-
126
minute
mirr
mkdir
mod
module
month
msgbox
name
new
next
not
not
nothing
now
nper
npv
object
oct
on
open
option
option
option
or
org
pdata
pmt
ppmt
print
private
property
pset
public
put
pv
qbcolor
raise
randomize
rate
real
redim
rem
reset
resume
return
rgb
right
rmdir
rnd
rset
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
-
rtrim
sbit
second
seek
select
sendkeys
set
setattr
sfr
sgn
shell
short
sin
single
sln
small
space
spc
sqr
static
step
stop
str
strcomp
strconv
string
sub
switch
syd
system
tab
tan
time
timer
timeserial
timevalue
to
trim
typedef
typename
ubound
ucase
unlock
until
val
variant
vartype
version
volatile
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
127
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
-
weekday
wend
while
width
with
word
write
xdata
xor
Also, mikroBasic includes a number of predefined identifiers used in libraries. You
could replace them by your own definitions, if you plan to develop your own libraries.
For more information, see mikroBasic Libraries.
IDENTIFIERS
Identifiers are arbitrary names of any length given to functions, variables, symbolic
constants, user-defined data types and labels. All these program elements will be
referred to as objects throughout the help (don't be confused with the meaning of
object in object-oriented programming).
Identifiers can contain letters from a to z and A to Z, the underscore character “_”
and digits from 0 to 9. First character must be a letter or an underscore, i.e. identifier cannot begin with a numeral.
Case Sensitivity
mikroBasic for 8051 is not case sensitive, so Sum, sum, and suM are equivalent
identifiers.
Uniqueness and Scope
Although identifier names are arbitrary (within the rules stated), errors result if the
same name is used for more than one identifier within the same scope. Simply,
duplicate names are illegal within the same scope. For more information, refer to
Scope and Visibility.
128
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
Identifier Examples
Here are some valid identifiers:
temperature_V1
Pressure
no_hit
dat2string
SUM3
_vtext
… and here are some invalid identifiers:
7temp
%higher
xor
j23.07.04
' NO -- cannot begin with a numeral
' NO -- cannot contain special characters
' NO -- cannot match reserved word
' NO -- cannot contain special characters (dot)
PUNCTUATORS
The mikroBasic punctuators (also known as separators) are:
[ ] – Brackets
( ) – Parentheses
, – Comma
: – Colon
. – Dot
Brackets
Brackets [ ] indicate single and multidimensional array subscripts:
dim alphabet as byte[30]
' ...
alphabet[2] = &quot;c&quot;
For more information, refer to Arrays.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
129
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic for 8051
Parentheses
Parentheses ( ) are used to group expressions, isolate conditional expressions and
indicate function calls and function declarations:
d = c * (a + b)
' Override normal precedence
if (d = z) then ...
' Useful with conditional statements
func()
' Function call, no arguments
sub function func2(dim n as word)' Function declaration w/ parameters
For more information, refer to Operators Precedence and Associativity, Expressions,
or Functions and Procedures.
Comma
Comma (,) separates the arguments in function calls:
Lcd_Out(1, 1, txt)
Furthermore, the comma separates identifiers in declarations:
dim i, j, k as word
The comma also separates elements in initialization lists of constant arrays:
const MONTHS as byte[12] = (31,28,31,30,31,30,31,31,30,31,30,31)
Colon
Colon (:) is used to indicate a labeled statement:
start: nop
'...
goto start
For more information, refer to Labels.
Dot
Dot (.) indicates access to a structure member. For example:
person.surname = &quot;Smith&quot;
For more information, refer to Structures.
Dot is a necessary part of floating point literals. Also, dot can be used for accessing
individual bits of registers in mikroBasic.
130
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
PROGRAM ORGANIZATION
mikroBasic for 8051 imposes strict program organization. Below you can find models for writing legible and organized source files. For more information on file inclusion and scope, refer to Modules and to Scope and Visibility.
Organization of Main Module
Basically, a main source file has two sections: declaration and program body. Declarations should be in their proper place in the code, organized in an orderly manner. Otherwise, the compiler may not be able to comprehend the program correctly.
When writing code, follow the model presented below. The main module should look
like this:
program &lt;program name&gt;
include &lt;include other modules&gt;
'********************************************************
'* Declarations (globals):
'********************************************************
' symbols declarations
symbol ...
' constants declarations
const ...
' structures declarations
structure ...
' variables declarations
dim Name[, Name2...] as
[volatile] [register] [sfr]
[^]type
[absolute
0x123]
[external]
' procedures declarations
sub procedure procedure_name(...)
&lt;local declarations&gt;
...
end sub
' functions declarations
sub function function_name(...) as return_type
&lt;local declarations&gt;
...
end sub
'********************************************************
'* Program body:
'********************************************************
main:
' write your code here
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
131
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
Organization of Other Modules
Modules other than main start with the keyword module. Implementation section
starts with the keyword implements. Follow the model presented below:
module &lt;module name&gt;
include &lt;include other modules&gt;
'********************************************************
'* Interface (globals):
'********************************************************
' symbols declarations
symbol ...
' constants declarations
const ...
' structures declarations
structure ...
' variables declarations
dim Name[, Name2...] as
[volatile] [register] [sfr]
[^]type
[absolute
0x123]
[external]
' procedures prototypes
sub procedure sub_procedure_name([dim byref] [const] ParamName as
[^]type, [dim byref] [const] ParamName2, ParamName3 as [^]type)
' functions prototypes
sub function sub_function_name([dim byref] [const] ParamName as
[^]type, [dim byref] [const] ParamName2, ParamName3 as [^]type) as
[^]type
'********************************************************
'* Implementation:
'********************************************************
implements
' constants declarations
const ...
' variables declarations
dim ...
' procedures declarations
sub procedure sub_procedure_name([dim byref] [const] ParamName as
[^]type, [dim byref] [const] ParamName2, ParamName3 as [^]type);
[ilevel 0x123] [overload] [forward]
&lt;local declarations&gt;
...
end sub
132
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
' functions declarations
sub function sub_function_name([dim byref] [const] ParamName as
[^]type, [dim byref] [const] ParamName2, ParamName3 as [^]type) as
[^]type [ilevel 0x123] [overload] [forward]
&lt;local declarations&gt;
...
end sub
end.
Note: Sub functions and sub procedures must have the same declarations in the
interface and implementation section. Otherwise, compiler will report an error.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
133
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
SCOPE AND VISIBILITY
Scope
The scope of identifier is a part of the program in which the identifier can be used to
access its object. There are different categories of scope, depending on how and
where identifiers are declared:
Place of declaration
Scope
Identifier is declared in the
declaration section of the
main module, out of any
function or procedure
Scope extends from the point where it is declared to
the end of the current file, including all routines
enclosed within that scope. These identifiers have a
file scope and are referred to as globals.
Scope extends from the point where it is declared to
Identifier is declared in the
the end of the current routine. These identifiers are
function or procedure
referred to as locals.
Scope extends the interface section of a module
from the point where it is declared to the end of the
Identifier is declared in the
module, and to any other module or program that
interface section of the
uses that module. The only exception are symbols
module
which have a scope limited to the file in which they
are declared.
Identifier is declared in the
Scope extends from the point where it is declared to
implementation section of
the end of the module. The identifier is available to
the module, but not within
any function or procedure in the module.
any function or procedure
Visibility
The visibility of an identifier is a region of the program source code from where a
legal access to the identifier’s associated object can be made .
Scope and visibility usually coincide, though there are circumstances under which
an object becomes temporarily hidden by the appearance of a duplicate identifier:
the object still exists but the original identifier cannot be used to access it until the
scope of the duplicate identifier is ended.
Technically, visibility cannot exceed scope, but scope can exceed visibility.
134
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
MODULES
In mikroBasic for 8051, each project consists of a single project file and one or more
module files. The project file, with extension .mbproj contains information on the
project, while modules, with extension .mbas, contain the actual source code. See
Program Organization for a detailed look at module arrangement.
Modules allow you to:
- break large programs into encapsulated modules that can be edited
separately,
- create libraries that can be used in different projects,
- distribute libraries to other developers without disclosing the source code.
Each module is stored in its own file and compiled separately; compiled modules are
linked to create an application. To build a project, the compiler needs either a source
file or a compiled module file for each module.
Include Clause
mikroBasic includes modules by means of the include clause. It consists of the
reserved word include, followed by a quoted module name. Extension of the file
should not be included.
You can include one file per include clause. There can be any number of the
include clauses in each source file, but they all must be stated immediately after
the program (or module) name.
Here’s an example:
program MyProgram
include &quot;utils&quot;
include &quot;strings&quot;
include &quot;MyUnit&quot;
...
For the given module name, the compiler will check for the presence of .mcl and
.mbasj files, in order specified by search paths.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
135
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
- If both .mbasj and .mcl files are found, the compiler will check their dates
and include the newer one in the project. If the .mbasj file is newer than the
.mcl, then .mbasj file will be recompiled and new .mcl will be created,
overwriting the old .mcl.
- If only the .mbasj file is found, the compiler will create the .mcl file and
include it in the project;
- If only the .mcl file is present, i.e. no source code is available, the compil
er will include it as found;
- If none of the files found, the compiler will issue a “File not found” warning.
Main Module
Every project in mikroBasic requires a single main module file. The main module is
identified by the keyword program at the beginning. It instructs the compiler where
to “start”.
After you have successfully created an empty project with Project Wizard, Code Editor will display a new main module. It contains the bare-bones of the program:
program MyProject
' main procedure
main:
' Place program code here
end.
Other than comments, nothing should precede the keyword program. After the program name, you can optionally place the include clauses.
Place all global declarations (constants, variables, labels, routines, structures)
before the label main.
Other Modules
Modules other than main start with the keyword module. Newly created blank module contains the bare-bones:
module MyModule
implements
end.
Other than comments, nothing should precede the keyword module. After the module name, you can optionally place the include clauses.
136
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
Interface Section
Part of the module above the keyword implements is referred to as interface section. Here, you can place global declarations (constants, variables, labels, routines,
structures) for the project.
Do not define routines in the interface section. Instead, state the prototypes of routines (from implementation section) that you want to be visible outside the module.
Prototypes must exactly match the declarations.
Implementation Section
Implementation section hides all the irrelevant innards from other modules, allowing
encapsulation of code.
Everything declared below the keyword implements is private, i.e. has its scope limited to the file. When you declare an identifier in the implementation section of a
module, you cannot use it outside the module, but you can use it in any block or routine defined within the module.
By placing the prototype in the interface section of the module (above the implements) you can make the routine public, i.e. visible outside of module. Prototypes
must exactly match the declarations.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
137
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic for 8051
VARIABLES
Variable is an object whose value can be changed during the runtime. Every variable is declared under unique name which must be a valid identifier. This name is
used for accessing the memory location occupied by the variable.
Variables are declared in the declaration part of the file or routine — each variable
needs to be declared before it is used. Global variables (those that do not belong to
any enclosing block) are declared below the include statements, above the label
main.
Specifying a data type for each variable is mandatory. mikroBasic syntax for variable
declaration is:
dim identifier_list as type
Here, identifier_list is a comma-delimited list of valid identifiers, and type can
be any data type.
For more details refer to Types and Types Conversions. For more information on
variables’ scope refer to the chapter Scope and Visibility.
Here are a few examples:
dim i, j, k as byte
dim counter, temp as word
dim samples as longint[100]
Variables and 8051
Every declared variable consumes part of RAM memory. Data type of variable determines not only the allowed range of values, but also the space a variable occupies
in RAM memory. Bear in mind that operations using different types of variables take
different time to be completed. mikroBasic for 8051 recycles local variable memory
space – local variables declared in different functions and procedures share the
same memory space, if possible.
There is no need to declare SFR explicitly, as mikroBasic for 8051 automatically
declares relevant registers as global variables of word. For example: W0, TMR1,
etc.
138
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
CONSTANTS
Constant is a data whose value cannot be changed during the runtime. Using a constant in a program consumes no RAM memory. Constants can be used in any
expression, but cannot be assigned a new value.
Constants are declared in the declaration part of the program or routine, with the following syntax:
const constant_name [as type] = value
Every constant is declared under unique constant_name which must be a valid
identifier. It is a tradition to write constant names in uppercase. Constant requires
you to specify value, which is a literal appropriate for the given type. type is optional and in the absence of it , the compiler assumes the “smallest” type that can
accommodate value.
Note: You cannot omit type if declaring a constant array.
Here are a few examples:
const
const
const
const
const
MAX as longint = 10000
MIN = 1000
' compiler will assume word type
SWITCH = &quot;n&quot;
' compiler will assume char type
MSG = &quot;Hello&quot;
' compiler will assume string type
MONTHS as byte[12] = (31,28,31,30,31,30,31,31,30,31,30,31)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
139
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic for 8051
LABELS
Labels serve as targets for the goto and gosub statements. Mark the desired statement with label and colon like this:
label_identifier : statement
No special declaration of label is necessary in mikroBasic for 8051.
Name of the label needs to be a valid identifier. The labeled statement and
goto/gosub statement must belong to the same block. Hence it is not possible to
jump into or out of routine. Do not mark more than one statement in a block with the
same label.
Note: The label main marks the entry point of a program and must be present in the
main module of every project. See Program Organization for more information.
Here is an example of an infinite loop that calls the procedure Beep repeatedly:
loop:
Beep
goto loop
140
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
SYMBOLS
mikroBasic symbols allow you to create simple macros without parameters. You can
replace any line of code with a single identifier alias. Symbols, when properly used,
can increase code legibility and reusability.
Symbols need to be declared at the very beginning of the module, right after the
module name and (optional) include clauses. Check Program Organization for
more details. Scope of a symbol is always limited to the file in which it has been
declared.
Symbol is declared as:
symbol alias = code
Here, alias must be a valid identifier which you will use throughout the code. This
identifier has a file scope. The code can be any line of code (literals, assignments,
function calls, etc).
Using a symbol in the program consumes no RAM – the compiler will simply replace
each instance of a symbol with the appropriate line of code from the declaration.
Here is an example:
symbol MAXALLOWED = 216
symbol PORT = P0
symbol MYDELAY = Delay_ms(1000)
dim cnt as byte
' Symbol as alias for numeric value
' Symbol as alias for SFR
' Symbol as alias for procedure call
' Some variable
'...
main:
if cnt &gt; MAXALLOWED then
cnt = 0
PORT.1 = 0
MYDELAY
end if
Note: Symbols do not support macro expansion in a way the C preprocessor does.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
141
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic for 8051
FUNCTIONS AND PROCEDURES
Functions and procedures, collectively referred to as routines, are subprograms
(self-contained statement blocks) which perform a certain task based on a number
of input parameters. When executed, a function returns value while procedure does
not.
FUNCTIONS
Function is declared like this:
sub function function_name(parameter_list) as return_type
[ local declarations ]
function body
end sub
function_name represents a function’s name and can be any valid identifier.
return_type is a type of return value and can be any simple type. Within parentheses, parameter_list is a formal parameter list similar to variable declaration. In
mikroBasic for 8051, parameters are always passed to a function by value. To pass
an argument by address, add the keyword byref ahead of identifier.
Local declarations are optional declarations of variables and/or constants, local
for the given function. Function body is a sequence of statements to be executed
upon calling the function.
Calling a function
A function is called by its name, with actual arguments placed in the same sequence
as their matching formal parameters. The compiler is able to coerce mismatching
arguments to the proper type according to implicit conversion rules. Upon a function
call, all formal parameters are created as local objects initialized by values of actual arguments. Upon return from a function, a temporary object is created in the place
of the call and it is initialized by the value of the function result. This means that function call as an operand in complex expression is treated as the function result.
In standard Basic, a function_name is automatically created local variable that can
be used for returning a value of a function. mikroBasic for 8051 also allows you to
use the automatically created local variable result to assign the return value of a
function if you find function name to be too ponderous. If the return value of a function is not defined the compiler will report an error.
Function calls are considered to be primary expressions and can be used in situations where expression is expected. A function call can also be a self-contained
statement and in that case the return value is discarded.
142
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
Example
Here’s a simple function which calculates xn based on input parameters x and n (n
&gt; 0):
sub function power(dim x, n as byte) as longint
dim i as byte
result = 1
if n &gt; 0 then
for i = 1 to n
result = result*x
next i
end if
end sub
Now we could call it to calculate, say, 312:
tmp = power(3, 12)
PROCEDURES
Procedure is declared like this:
sub procedure procedure_name(parameter_list)
[ local declarations ]
procedure body
end sub
procedure_name represents a procedure’s name and can be any valid identifier.
Within parentheses, parameter_list is a formal parameter list similar to variable
declaration. In mikroBasic for 8051, parameters are always passed to procedure by
value; to pass argument by address, add the keyword byref ahead of identifier.
Local declarations are optional declaration of variables and/or constants, local
for the given procedure. Procedure body is a sequence of statements to be exe-
cuted upon calling the procedure.
Calling a procedure
A procedure is called by its name, with actual arguments placed in the same
sequence as their matching formal parameters. The compiler is able to coerce mismatching arguments to the proper type according to implicit conversion rules. Upon
procedure call, all formal parameters are created as local objects initialized by values of actual arguments.
Procedure call is a self-contained statement.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
143
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
Example
Here’s an example procedure which transforms its input time parameters, preparing
them for output on LCD:
sub procedure time_prep(dim
sec = ((sec and $F0) &gt;&gt;
min = ((min and $F0) &gt;&gt;
hr
= ((hr and $F0) &gt;&gt;
end sub
byref
4)*10
4)*10
4)*10
sec, min, hr as byte)
+ (sec and $0F)
+ (min and $0F)
+ (hr and $0F)
Function Pointers
Function pointers are allowed in mikroBasic for 8051. The example shows how to
define and use a function pointer:
Example:
Example demonstrates the usage of function pointers. It is shown how to declare a
procedural type, a pointer to function and finally how to call a function via pointer.
program Example;
typedef TMyFunctionType = function (dim param1, param2 as byte, dim
param3 as word) as word ' First, define the procedural type
dim MyPtr as ^TMyFunctionType
defined type
dim sample as word
' This is a pointer to previously
sub function Func1(dim p1, p2 as byte, dim p3 as word) as word ' Now,
define few functions which will be pointed to. Make sure that parameters match the type definition
result = p1 and p2 or p3
end sub
sub function Func2(dim abc, def as byte, dim ghi as word) as word '
Another function of the same kind. Make sure that parameters match
the type definition
result = abc * def + ghi
end sub
sub function Func3(dim first, yellow as byte, dim monday as word) as
word
' Yet another function. Make sure that parameters match the
type definition
result = monday - yellow - first
end sub
' main program:
144
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
main:
MyPtr = @Func1
Sample = MyPtr^(1, 2, 3)
Func1, the return value is
MyPtr = @Func2
Sample = MyPtr^(1, 2, 3)
Func2, the return value is
MyPtr = @Func3
Sample = MyPtr^(1, 2, 3)
Func3, the return value is
end.
Language Reference
' MyPtr
' Perform
3
' MyPtr
' Perform
5
' MyPtr
' Perform
0
now points to Func1
function call via pointer, call
now points to Func2
function call via pointer, call
now points to Func3
function call via pointer, call
A function can return a complex type. Follow the example bellow to learn how to
declare and use a function which returns a complex type.
Example:
This example shows how to declare a function which returns a complex type.
program Example
structure TCircle
' Structure
dim CenterX, CenterY as word
dim Radius as byte
end structure
dim MyCircle as TCircle ' Global variable
sub function DefineCircle(dim x, y as word, dim r as byte) as TCircle
' DefineCircle function returns a Structure
result.CenterX = x
result.CenterY = y
result.Radius = r
end sub
main:
MyCircle = DefineCircle(100, 200, 30)
' Get
a Structure via function call
MyCircle.CenterX = DefineCircle(100, 200, 30).CenterX + 20
'
Access a Structure field via function call
'
|------------------------| |-----|
'
|
|
'
Function returns TCircle
Access to one
field of TCircle
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
145
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic for 8051
Forward declaration
A function can be declared without having it followed by it's implementation, by having it followed by the forward procedure. The effective implementation of that function must follow later in the module. The function can be used after a forward declaration as if it had been implemented already. The following is an example of a forward declaration:
program Volume
dim Volume as word
sub function First(a as word, b as word) as word forward
sub function Second(c as word) as word
dim tmp as word
tmp = First(2, 3)
result = tmp * c
end sub
sub function First(a, b as word) as word
result = a * b
end sub
main:
Volume = Second(4)
end.
146
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
TYPES
Basic is strictly typed language, which means that every variable and constant need
to have a strictly defined type, known at the time of compilation.
The type serves:
- to determine correct memory allocation required,
- to interpret the bit patterns found in the object during subsequent accesses,
- in many type-checking situations, to ensure that illegal assignments are
trapped.
mikroBasic supports many standard (predefined) and user-defined data types,
including signed and unsigned integers of various sizes, arrays, strings, pointers
and structures.
Type Categories
Types can be divided into:
-
simple types
arrays
strings
pointers
structures
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
147
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
SIMPLE TYPES
Simple types represent types that cannot be divided into more basic elements and
are the model for representing elementary data on machine level. Basic memory
unit in mikroBasic for 8051 has 16 bits.
Here is an overview of simple types in mikroBasic for 8051:
Type
Size
Range
byte, char
8–bit
0 .. 255
short
8–bit
-127 .. 128
word
16–bit
0 .. 65535
integer
16–bit
-32768 .. 32767
longword
32–bit
0 .. 4294967295
longint
32–bit
-2147483648 .. 2147483647
float
32–bit
&plusmn;1.17549435082 * 10-38 ..
&plusmn;6.80564774407 * 1038
bit
1–bit
0 or 1
sbit
1–bit
0 or 1
You can assign signed to unsigned or vice versa only using the explicit conversion.
Refer to Types Conversions for more information.
148
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
ARRAYS
An array represents an indexed collection of elements of the same type (called the
base type). Since each element has a unique index, arrays, unlike sets, can meaningfully contain the same value more than once.
Array Declaration
Array types are denoted by constructions in the following form:
type[array_length]
Each of elements of an array is numbered from 0 through array_length - 1. Every
element of an array is of type and can be accessed by specifying array name followed by element’s index within brackets.
Here are a few examples of array declaration:
dim weekdays as byte[7]
dim samples as word[50]
main:
' Now we can access elements of array variables, for example:
samples[0] = 1
if samples[37] = 0 then
' ...
Constant Arrays
Constant array is initialized by assigning it a comma-delimited sequence of values
within parentheses. For example:
' Declare a constant array which holds number of days in each month:
const MONTHS as byte[12] = (31,28,31,30,31,30,31,31,30,31,30,31)
Note that indexing is zero based; in the previous example, number of days in January is MONTHS[0] and number of days in December is MONTHS[11].
The number of assigned values must not exceed the specified length. Vice versa is
possible, when the trailing “excess” elements will be assigned zeroes.
For more information on arrays of char, refer to Strings.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
149
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
STRINGS
A string represents a sequence of characters equivalent to an array of char. It is
declared like this:
string[string_length]
The specifier string_length is a number of characters a string consists of. The
string is stored internally as the given sequence of characters plus a final null character (zero). This appended “stamp” does not count against string’s total length.
A null string (&quot;&quot;) is stored as a single null character.
You can assign string literals or other strings to string variables. The string on the
right side of an assignment operator has to be shorter than another one, or of equal
length. For example:
dim msg1 as string[20]
dim msg2 as string[19]
main:
msg1 = &quot;This is some message&quot;
msg2 = &quot;Yet another message&quot;
msg1 = msg2
' this is ok, but vice versa would be illegal
Alternately, you can handle strings element–by–element. For example:
dim s as string[5]
' ...
s = &quot;mik&quot;
' s[0] is char literal &quot;m&quot;
' s[1] is char literal &quot;i&quot;
' s[2] is char literal &quot;k&quot;
' s[3] is zero
' s[4] is undefined
' s[5] is undefined
Be careful when handling strings in this way, since overwriting the end of a string will
cause an unpredictable behavior.
Note
mikroBasic for 8051 includes String Library which automatizes string related tasks.
150
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
POINTERS
A pointer is a data type which holds a memory address. While a variable accesses
that memory address directly, a pointer can be thought of as a reference to that
memory address.
To declare a pointer data type, add a carat prefix (^) before type. For example, if you
are creating a pointer to an integer, you would write:
^integer
To access the data at the pointer’s memory location, you add a carat after the variable name. For example, let’s declare variable p which points to word, and then
assign the pointed memory location value 5:
dim p as ^word
'...
p^ = 5
A pointer can be assigned to another pointer. However, note that only address, not
value, is copied. Once you modify the data located at one pointer, the other pointer,
when dereferenced, also yields modified data.
@ Operator
The @ operator returns the address of a variable or routine, i.e. @ constructs a pointer to its operand. The following rules are applied to @:
- If X is a variable, @X returns the address of X.
- If F is a routine (a function or procedure), @F returns F’s entry point (the
result is of longint).
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
151
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic for 8051
STRUCTURES
A structure represents a heterogeneous set of elements. Each element is called a
member; the declaration of a structure type specifies a name and type for each
member. The syntax of a structure type declaration is
structure structname
dim member1 as type1
'...
dim membern as typen
end structure
where structname is a valid identifier, each type denotes a type, and each member
is a valid identifier. The scope of a member identifier is limited to the structure in
which it occurs, so you don’t have to worry about naming conflicts between member
identifiers and other variables.
For example, the following declaration creates a structure type called Dot:
structure Dot
dim x as float
dim y as float
end structure
Each Dot contains two members: x and y coordinates; memory is allocated when
you instantiate the structure, like this:
dim m, n as Dot
This variable declaration creates two instances of Dot, called m and n.
A member can be of the previously defined structure type. For example:
' Structure defining a circle:
structure Circle
dim radius as float
dim center as Dot
end structure
152
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
Structure Member Access
You can access the members of a structure by means of dot (.) as a direct member
selector. If we had declared the variables circle1 and circle2 of the previously
defined type Circle:
dim circle1, circle2 as Circle
we could access their individual members like this:
circle1.radius = 3.7
circle1.center.x = 0
circle1.center.y = 0
You can also commit assignments between complex variables, if they are of the
same type:
circle2 = circle1
' This will copy values of all members
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
153
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
TYPES CONVERSIONS
Conversion of variable of one type to variable of another type is typecasting.
mikroBasic for 8051 supports both implicit and explicit conversions for built-in types.
Implicit Conversion
Compiler will provide an automatic implicit conversion in the following situations:
- statement requires an expression of particular type (according to language
definition) and we use an expression of different type,
- operator requires an operand of particular type and we use an operand of
different type,
- function requires a formal parameter of particular type and we pass it an
object of different type,
- result does not match the declared function return type.
Promotion
When operands are of different types, implicit conversion promotes the less complex to the more complex type taking the following steps:
byte/char
short
short
integer
integral
?
?
?
?
?
word
integer
longint
longint
float
Higher bytes of extended unsigned operand are filled with zeroes. Higher bytes of
extended signed operand are filled with bit sign (if number is negative, fill higher
bytes with one, otherwise with zeroes). For example:
dim a as byte
dim b as word
'...
a = $FF
b = a ' a is promoted to word, b becomes $00FF
Clipping
In assignments and statements that require an expression of particular type, destination will store the correct value only if it can properly represent the result of
expression, i.e. if the result fits in destination range.
If expression evaluates to more complex type than expected excess data will be
simply clipped (the higher bytes are lost).
154
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
dim i as byte
dim j as word
'...
j = $FF0F
i = j ' i becomes $0F, higher byte $FF is lost
Explicit Conversion
Explicit conversion can be executed at any point by inserting type keyword (byte,
word, short, integer, longint, or float) ahead of the expression to be converted. The expression must be enclosed in parentheses. Explicit conversion can be
performed only on the operand left of the assignment operator.
Special case is the conversion between signed and unsigned types. Explicit conversion between signed and unsigned data does not change binary representation of
data — it merely allows copying of source to destination.
For example:
dim a as byte
dim b as short
'...
b = -1
a = byte(b) ' a is 255, not 1
' This is because binary representation remains
' 11111111; it's just interpreted differently now
You cannot execute explicit conversion on the operand left of the assignment operator:
word(b) = a
' Compiler will report an error
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
155
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
OPERATORS
Operators are tokens that trigger some computation when being applied to variables
and other objects in an expression.
There are four types of operators in mikroBasic for 8051:
- Arithmetic Operators
- Bitwise Operators
- Boolean Operators
- Relational Operators
OPERATORS PRECEDENCE AND ASSOCIATIVITY
There are 4 precedence categories in mikroBasic for 8051. Operators in the same
category have equal precedence with each other.
Each category has an associativity rule: left-to-right (), or right-to-left (). In the
absence of parentheses, these rules resolve the grouping of expressions with operators of equal precedence.
Precedence
Operands
4
1
3
2
2
2
1
2
Operators
@
*
/
div
+
=
not
&lt;&gt;
+
mod
&lt;
Associativity
and
or
&gt;
&lt;&lt;
xor
&lt;=
&gt;&gt;
&gt;=
ARITHMETIC OPERATORS
Arithmetic operators are used to perform mathematical computations. They have
numerical operands and return numerical results. Since the char operators are
technically bytes, they can be also used as unsigned operands in arithmetic operations.
All arithmetic operators associate from left to right.
156
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
Operator
Operation
Operands
Result
addition
byte, short, word,
integer, longint,
longword, float
byte, short,
word, integer,
longint, longword, float
-
subtraction
byte, short, word,
integer, longint,
longword, float
byte, short,
word, integer,
longint, longword, float
*
multiplication
byte, short, word,
integer, longint,
longword, float
word, integer,
longint, longword, float
/
division, floating-point
byte, short, word,
integer, longint,
longword, float
float
div
division, rounds down to
nearest integer
+
mod
byte, short, word,
byte, short,
integer, longint,
word, integer,
longword
longint, longword
modulus, returns the
byte, short, word,
byte, short,
remainder of integer
integer, longint,
word, integer,
division (cannot be used
longword
longint, longword
with floating points)
Division by Zero
If 0 (zero) is used explicitly as the second operand (i.e. x div 0), the compiler will
report an error and will not generate code.
But in case of implicit division by zero: x div y, where y is 0 (zero), the result will be
the maximum integer (i.e 255, if the result is byte type; 65536, if the result is word
type, etc.).
Unary Arithmetic Operators
Operator - can be used as a prefix unary operator to change sign of a signed value.
Unary prefix operator + can be used, but it doesn’t affect data.
For example:
b = -a
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
157
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
Relational Operators
Use relational operators to test equality or inequality of expressions. All relational
operators return TRUE or FALSE.
Operator
Operation
=
equal
&lt;&gt;
not equal
&gt;
greater than
&lt;
less than
&gt;=
greater than or equal
&lt;=
less than or equal
All relational operators associate from left to right.
Relational Operators in Expressions
The equal sign (=) can also be an assignment operator, depending on context.
Precedence of arithmetic and relational operators was designated in such a way to
allow complex expressions without parentheses to have expected meaning:
if aa + 5 &gt;= bb - 1.0 / cc then
(1.0 / cc)) then
dd = My_Function()
end if
158
' same as: if (aa + 5) &gt;= (bb -
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
BITWISE OPERATORS
Use the bitwise operators to modify the individual bits of numerical operands.
Bitwise operators associate from left to right. The only exception is the bitwise complement operator not which associates from right to left.
Bitwise Operators Overview
Operator
Operation
bitwise AND; compares pairs of bits and generates a 1 result if
both bits are 1, otherwise it returns 0
and
bitwise (inclusive) OR; compares pairs of bits and generates a 1
result if either or both bits are 1, otherwise it returns 0
or
xor
bitwise exclusive OR (XOR); compares pairs of bits and generates a
1 result if the bits are complementary, otherwise it returns 0
not
bitwise complement (unary); inverts each bit
&lt;&lt;
bitwise shift left; moves the bits to the left, it discards the far left
bit and assigns 0 to the right most bit.
&gt;&gt;
bitwise shift right; moves the bits to the right, discards the far right bit
and if unsigned assigns 0 to the left most bit, otherwise sign extends
Logical Operations on Bit Level
and
0
1
or
0
1
xor
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
not
0
1
1
0
The bitwise operators and, or, and xor perform logical operations on the appropriate pairs of bits of their operands. The operator not complements each bit of its
operand. For example:
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
159
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
$1234 and $5678
' equals $1230
' because ..
' $1234 : 0001 0010 0011 0100
' $5678 : 0101 0110 0111 1000
' ---------------------------'
and : 0001 0010 0011 0000
' .. that is, $1230
' Similarly:
$1234 or $5678
$1234 xor $5678
not $1234
' equals $567C
' equals $444C
' equals $EDCB
Unsigned and Conversions
If number is converted from less complex to more complex data type, the upper
bytes are filled with zeroes. If number is converted from more complex to less complex data type, the data is simply truncated (upper bytes are lost).
For example:
dim a
dim b
' ...
a =
b =
b =
' a
as byte
as word
$AA
$F0F0
b and a
is extended with zeroes; b becomes $00A0
Signed and Conversions
If number is converted from less complex to more complex data type, the upper
bytes are filled with ones if sign bit is 1 (number is negative); the upper bytes are
filled with zeroes if sign bit is 0 (number is positive). If number is converted from
more complex to less complex data type, the data is simply truncated (the upper
bytes are lost).
For example:
160
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
dim a
dim b
' ...
a =
b =
b =
Language Reference
as byte
as word
-12
$70FF
b and a
' a is sign extended, upper byte is $FF;
' b becomes $70F4
Bitwise Shift Operators
The binary operators &lt;&lt; and &gt;&gt; move the bits of the left operand by a number of
positions specified by the right operand, to the left or right, respectively. Right
operand has to be positive and less than 255.
With shift left (&lt;&lt;), left most bits are discarded, and “new” bits on the right are
assigned zeroes. Thus, shifting unsigned operand to the left by n positions is equivalent to multiplying it by 2n if all discarded bits are zero. This is also true for signed
operands if all discarded bits are equal to the sign bit.
With shift right (&gt;&gt;), right most bits are discarded, and the “freed” bits on the left are
assigned zeroes (in case of unsigned operand) or the value of the sign bit (in case
of signed operand). Shifting operand to the right by n positions is equivalent to dividing it by 2n.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
161
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
BOOLEAN OPERATORS
Although mikroBasic for 8051 does not support boolean type, you have Boolean
operators at your disposal for building complex conditional expressions. These
operators conform to standard Boolean logic and return either TRUE (all ones) or
FALSE (zero):
Operator
and
or
Operation
logical AND
logical OR
xor
logical exclusive OR (XOR)
not
logical negation
Boolean operators associate from left to right. Negation operator not associates
from right to left.
162
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
EXPRESSIONS
An expression is a sequence of operators, operands, and punctuators that returns
a value.
The primary expressions include: literals, constants, variables and function calls.
From them, using operators, more complex expressions can be created. Formally,
expressions are defined recursively: subexpressions can be nested up to the limits
of memory.
Expressions are evaluated according to certain conversion, grouping, associativity
and precedence rules that depend on the operators used, presence of parentheses,
and data types of the operands. The precedence and associativity of the operators
are summarized in Operator Precedence and Associativity. The way operands and
subexpressions are grouped does not necessarily specify the actual order in which
they are evaluated by mikroBasic for 8051.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
163
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
STATEMENTS
Statements define algorithmic actions within a program. Each statement needs to
be terminated with a semicolon (;). In the absence of specific jump and selection
statements, statements are executed sequentially in the order of appearance in the
source code.
The most simple statements are assignments, procedure calls and jump statements. These can be combined to form loops, branches and other structured statements.
Refer to:
- Assignment Statements
- Conditional Statements
- Iteration Statements (Loops)
- Jump Statements
- asm Statement
ASSIGNMENT STATEMENTS
Assignment statements have the following form:
variable = expression
The statement evaluates expression and assigns its value to variable. All rules of
implicit conversion are applied. Variable can be any declared variable or array element, and expression can be any expression.
Do not confuse the assignment with relational operator = which tests for equality.
mikroBasic for 8051 will interpret the meaning of the character = from the context.
Conditional Statements
Conditional or selection statements select from alternative courses of action by testing certain values. There are two types of selection statements:
- if
- select case
164
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
IF STATEMENT
Use the keyword if to implement a conditional statement. The syntax of the if
statement has the following form:
if expression then
statements
[else
other statements]
end if
When expression evaluates to true, statements execute. If expression is false,
other statements execute. The expression must convert to a boolean type; otherwise, the condition is ill-formed. The else keyword with an alternate block of statements (other statements) is optional.
Nested if statements
Nested if statements require additional attention. A general rule is that the nested
conditionals are parsed starting from the innermost conditional, with each else
bound to the nearest available if on its left:
if expression1 then
if expression2 then
statement1
else
statement2
end if
end if
The compiler treats the construction in this way:
if expression1 then
if expression2 then
statement1
else
statement2
end if
end if
In order to force the compiler to interpret our example the other way around, we
have to write it explicitly:
if expression1 then
if expression2 then
statement1
end if
else
statement2
end if
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
165
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic for 8051
SELECT CASE STATEMENT
Use the select case statement to pass control to a specific program branch, based
on a certain condition. The select case statement consists of selector expression
(condition) and list of possible values. The syntax of the select case statement is:
select case selector
case value_1
statements_1
...
case value_n
statements_n
[case else
default_statements]
end select
selector is an expression which should evaluate as integral value. values can be
literals, constants or expressions and statements can be any statements. The case
else clause is optional.
First, the selector expression (condition) is evaluated. The select case statement then compares it against all available values. If the match is found, the
statements following the match evaluate, and the select case statement terminates. In case there are multiple matches, the first matching statement will be executed. If none of the values matches the selector, then default_statements in
the case else clause (if there is one) are executed.
Here is a simple example of the select case statement:
select case operator
case &quot;*&quot;
res = n1 * n2
case &quot;/&quot;
res = n1 / n2
case &quot;+&quot;
res = n1 + n2
case &quot;-&quot;
res = n1 - n2
case else
res = 0
cnt = cnt + 1
end select
Also, you can group values together for a match. Simply separate the items by commas:
166
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
select case reg
case 0
opmode = 0
case 1,2,3,4
opmode = 1
case 5,6,7
opmode = 2
end select
Nested Case Statements
Note that the select case statements can be nested – values are then assigned
to the innermost enclosing select case statement.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
167
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
ITERATION STATEMENTS
Iteration statements let you loop a set of statements. There are three forms of iteration statements in mikroBasic for 8051:
- for
- while
- repeat
You can use the statements break and continue to control the flow of a loop statement. break terminates the statement in which it occurs, while continue begins
executing the next iteration of the sequence.
168
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
FOR STATEMENT
The for statement implements an iterative loop and requires you to specify the number of iterations. The syntax of the for statement is:
for counter = initial_value to final_value [step step_value]
statements
next counter
counter is a variable being increased by step_value with each iteration of the loop.
The parameter step_value is an optional integral value, and defaults to 1 if omitted. Before the first iteration, counter is set to initial_value and will be incremented until it reaches (or exceeds) the final_value. With each iteration, statements will be executed.
initial_value and final_value should be expressions compatible with counter;
statements can be any statements that do not change the value of counter.
Note that the parameter step_value may be negative, allowing you to create a
countdown.
Here is an example of calculating scalar product of two vectors, a and b, of length
n, using the for statement:
s = 0
for i = 0 to n-1
s = s + a[i] * b[i]
next i
Endless Loop
The for statement results in an endless loop if final_value equals or exceeds the
range of the counter’s type.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
169
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic for 8051
WHILE STATEMENT
Use the while keyword to conditionally iterate a statement. The syntax of the while
statement is:
while expression
statements
wend
statements are executed repeatedly as long as expression evaluates true. The
test takes place before statements are executed. Thus, if expression evaluates
false on the first pass, the loop does not execute.
Here is an example of calculating scalar product of two vectors, using the while
statement:
s = 0
i = 0
while i &lt; n
s = s + a[i] * b[i]
i = i + 1
wend
Probably the easiest way to create an endless loop is to use the statement:
while TRUE
' ...
wend
170
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
DO STATEMENT
The do statement executes until the condition becomes true. The syntax of the do
statement is:
do
statements
loop until expression
statements are executed repeatedly until expression evaluates true. expression
is evaluated after each iteration, so the loop will execute statements at least once.
Here is an example of calculating scalar product of two vectors, using the do statement:
s = 0
i = 0
do
s = s + a[i] * b[i]
i = i + 1
loop until i = n
JUMP STATEMENTS
A jump statement, when executed, transfers control unconditionally. There are five
such statements in mikroBasic for 8051:
-
break
continue
exit
goto
gosub
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
171
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic for 8051
ASM STATEMENT
mikroBasic for 8051 allows embedding assembly in the source code by means of
the asm statement. Note that you cannot use numerals as absolute addresses for
register variables in assembly instructions. You may use symbolic names instead
(listing will display these names as well as addresses).
You can group assembly instructions with the asm keyword:
asm
block of assembly instructions
end asm
mikroBasic comments are not allowed in embedded assembly code. Instead, you
may use one-line assembly comments starting with semicolon.
If you plan to use a certain mikroBasic variable in embedded assembly only, be sure
to at least initialize it (assign it initial value) in mikroBasic code; otherwise, the linker will issue an error. This is not applied to predefined globals such as P0.
For example, the following code will not be compiled because the linker won’t be
able to recognize the variable myvar:
program test
dim myvar as word
main:
asm
MOV #10, W0
MOV W0, _myvar
end asm
end.
Adding the following line (or similar) above the asm block would let linker know that
variable is used:
myvar = 20
172
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
DIRECTIVES
Directives are words of special significance which provide additional functionality
regarding compilation and output.
The following directives are at your disposal:
- Compiler directives for conditional compilation,
- Linker directives for object distribution in memory.
COMPILER DIRECTIVES
Any line in source code with leading # is taken as a compiler directive. The initial #
can be preceded or followed by whitespace (excluding new lines). The compiler
directives are not case sensitive.
You can use conditional compilation to select particular sections of code to compile
while excluding other sections. All compiler directives must be completed in the
source file in which they begun.
Directives #DEFINE and #UNDEFINE
Use directive #DEFINE to define a conditional compiler constant (“flag”). You can use
any identifier for a flag, with no limitations. No conflicts with program identifiers are
possible because the flags have a separate name space. Only one flag can be set
per directive.
For example:
#DEFINE extended_format
Use #UNDEFINE to undefine (“clear”) previously defined flag.
Directives #IFDEF, #ELSEIF and #ELSE
Conditional compilation is carried out by the #IFDEF directive. #IFDEF tests whether
a flag is currently defined or not; i.e. whether the previous #DEFINE directive has
been processed for that flag and is still in force.
The directive #IFDEF is terminated by the #ENDIF directive and can have any number of the #ELSEIF clauses and an optional #ELSE clause:
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
173
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
mikroBasic for 8051
#IFDEF flag THEN
block of code
[ #ELSEIF flag_1 THEN
block of code 1
...
#ELSEIF flag_n THEN
block of code n ]
[ #ELSE
alternate block of code ]
#ENDIF
First, #IFDEF checks if flag is set by means of #DEFINE. If so, only block of code
will be compiled. Otherwise, the compiler will check flags flag_1 .. flag_n and
execute the appropriate block of code i. Eventually, if none of the flags is set, alternate block of code in #ELSE (if any) will be compiled.
#ENDIF ends the conditional sequence. The result of the preceding scenario is that
only one section of code (possibly empty) is passed on for further processing. The
processed section can contain further conditional clauses, nested to any depth;
each #IFDEF must be matched with a closing #ENDIF.
Here is an example:
' Uncomment the appropriate flag for your application:
'#DEFINE resolution8
'#DEFINE resolution10
'#DEFINE resolution12
#IFDEF resolution8 THEN
... ' code specific to 8-bit resolution
#ELSEIF resolution10 THEN
... ' code specific to 10-bit resolution
#ELSEIF resolution12 THEN
... ' code specific to 12-bit resolution
#ELSE
... ' default code
#ENDIF
Predefined Flags
The compiler sets directives upon completion of project settings, so the user doesn't need to define certain flags.
Here is an example:
#IFDEF AT89S8253 ' If AT89S8253 MCU is selected
#IFDEF AT89
' AT89S8253 and AT89 flags will be automatically
defined
174
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 5
mikroBasic for 8051
Language Reference
LINKER DIRECTIVES
mikroBasic for 8051 uses internal algorithm to distribute objects within memory. If
you need to have a variable or routine at the specific predefined address, use the
linker directives absolute and org.
Note: You must specify an even address when using the linker directives.
Directive absolute
The directive absolute specifies the starting address in RAM for a variable. If the
variable spans more than 1 word (16-bit), higher words will be stored at the consecutive locations.
The absolute directive is appended to the declaration of a variable:
dim x as word absolute 0x32
' Variable x will occupy 1 word (16 bits) at address 0x32
dim y as longint absolute 0x34
' Variable y will occupy 2 words at addresses 0x34 and 0x36
Be careful when using absolute directive, as you may overlap two variables by
accident. For example:
dim i as word absolute 0x42
' Variable i will occupy 1 word at address 0x42;
dim jj as longint absolute 0x40
' Variable will occupy 2 words at 0x40 and 0x42; thus,
' changing i changes jj at the same time and vice versa
Note: You must specify an even address when using the directive absolute.
Directive org
The directive org specifies the starting address of a routine in ROM. It is appended
to the declaration of routine. For example:
sub procedure proc(dim par as word) org 0x200
' Procedure will start at the address 0x200;
...
end sub
Note: You must specify an even address when using the directive org.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
175
CHAPTER 5
Language Reference
176
mikroBasic for 8051
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER
mikroBasic for
8051 Libraries
6
mikroBasic for 8051 provides a set of libraries which simplify the initialization and
use of 8051 compliant MCUs and their modules:
Use Library manager to include mikroBasic for 8051 Libraries in you project.
177
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Hardware 8051-specific Libraries
- CANSPI Library
- EEPROM Library
- Graphic LCD Library
- Keypad Library
- LCD Library
- Manchester Code Library
- OneWire Library
- Port Expander Library
- PS/2 Library
- RS-485 Library
- Software I2C Library
- Software SPI Library
- Software UART Library
- Sound Library
- SPI Library
- SPI Ethernet Library
- SPI Graphic LCD Library
- SPI LCD Library
- SPI LCD8 Library
- SPI T6963C Graphic LCD Library
- T6963C Graphic LCD Library
- UART Library
Miscellaneous Libraries
- Button Library
- Conversions Library
- Math Library
- String Library
- Time Library
- Trigonometry Library
See also Built-in Routines.
178
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
LIBRARY DEPENDENCIES
Certain libraries use (depend on) function and/or variables, constants defined in
other libraries.
Image below shows clear representation about these dependencies.
For example, SPI_Glcd uses Glcd_Fonts and Port_Expander library which uses SPI
library.
This means that if you check SPI_Glcd library in Library manager, all libraries on
which it depends will be checked too.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
179
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Related topics: Library manager, 8051 Libraries
180
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
CANSPI LIBRARY
The SPI module is available with a number of the 8051 compliant MCUs. The
mikroBasic for 8051 provides a library (driver) for working with mikroElektronika's
CANSPI Add-on boards (with MCP2515 or MCP2510) via SPI interface.
The CAN is a very robust protocol that has error detection and signalization,
self–checking and fault confinement. Faulty CAN data and remote frames are retransmitted automatically, similar to the Ethernet.
Data transfer rates depend on distance. For example, 1 Mbit/s can be achieved at
network lengths below 40m while 250 Kbit/s can be achieved at network lengths
below 250m. The greater distance the lower maximum bitrate that can be achieved.
The lowest bitrate defined by the standard is 200Kbit/s. Cables used are shielded
twisted pairs.
CAN supports two message formats:
- Standard format, with 11 identifier bits and
- Extended format, with 29 identifier bits
Note:
- Consult the CAN standard about CAN bus termination resistance.
- An effective CANSPI communication speed depends on SPI and certainly
is slower than “real” CAN.
- CANSPI module refers to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Add-on board connected to SPI module of MCU.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
181
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
External dependecies of CANSPI Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using CANSPI
Library:
Description:
Example :
dim CanSpi_CS as sbit
Chip Select line.
external
dim CanSpi_CS
as sbit at
P1.B0
dim CanSpi_RST as
sbit external
dim CanSpi_Rst
as sbit at
P1.B2
Reset line.
Library Routines
-
CANSPISetOperationMode
CANSPIGetOperationMode
CANSPIInitialize
CANSPISetBaudRate
CANSPISetMask
CANSPISetFilter
CANSPIread
CANSPIWrite
The following routines are for an internal use by the library only:
- RegsToCANSPIID
- CANSPIIDToRegs
Be sure to check CANSPI constants necessary for using some of the sub functions.
182
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
CANSPISetOperationMode
Prototype
sub procedure CANSPISetOperationMode(dim mode as byte, dim WAIT
as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets the CANSPI module to requested mode.
Parameters :
- mode: CANSPI module operation mode. Valid values: CANSPI_OP_MODE constants (see CANSPI constants).
Description
- WAIT: CANSPI mode switching verification request. If WAIT = 0, the call is
non-blocking. The sub function does not verify if the CANSPI module is
switched to requested mode or not. Caller must use CANSPIGetOperationMode
to verify correct operation mode before performing mode specific operation. If
WAIT != 0, the call is blocking – the sub function won’t “return” until the
requested mode is set.
The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
Requires
Example
MCU has to be properly connected to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Extra Board
or similar hardware. See connection example at the bottom of this page.
' set the CANSPI module into configuration mode (wait inside
CANSPISetOperationMode until this mode is set)
CANSPISetOperationMode(CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG, 0xFF)
CANSPIGetOperationMode
Prototype
sub function CANSPIGetOperationMode() as byte
Returns
Current operation mode.
The sub function returns current operation mode of the CANSPI module. Check
Description CANSPI_OP_MODE constants (see CANSPI constants) or device datasheet for
operation mode codes.
The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
Requires
Example
MCU has to be properly connected to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Extra Board
or similar hardware. See connection example at the bottom of this page.
' check whether the CANSPI module is in Normal mode and if it is
do something.
if (CANSPIGetOperationMode() = CANSPI_MODE_NORMAL) then
...
end if
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
183
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
CANSPIInitialize
Prototype
sub procedure CANSPIInitialize(dim SJW as byte, dim BRP as byte,
dim PHSEG1 as byte, dim PHSEG2 as byte, dim PROPSEG as byte, dim
CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initializes the CANSPI module.
Stand-Alone CAN controller in the CANSPI module is set to:
Description -
Disable CAN capture
Continue CAN operation in Idle mode
Do not abort pending transmissions
Fcan clock: 4*Tcy (Fosc)
Baud rate is set according to given parameters
CAN mode: Normal
Filter and mask registers IDs are set to zero
Filter and mask message frame type is set according to CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS value
SAM, SEG2PHTS, WAKFIL and DBEN bits are set according to CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS value.
Parameters:
-
SJW as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
BRP as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
PHSEG1 as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
PHSEG2 as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
PROPSEG as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS is formed from predefined constants (see CANSPI constants)
CanSpi_CS and CanSpi_Rst variables must be defined before using this sub function.
The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
Requires
The SPI module needs to be initialized. See the Spi_Init and Spi_Init_Advanced
routines.
MCU has to be properly connected to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Extra Board or
similar hardware. See connection example at the bottom of this page.
184
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Example
Libraries
' initialize the CANSPI module with the appropriate baud rate and
message acceptance flags along with the sampling rules
dim Can_Init_Flags as byte
...
Can_Init_Flags = CAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE and ' form value to
be used
CAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON and ' with
CANSPIInitialize
CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG
and
CAN_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_ON and
CAN_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG
...
Spi_Init()
' initialize SPI
module
CANSPIInitialize(1,3,3,3,1,Can_Init_Flags) ' initialize external CANSPI module
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
185
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
CANSPISetBaudRate
Prototype
sub procedure CANSPISetBaudRate(dim SJW as byte, dim BRP as byte,
dim PHSEG1 as byte, dim PHSEG2 as byte, dim PROPSEG as byte, dim
CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets the CANSPI module baud rate. Due to complexity of the CAN protocol, you
can not simply force a bps value. Instead, use this sub function when the CANSPI
module is in Config mode.
SAM, SEG2PHTS and WAKFIL bits are set according to CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS value.
Refer to datasheet for details.
Description Parameters:
-
SJW as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
BRP as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
PHSEG1 as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
PHSEG2 as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
PROPSEG as defined in CAN controller's datasheet
CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS is formed from predefined constants (see CANSPI constants)
The CANSPI module must be in Config mode, otherwise the sub function will be
ignored. See CANSPISetOperationMode.
Requires
The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
MCU has to be properly connected to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Extra Board
or similar hardware. See connection example at the bottom of this page.
Example
186
' set required baud rate and sampling rules
dim can_config_flags as byte
...
CANSPISetOperationMode(CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG, 0xFF)
'
set CONFIGURATION mode (CANSPI module mast be in config mode for
baud rate settings)
can_config_flags = CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE and
CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON and
CANSPI_CONFIG_STD_MSG
and
CANSPI_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_ON and
CANSPI_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG and
CANSPI_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_OFF
CANSPISetBaudRate(1, 1, 3, 3, 1, can_config_flags)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
CANSPISetMask
Prototype
sub procedure CANSPISetMask(dim CAN_MASK as byte, dim val as
longint, dim CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Configures mask for advanced filtering of messages. The parameter value is
bit-adjusted to the appropriate mask registers.
Parameters:
- CAN_MASK: CANSPI module mask number. Valid values: CANSPI_MASK con
stants (see CANSPI constants)
Description - val: mask register value
- CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS: selects type of message to filter. Valid values:
CANSPI_CONFIG_ALL_VALID_MSG,
CANSPI_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE and CANSPI_CONFIG_STD_MSG,
CANSPI_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE and CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG.
(see CANSPI constants)
The CANSPI module must be in Config mode, otherwise the sub function will be
ignored. See CANSPISetOperationMode.
Requires
The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
MCU has to be properly connected to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Extra Board
or similar hardware. See connection example at the bottom of this page.
' set the appropriate filter mask and message type value
CANSPISetOperationMode(CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF)
'
set CONFIGURATION mode (CANSPI module must be in config mode for
mask settings)
Example
' Set all B1 mask bits to 1 (all filtered bits are relevant):
' Note that -1 is just a cheaper way to write 0xFFFFFFFF.
' Complement will do the trick and fill it up with ones.
CANSPISetMask(CANSPI_MASK_B1, -1, CANSPI_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE and
CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
187
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
CANSPISetFilter
Prototype
sub procedure CANSPISetFilter(dim CAN_FILTER as byte, dim val as
longint, dim CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Configures message filter. The parameter value is bit-adjusted to the appropriate filter registers.
Parameters:
- CAN_FILTER: CANSPI module filter number. Valid values: CANSPI_FILTER constants (see CANSPI constants)
Description - val: filter register value
- CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS: selects type of message to filter. Valid values:
CANSPI_CONFIG_ALL_VALID_MSG,
CANSPI_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE and CANSPI_CONFIG_STD_MSG,
CANSPI_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE and CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG.
(see CANSPI constants)
The CANSPI module must be in Config mode, otherwise the sub function will be
ignored. See CANSPISetOperationMode.
Requires
The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
MCU has to be properly connected to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Extra Board
or similar hardware. See connection example at the bottom of this page.
Example
' set the appropriate filter value and message type
CANSPISetOperationMode(CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF)
' set CONFIGURATION mode (CANSPI module must be in config mode
for filter settings)
' Set id of filter B1_F1 to 3:
CANSPISetFilter(CANSPI_FILTER_B1_F1, 3, CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG)
188
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
CANSPIRead
Prototype
sub function CANSPIRead(dim byref id as longint, dim byref
rd_data as array[20] of byte, dim data_len as byte, dim
CAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS as byte) as byte
- 0 if nothing is received
- 0xFF if one of the Receive Buffers is full (message received)
Returns
If at least one full Receive Buffer is found, it will be processed in the following way:
- Message ID is retrieved and stored to location provided by the id parameter
- Message data is retrieved and stored to a buffer provided by the rd_data parameter
- Message length is retrieved and stored to location provided by the data_len
parameter
- Message flags are retrieved and stored to location provided by the
Description CAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS parameter
Parameters:
-
id: message identifier storage address
rd_data: data buffer (an array of bytes up to 8 bytes in length)
data_len: data length storage address.
CAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS: message flags storage address
The CANSPI module must be in a mode in which receiving is possible. See
CANSPISetOperationMode.
Requires
The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
MCU has to be properly connected to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Extra Board
or similar hardware. See connection example at the bottom of this page.
Example
' check the CANSPI module for received messages. If any was
received do something.
dim msg_rcvd, rx_flags, data_len as byte
rd_data as array[8] of byte
msg_id as longint
...
CANSPISetOperationMode(CANSPI_MODE_NORMAL,0xFF)
' set NORMAL mode (CANSPI module must be in mode in which receive
is possible)
...
rx_flags = 0
'
clear message flags
if (msg_rcvd = CANSPIRead(msg_id, rd_data, data_len, rx_flags)
...
end if
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
189
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
CANSPIWrite
Prototype
Returns
sub function CANSPIWrite(dim id as longint, dim byref wr_data as
array[20] of byte, dim data_len as byte, dim CAN_TX_MSG_FLAGS as
byte) as byte
- 0 if all Transmit Buffers are busy
- 0xFF if at least one Transmit Buffer is available
If at least one empty Transmit Buffer is found, the sub function sends message
in the queue for transmission.
Parameters:
Description
- id: CAN message identifier. Valid values: 11 or 29 bit values, depending on
message type (standard or extended)
- wr_data: data to be sent (an array of bytes up to 8 bytes in length)
- data_len: data length. Valid values: 1 to 8
- CAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS: message flags
The CANSPI module must be in mode in which transmission is possible. See
CANSPISetOperationMode.
Requires
The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
MCU has to be properly connected to mikroElektronika's CANSPI Extra Board
or similar hardware. See connection example at the bottom of this page.
Example
' send message extended CAN message with the appropriate ID and
data
dim tx_flags as byte
rd_data as array[8] of byte
msg_id as longint
...
CANSPISetOperationMode(CAN_MODE_NORMAL, 0xFF)
'
set NORMAL mode (CANSPI must be in mode in which transmission is
possible)
tx_flags = CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_0 ands CANSPI_TX_XTD_FRAME
' set message flags
CANSPIWrite(msg_id, rd_data, 2, tx_flags)
190
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
CANSPI Constants
There is a number of constants predefined in the CANSPI library. You need to be
familiar with them in order to be able to use the library effectively. Check the example at the end of the chapter.
CANSPI_OP_MODE
The CANSPI_OP_MODE constants define CANSPI operation mode. sub function
CANSPISetOperationMode expects one of these as it's argument:
const
CANSPI_MODE_BITS
CANSPI_MODE_NORMAL
CANSPI_MODE_SLEEP
CANSPI_MODE_LOOP
CANSPI_MODE_LISTEN
CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG
=
=
=
=
=
=
0xE0
0x00
0x20
0x40
0x60
0x80
' Use this to access opmode
bits
CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS
The CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS constants define flags related to the CANSPI module configuration. The sub functions CANSPIInitialize, CANSPISetBaudRate,
CANSPISetMask and CANSPISetFilter expect one of these (or a bitwise combination) as their argument:
const
CANSPI_CONFIG_DEFAULT
CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_BIT
CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON
CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_OFF
= 0xFF
' 11111111
= 0x01
= 0xFF
= 0xFE
' XXXXXXX1
' XXXXXXX0
CANSPI_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_BIT = 0x02
CANSPI_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_ON = 0xFF
CANSPI_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_OFF = 0xFD
' XXXXXX1X
' XXXXXX0X
CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_BIT
CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_ONCE
CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE
= 0x04
= 0xFF
= 0xFB
' XXXXX1XX
' XXXXX0XX
CANSPI_CONFIG_MSG_TYPE_BIT
CANSPI_CONFIG_STD_MSG
CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG
= 0x08
= 0xFF
= 0xF7
' XXXX1XXX
' XXXX0XXX
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
191
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
CANSPI_CONFIG_MSG_BITS
CANSPI_CONFIG_ALL_MSG
CANSPI_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG
CANSPI_CONFIG_VALID_STD_MSG
CANSPI_CONFIG_ALL_VALID_MSG
= 0x60
= 0xFF
= 0xDF
= 0xBF
= 0x9F
' X11XXXXX
' X10XXXXX
' X01XXXXX
' X00XXXXX
You may use bitwise and to form config byte out of these values. For example:
init = CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE
CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON
CANSPI_CONFIG_STD_MSG
CANSPI_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_ON
CANSPI_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG
CANSPI_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_OFF
...
CANSPIInitialize(1, 1, 3, 3, 1, init)
and
and
and
and
and
' initialize CANSPI
CANSPI_TX_MSG_FLAGS
CANSPI_TX_MSG_FLAGS are flags related to transmission of a CAN message:
const
CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_BITS
CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_0
CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_1
CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_2
CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_3
=
=
=
=
=
0x03
0xFC
0xFD
0xFE
0xFF
'
'
'
'
XXXXXX00
XXXXXX01
XXXXXX10
XXXXXX11
CANSPI_TX_FRAME_BIT
CANSPI_TX_STD_FRAME
CANSPI_TX_XTD_FRAME
= 0x08
= 0xFF
= 0xF7
' XXXXX1XX
' XXXXX0XX
CANSPI_TX_RTR_BIT
CANSPI_TX_NO_RTR_FRAME
CANSPI_TX_RTR_FRAME
= 0x40
= 0xFF
= 0xBF
' X1XXXXXX
' X0XXXXXX
You may use bitwise and to adjust the appropriate flags. For example:
' form value to be used as sending message flag:
send_config = CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_0
and
CANSPI_TX_XTD_FRAME
and
CANSPI_TX_NO_RTR_FRAME
...
CANSPIWrite(id, data, 1, send_config)
192
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
CANSPI_RX_MSG_FLAGS
CANSPI_RX_MSG_FLAGS are flags related to reception of CAN message. If a particular bit is set then corresponding meaning is TRUE or else it will be FALSE.
const
CANSPI_RX_FILTER_BITS
CANSPI_RX_FILTER_1
CANSPI_RX_FILTER_2
CANSPI_RX_FILTER_3
CANSPI_RX_FILTER_4
CANSPI_RX_FILTER_5
CANSPI_RX_FILTER_6
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
0x07
0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
' Use this to access filter bits
CANSPI_RX_OVERFLOW
= 0x08 ' Set if Overflowed else cleared
CANSPI_RX_INVALID_MSG = 0x10 ' Set if invalid else cleared
CANSPI_RX_XTD_FRAME
= 0x20 ' Set if XTD message else cleared
CANSPI_RX_RTR_FRAME
= 0x40 ' Set if RTR message else cleared
CANSPI_RX_DBL_BUFFERED = 0x80 ' Set if this message was hardware double-buffered
You may use bitwise and to adjust the appropriate flags. For example:
if (MsgFlag and CANSPI_RX_OVERFLOW &lt;&gt; 0) then
...
' Receiver overflow has occurred.
' We have lost our previous message.
end if
CANSPI_MASK
The CANSPI_MASK constants define mask codes. sub function CANSPISetMask
expects one of these as it's argument:
const
CANSPI_MASK_B1 = 0
CANSPI_MASK_B2 = 1
CANSPI_FILTER
The CANSPI_FILTER constants define filter codes. sub functions CANSPISetFilter
expects one of these as it's argument:
const
CANSPI_FILTER_B1_F1
CANSPI_FILTER_B1_F2
CANSPI_FILTER_B2_F1
CANSPI_FILTER_B2_F2
CANSPI_FILTER_B2_F3
CANSPI_FILTER_B2_F4
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
1
2
3
4
5
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
193
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Library Example
This is a simple demonstration of CANSPI Library routines usage. First node initiates the communication with the second node by sending some data to its address.
The second node responds by sending back the data incremented by 1. First node
then does the same and sends incremented data back to second node, etc.
Code for the first CANSPI node:
program CanSpi1st
dim Can_Init_Flags, Can_Send_Flags,
flags
Rx_Data_Len as byte
RxTx_Data
as byte[8]
Msg_Rcvd
as byte
Tx_ID, Rx_ID as longint
Can_Rcv_Flags as byte
' CAN
' Received data length in bytes
' CAN rx/tx data buffer
' Reception flag
' CAN rx and tx ID
' CANSPI module connections
dim CanSpi_CS as sbit at P1.B0
dim CanSpi_Rst as sbit at P1.B2
' End CANSPI module connections
main:
Can_Init_Flags = 0
Can_Send_Flags = 0
Can_Rcv_Flags = 0
Can_Send_Flags = CAN_TX_PRIORITY_0 and
CAN_TX_XTD_FRAME and
CAN_TX_NO_RTR_FRAME
'
' Clear flags
'
' Form value to be used
'
with CANSPIWrite
Can_Init_Flags = CAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE and ' Form value to be
used
CAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON and
'
with CANSPIInit
CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG
and
CAN_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_ON and
CAN_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG
Spi_Init()
' Initialize SPI module
CANSPIInitialize(1,3,3,3,1,Can_Init_Flags)
' Initialize external
CANSPI module
CANSPISetOperationMode(CAN_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF)
mode
194
'
Set
CONFIGURATION
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
CANSPISetMask(CAN_MASK_B1,-1,CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG)
mask1 bits to ones
CANSPISetMask(CAN_MASK_B2,-1,CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG)
all mask2 bits to ones
CANSPISetFilter(CAN_FILTER_B2_F4,3,CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG)
of filter B2_F4 to 3
CANSPISetOperationMode(CAN_MODE_NORMAL,0xFF)
RxTx_Data[0] = 9
' Set all
' Set
' Set id
' Set NORMAL mode
' Set initial data to be sent
Tx_ID = 12111
' Set transmit ID
CANSPIWrite(Tx_ID, RxTx_Data, 1, Can_Send_Flags)
initial message
while TRUE
Endless loop
Msg_Rcvd = CANSPIRead( Rx_ID ,
Can_Rcv_Flags)
' Receive message
if
(Rx_ID
=
3)
and
' If message received check id
' Send
'
RxTx_Data
,
(Msg_Rcvd
P0
=
Rx_Data_Len,
&lt;&gt;
0)
then
RxTx_Data[0]
' ID correct, output data at PORT0
Inc(RxTx_Data[0])
' Increment received data
Delay_ms(10)
CANSPIWrite(Tx_ID,
' Send incremented data back
end if
wend
end.
RxTx_Data,
1,
Can_Send_Flags)
Code for the second CANSPI node:
program CanSpi2nd
dim Can_Init_Flags, Can_Send_Flags,
flags
Rx_Data_Len as byte
RxTx_Data as byte[8]
Msg_Rcvd as byte
Tx_ID, Rx_ID as longint
Can_Rcv_Flags as byte
'
'
'
'
' CAN
Received data length in bytes
CAN rx/tx data buffer
Reception flag
CAN rx and tx ID
' CANSPI module connections
dim CanSpi_CS as sbit at P1.B0
dim CanSpi_Rst as sbit at P1.B2
' End CANSPI module connections
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
195
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
main:
Can_Init_Flags = 0
Can_Send_Flags = 0
Can_Rcv_Flags = 0
Can_Send_Flags = CAN_TX_PRIORITY_0 and
CAN_TX_XTD_FRAME and
with CANSPIWrite
CAN_TX_NO_RTR_FRAME
'
' Clear flags
'
' Form value to be used
'
Can_Init_Flags = CAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE and
value to be used
CAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON and
with CANSPIInit
CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG
and
CAN_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_ON and
CAN_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG and
CAN_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_OFF
' Form
'
Spi_Init()
' Initialize SPI module
CANSPIInitialize(1,3,3,3,1,Can_Init_Flags)
' Initialize
CAN-SPI module
CANSPISetOperationMode(CAN_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF)
CONFIGURATION mode
' Set
CANSPISetMask(CAN_MASK_B1,-1,CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG)
' Set all mask1
bits to ones
CANSPISetMask(CAN_MASK_B2,-1,CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG)
' Set all mask2
bits to ones
CANSPISetFilter(CAN_FILTER_B2_F3,12111,CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG) ' Set
id of filter B2_F3 to 12111
CANSPISetOperationMode(CAN_MODE_NORMAL,0xFF)
Tx_ID = 3
' Set NORMAL mode
' Set tx ID
while TRUE
' Endless loop
Msg_Rcvd = CANSPIRead( Rx_ID , RxTx_Data ,
Rx_Data_Len,
Can_Rcv_Flags)
' Receive message
if Rx_ID = 12111 then
' If message received check id
if Msg_Rcvd &lt;&gt; 0 then
P0 = RxTx_Data[0]
' ID correct, output data at PORT0
Inc(RxTx_Data[0])
' Increment received data
CANSPIWrite(Tx_ID,
RxTx_Data,
1,
Can_Send_Flags)
' Send incremented data back
end if
end if
wend
end.
196
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
HW Connection
Example of interfacing CAN transceiver MCP2510 with MCU via SPI interface
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
197
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
EEPROM LIBRARY
EEPROM data memory is available with a number of 8051 family. The mikroBasic for 8051
includes a library for comfortable work with MCU's internal EEPROM.
Note: EEPROM Library functions implementation is MCU dependent, consult the appropriate
MCU datasheet for details about available EEPROM size and address range.
Library Routines
- Eeprom_Read
- Eeprom_Write
- Eeprom_Write_Block
Eeprom_Read
Prototype
sub function Eeprom_Read(dim address as word) as byte
Returns
Byte from the specified address.
Reads data from specified address.
Description Parameters :
- address: address of the EEPROM memory location to be read.
198
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim eeAddr as word
temp as byte
...
eeAddr = 2
temp = Eeprom_Read(eeAddr)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Eeprom_Write
Prototype
Returns
sub function Eeprom_Write(dim address as word, dim wrdata as
byte) as byte
- 0 writing was successful
- 1 if error occured
Writes wrdata to specified address.
Parameters :
Description
- address: address of the EEPROM memory location to be written.
- wrdata: data to be written.
Note: Specified memory location will be erased before writing starts.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim eeWrite as byte = 0x55
wrAddr as word = 0x732
...
eeWrite = 0x55
wrAddr = 0x732
Eeprom_Write(wrAddr, eeWrite)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
199
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Eeprom_Write_Block
Prototype
Returns
sub function Eeprom_Write_Block(dim address as word, dim byref
ptrdata as byte) as byte
- 0 writing was successful
- 1 if error occured
Writes one EEPROM row (32 bytes block) of data.
Parameters :
Description
- address: starting address of the EEPROM memory block to be written.
- ptrdata: data block to be written.
Note: Specified memory block will be erased before writing starts.
EEPROM module must support block write operations.
Requires
Example
200
It is the user's responsibility to maintain proper address alignment. In this case,
address has to be a multiply of 32, which is the size (in bytes) of one row of
MCU's EEPROM memory.
dim
wrAddr as word
iArr as string[16]
...
wrAddr = 0x0100
iArr = 'mikroElektronika'
Eeprom_Write_Block(wrAddr, iArr)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Library Example
This example demonstrates using the EEPROM Library with AT89S8253 MCU.
First, some data is written to EEPROM in byte and block mode; then the data is read
from the same locations and displayed on P0, P1 and P2.
program Eeprom
dim dat as byte[32]
i as byte
' Data buffer, loop variable
main:
for i = 0 to 31
dat[i] = i
next i
Eeprom_Write(2,0xAA)
Eeprom_Write(0x732,0x55)
Eeprom_Write_Block(0x100,dat)
address 0x100
Delay_ms(1000)
P0 = 0xFF
P1 = 0xFF
Delay_ms(1000)
P0 = 0x00
P1 = 0x00
Delay_ms(1000)
P0 = Eeprom_Read(2)
and display it on PORT0
P1 = Eeprom_Read(0x732)
and display it on PORT1
Delay_ms(1000)
for i = 0 to 31
address 0x100
P2 = Eeprom_Read(0x100+i)
Delay_ms(100)
next i
end.
' Fill data buffer
' Write some data at address 2
' Write some data at address 0x732
' Write 32 bytes block at
' Blink P0 and P1 diodes
'
to indicate reading start
' Read data from address 2
' Read data from address 0x732
' Read 32 bytes block from
'
and display data on PORT2
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
201
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Graphic LCD Library
The mikroBasic for 8051 provides a library for operating Graphic LCD 128x64 (with
commonly used Samsung KS108/KS107 controller).
For creating a custom set of GLCD images use GLCD Bitmap Editor Tool.
External dependencies of Graphic LCD Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using Graphic
LCD Library:
dim GLCD_DataPort as
byte external
volatile sfr
dim GLCD_CS1 as sbit
external
dim GLCD_CS2 as sbit
external
dim GLCD_RS as sbit
external
dim GLCD_RW as sbit
external
dim GLCD_RST as sbit
external
dim GLCD_EN as sbit
external
Description:
LCD Data Port.
Chip Select 1 line.
Chip Select 2 line.
Register select line.
Read/Write line.
Reset line.
Enable line.
Example :
dim GLCD_DataPort as
byte at P0 sfr
dim GLCD_CS1 as sbit
at P2.B0
dim GLCD_CS2 as sbit
at P2.B0
dim GLCD_RS as sbit
at P2.B0
dim GLCD_RW as sbit
at P2.B0
dim GLCD_RST as sbit
at P2.B0
dim GLCD_EN as sbit
at P2.B0
Library Routines
Basic routines:
-
202
Glcd_Init
Glcd_Set_Side
Glcd_Set_X
Glcd_Set_Page
Glcd_Read_Data
Glcd_Write_Data
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Advanced routines:
-
Glcd_Fill
Glcd_Dot
Glcd_Line
Glcd_V_Line
Glcd_H_Line
Glcd_Rectangle
Glcd_Box
Glcd_Circle
Glcd_Set_Font
Glcd_Write_Char
Glcd_Write_Text
Glcd_Image
Glcd_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
Description
Initializes the GLCD module. Each of the control lines is both port and pin configurable, while data lines must be on a single port (pins &lt;0:7&gt;).
Global variables :
-
Requires
GLCD_CS1 : chip select 1 signal pin
GLCD_CS2 : chip select 2 signal pin
GLCD_RS : register select signal pin
GLCD_RW : read/write signal pin
GLCD_EN : enable signal pin
GLCD_RST : reset signal pin
GLCD_DataPort : data port
must be defined before using this function.
' glcd pinout settings
dim GLCD_DataPort as byte at P0 sfr
Example
dim
dim
dim
dim
dim
dim
GLCD_CS1
GLCD_CS2
GLCD_RS
GLCD_RW
GLCD_RST
GLCD_EN
as
as
as
as
as
as
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
at
at
at
at
at
at
P2.B0
P2.B1
P2.B2
P2.B3
P2.B5
P2.B4
...
Glcd_Init()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
203
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Glcd_Set_Side
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Set_Side(dim x_pos as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Selects GLCD side. Refer to the GLCD datasheet for detailed explaination.
Parameters :
- x_pos: position on x-axis. Valid values: 0..127
Description
The parameter x_pos specifies the GLCD side: values from 0 to 63 specify the
left side, values from 64 to 127 specify the right side.
Note: For side, x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom
of this page.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
The following two lines are equivalent, and both of them select the left side of
GLCD:
Example
Glcd_Select_Side(0)
Glcd_Select_Side(10)
Glcd_Set_X
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Set_X(dim x_pos as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets x-axis position to x_pos dots from the left border of GLCD within the selected side.
Parameters :
Description
- x_pos: position on x-axis. Valid values: 0..63
Note: For side, x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom
of this page.
204
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
Glcd_Set_X(25)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Glcd_Set_Page
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Set_Page(dim page as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Selects page of the GLCD.
Parameters :
Description
- page: page number. Valid values: 0..7
Note: For side, x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom
of this page.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
Glcd_Set_Page(5)
Glcd_Read_Data
Prototype
sub function Glcd_Read_Data() as byte
Returns
One byte from GLCD memory.
Description
Reads data from from the current location of GLCD memory and moves to the
next location.
GLCD needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Requires
Example
GLCD side, x-axis position and page should be set first. See functions
Glcd_Set_Side, Glcd_Set_X, and Glcd_Set_Page.
dim data as byte
...
data = Glcd_Read_Data()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
205
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Glcd_Write_Data
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Write_Data(dim ddata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes one byte to the current location in GLCD memory and moves to the next
location.
Description
Parameters :
- ddata: data to be written
GLCD needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Requires
Example
GLCD side, x-axis position and page should be set first. See functions
Glcd_Set_Side, Glcd_Set_X, and Glcd_Set_Page.
dim data as byte
...
Glcd_Write_Data(data)
Glcd_Fill
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Fill(dim pattern as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fills GLCD memory with the byte pattern.
Parameters :
Description - pattern: byte to fill GLCD memory with
To clear the GLCD screen, use Glcd_Fill(0).
To fill the screen completely, use Glcd_Fill(0xFF).
206
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Clear screen
Glcd_Fill(0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Glcd_Dot
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Dot(dim x_pos as byte, dim y_pos as byte, dim
color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a dot on GLCD at coordinates (x_pos, y_pos).
Parameters :
- x_pos: x position. Valid values: 0..127
- y_pos: y position. Valid values: 0..63
Description - color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines a dot state: 0 clears dot, 1 puts a dot, and 2
inverts dot state.
Note: For x and y axis layout explanation see schematic at the bottom of this
page.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Invert the dot in the upper left corner
Glcd_Dot(0, 0, 2)
Glcd_Line
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Line(dim x_start as integer, dim y_start as integer, dim x_end as integer, dim y_end as integer, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a line on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description
-
x_start: x coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..127
y_start: y coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..63
x_end: x coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..127
y_end: y coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..63
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the line color: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts
each dot.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Draw a line between dots (0,0) and (20,30)
Glcd_Line(0, 0, 20, 30, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
207
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Glcd_V_Line
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_V_Line(dim y_start as byte, dim y_end as byte,
dim x_pos as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a vertical line on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description -
y_start: y coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..63
y_end: y coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..63
x_pos: x coordinate of vertical line. Valid values: 0..127
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the line color: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts
each dot.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Draw a vertical line between dots (10,5) and (10,25)
Glcd_V_Line(5, 25, 10, 1)
Glcd_H_Line
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_V_Line(dim x_start as byte, dim x_end as byte,
dim y_pos as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a horizontal line on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description -
x_start: x coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..127
x_end: x coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..127
y_pos: y coordinate of horizontal line. Valid values: 0..63
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the line color: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts
each dot.
208
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Draw a horizontal line between dots (10,20) and (50,20)
Glcd_H_Line(10, 50, 20, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Glcd_Rectangle
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Rectangle(dim x_upper_left as byte, dim
y_upper_left as byte, dim x_bottom_right as byte, dim
y_bottom_right as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a rectangle on GLCD.
Parameters :
- x_upper_left: x coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner. Valid values: 0..127
- y_upper_left: y coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner. Valid values: 0..63
Description
- x_bottom_right: x coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner. Valid values: 0..127
- y_bottom_right: y coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner. Valid values: 0..63
- color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the rectangle border: 0 white, 1
black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Draw a rectangle between dots (5,5) and (40,40)
Glcd_Rectangle(5, 5, 40, 40, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
209
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Glcd_Box
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Box(dim x_upper_left as byte, dim y_upper_left
as byte, dim x_bottom_right as byte, dim y_bottom_right as byte,
dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a box on GLCD.
Parameters :
- x_upper_left: x coordinate of the upper left box corner. Valid values: 0..127
- y_upper_left: y coordinate of the upper left box corner. Valid values: 0..63
Description
- x_bottom_right: x coordinate of the lower right box corner. Valid values: 0..127
- y_bottom_right: y coordinate of the lower right box corner. Valid values: 0..63
- color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the box fill: 0 white, 1 black, and 2
inverts each dot.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Draw a box between dots (5,15) and (20,40)
Glcd_Box(5, 15, 20, 40, 1)
Glcd_Circle
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Circle(dim x_center as integer, dim y_center
as integer, dim radius as integer, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a circle on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description -
x_center: x coordinate of the circle center. Valid values: 0..127
y_center: y coordinate of the circle center. Valid values: 0..63
radius: radius size
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the circle line: 0 white, 1 black, and
2 inverts each dot.
210
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Draw a circle with center in (50,50) and radius=10
Glcd_Circle(50, 50, 10, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Glcd_Set_Font
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Set_Font(dim byref const ActiveFont as ^byte, dim
FontWidth as byte, dim FontHeight as byte, dim FontOffs as word)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets font that will be used with Glcd_Write_Char and Glcd_Write_Text routines.
Parameters :
Description -
activeFont: font to be set. Needs to be formatted as an array of char
aFontWidth: width of the font characters in dots.
aFontHeight: height of the font characters in dots.
aFontOffs: number that represents difference between the mikroBasic for
8051 character set and regular ASCII set (eg. if 'A' is 65 in ASCII character,
and 'A' is 45 in the mikroBasic for 8051 character set, aFontOffs is 20). Demo
fonts supplied with the library have an offset of 32, which means that they start
with space.
The user can use fonts given in the file “__Lib_GLCDFonts.mpas” file located in
the Uses folder or create his own fonts.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Use the custom 5x7 font &quot;myfont&quot; which starts with space (32):
Glcd_Set_Font(myfont, 5, 7, 32)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
211
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Glcd_Write_Char
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Write_Char(dim chr as byte, dim x_pos as byte,
dim page_num as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints character on the GLCD.
Parameters :
- chr: character to be written
- x_pos: character starting position on x-axis. Valid values: 0..(127-FontWidth)
- page_num: the number of the page on which character will be written. Valid
Description values: 0..7
- color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the character: 0 white, 1 black,
and 2 inverts each dot.
Note: For x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom of
this page.
212
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine. Use Glcd_Set_Font to specify the font for display; if no font is specified, then default 5x8 font supplied with
the library will be used.
Example
' Write character 'C' on the position 10 inside the page 2:
Glcd_Write_Char('C', 10, 2, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Glcd_Write_Text
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Write_Text(dim byref text as string[20], dim
x_pos as byte, dim page_num as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints text on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description
-
text: text to be written
x_pos: text starting position on x-axis.
page_num: the number of the page on which text will be written. Valid values: 0..7
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the text: 0 white, 1 black, and 2
inverts each dot.
Note: For x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom of
this page.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine. Use Glcd_Set_Font to specify the font for display; if no font is specified, then default 5x8 font supplied with
the library will be used.
Example
' Write text &quot;Hello world!&quot; on the position 10 inside the page 2:
Glcd_Write_Text(&quot;Hello world!&quot;, 10, 2, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
213
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Glcd_Image
Prototype
sub procedure Glcd_Image(dim byref const image as ^byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Displays bitmap on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description
- image: image to be displayed. Bitmap array must be located in code memory.
Use the mikroBasic for 8051 integrated GLCD Bitmap Editor to convert image to
a constant array suitable for displaying on GLCD.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Draw image my_image on GLCD
Glcd_Image(my_image)
Library Example
The following example demonstrates routines of the GLCD library: initialization, clear(pattern fill),
image displaying, drawing lines, circles, boxes and rectangles, text displaying and handling.
program Glcd
' Declarations
include bitmap
' end Declarations
' Glcd module connections
dim GLCD_DataPort as byte at P0 sfr
' GLCD data port
dim GLCD_CS1 as sbit at P2.B0
dim GLCD_CS2 as sbit at P2.B1
dim GLCD_RS as sbit at P2.B2
dim GLCD_RW as sbit at P2.B3
dim GLCD_RST as sbit at P2.B5
dim GLCD_EN as sbit at P2.B4
' End Glcd module connections
'
'
'
'
'
'
sub procedure delay2S()
Delay_ms(2000)
end sub
' 2 seconds delay sub function
GLCD
GLCD
GLCD
GLCD
GLCD
GLCD
chip select 1 signal
chip select 2 signal
register select signal
read/write signal
reset signal
enable signal
dim conter
as word
someText as char[17]
214
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
main:
Glcd_Init()
Glcd_Fill(0x00)
while TRUE
Glcd_Image(@advanced8051_bmp)
Delay2S()
Glcd_Fill(0x00)
Glcd_Box(62,40,124,56,1)
Glcd_Rectangle(5,5,84,35,1)
Glcd_Line(0, 63, 127, 0,1)
' Initialize GLCD
' Clear GLCD
' Draw image
' Clear GLCD
' Draw box
' Draw rectangle
' Draw line
delay2S()
for conter = 5 to 59
vertical lines
Delay_ms(50)
Glcd_V_Line(2, 54, conter, 2)
Glcd_H_Line(2, 120, conter, 2)
next conter
' Draw horizontal and
Delay2S()
Glcd_Fill(0x00)
Glcd_Set_Font(@Character8x8, 8, 8, 32)
Glcd_Write_Text(&quot;mikroE&quot;, 5, 7, 2)
for conter = 1 to 10
Glcd_Circle(63,32, 3*conter, 1)
next conter
Delay2S()
Glcd_Box(12,20, 70,63, 2)
Delay2S()
' Choose font
' Write string
' Draw circles
' Draw box
Glcd_Set_Font(@FontSystem5x8, 5, 8, 32) ' Change font
someText = &quot;Font 5x8&quot;
Glcd_Write_Text(someText, 5, 3, 1)
' Write string
Delay2S()
Glcd_Set_Font(@System3x6, 3, 6, 32)
someText = &quot;SMALL:FONT:3X6&quot;
Glcd_Write_Text(someText, 20, 7, 0)
Delay2S()
wend
' Change font
' Write string
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
215
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
HW Connection
GLCD HW connection
216
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
KEYPAD LIBRARY
The mikroBasic for 8051 provides a library for working with 4x4 keypad. The library
routines can also be used with 4x1, 4x2, or 4x3 keypad. For connections explanation see schematic at the bottom of this page.
Note: Since sampling lines for 8051 MCUs are activated by logical zero Keypad
Library can not be used with hardwares that have protective diodes connected with
anode to MCU side, such as mikroElektronika's Keypad extra board HW.Rev v1.20
External dependencies of Keypad Library
The following variable
must be defined in all
projects using Keypad
Library:
dim keypadPort as
byte external sfr
Description:
Keypad Port.
Example :
dim keypadPort as
byte at P0 sfr
Library Routines
- Keypad_Init
- Keypad_Key_Press
- Keypad_Key_Click
Keypad_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Keypad_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Initializes port for working with keypad.
Requires
keypadPort variable must be defined before using this function.
Example
' Initialize P0 for communication with keypad
dim keypadPort as byte at P0 sfr
...
Keypad_Init()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
217
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Keypad_Key_Press
Prototype
sub function Keypad_Key_Press() as byte
The code of a pressed key (1..16).
Returns
If no key is pressed, returns 0.
Description Reads the key from keypad when key gets pressed.
Requires
Port needs to be initialized for working with the Keypad library, see Keypad_Init.
Example
dim kp as byte
...
kp = Keypad_Key_Press()
Keypad_Key_Click
Prototype
sub function Keypad_Key_Click() as byte
The code of a clicked key (1..16).
Returns
If no key is clicked, returns 0.
Call to Keypad_Key_Click is a blocking call: the function waits until some key is
pressed and released. When released, the function returns 1 to 16, depending
Description on the key. If more than one key is pressed simultaneously the function will wait
until all pressed keys are released. After that the function will return the code of
the first pressed key.
Requires
Port needs to be initialized for working with the Keypad library, see Keypad_Init.
Example
dim kp as byte
...
kp = Keypad_Key_Click()
Library Example
This is a simple example of using the Keypad Library. It supports keypads with 1..4 rows and 1..4
columns. The code being returned by Keypad_Key_Click() function is in range from 1..16. In this
example, the code returned is transformed into ASCII codes [0..9,A..F] and displayed on LCD. In
addition, a small single-byte counter displays in the second LCD row number of key presses.
218
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
program Keypad
dim kp, cnt, oldstate as byte
txt as byte[5]
' Keypad module connections
dim keypadPort as byte at P0 sfr
' End Keypad module connections
' Lcd pinout definition
dim LCD_RS as sbit at P2.B0
dim LCD_EN as sbit at P2.B1
dim LCD_D7 as sbit at
dim LCD_D6 as sbit at
dim LCD_D5 as sbit at
dim LCD_D4 as sbit at
' end Lcd definitions
P2.B5
P2.B4
P2.B3
P2.B2
main:
oldstate = 0
cnt = 0
Keypad_Init()
Lcd_Init()
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CURSOR_OFF)
Lcd_Out(1, 1, &quot;Key :&quot;)
on LCD
Lcd_Out(2, 1, &quot;Times:&quot;)
' Reset counter
' Initialize Keypad
' Initialize LCD
' Clear display
' Cursor off
' Write message text
while TRUE
kp = 0
' Reset key code variable
' Wait for key to be
pressed and released
while ( kp = 0 )
kp = Keypad_Key_Click()
variable
wend
' Store key code in kp
' Prepare value for
output, transform key to it's ASCII value
select case kp
'case 10: kp = 42
' &quot;*&quot;
for keypad4x3
'case 11: kp = 48
' &quot;0&quot;
'case 12: kp = 35
' &quot;#&quot;
'default: kp += 48
' Uncomment this block
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
219
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
case 1
kp = 49 ' 1
case 2
kp = 50 '
case 3
kp = 51 '
case 4
kp = 65 '
case 5
kp = 52 '
case 6
kp = 53 '
case 7
kp = 54 '
case 8
kp = 66 '
case 9
kp = 55 '
case 10
kp = 56 '
case 11
kp = 57 '
case 12
kp = 67 '
case 13
kp = 42 '
case 14
kp = 48 '
case 15
kp = 35 '
case 16
kp = 68 '
end select ' end case
' Uncomment this block for keypad4x4
2
3
A
4
5
6
B
7
8
9
C
*
0
#
D
if (kp &lt;&gt; oldstate) then
' Pressed key differs
from previous
cnt = 1
oldstate = kp
else
' Pressed key is same as previous
Inc(cnt)
end if
Lcd_Chr(1, 10, kp)
' Print key ASCII value on LCD
if (cnt = 255) then
cnt = 0
Lcd_Out(2, 10, &quot;
end if
WordToStr(cnt, txt)
value to string
Lcd_Out(2, 10, txt)
on LCD
wend
end.
220
' If counter varialble overflow
&quot;)
' Transform counter
' Display counter value
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
HW Connection
4x4 Keypad connection scheme
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
221
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
LCD LIBRARY
The mikroBasic for 8051 provides a library for communication with LCDs (with
HD44780 compliant controllers) through the 4-bit interface. An example of LCD connections is given on the schematic at the bottom of this page.
For creating a set of custom LCD characters use LCD Custom Character Tool.
External dependencies of LCD Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using LCD
Library:
dim LCD_RS
external
dim LCD_EN
external
dim LCD_D7
external
dim LCD_D6
external
dim LCD_D5
external
dim LCD_D4
external
as sbit
as sbit
as sbit
as sbit
as sbit
as sbit
Description:
Register Select line.
Enable line.
Data 7 line.
Data 6 line.
Data 5 line.
Data 4 line.
Example :
dim LCD_RS
P2.B0
dim LCD_EN
P2.B1
dim LCD_D7
P2.B5
dim LCD_D6
P2.B4
dim LCD_D5
P2.B3
dim LCD_D4
P2.B2
as sbit at
as sbit at
as sbit at
as sbit at
as sbit at
as sbit at
Library Routines
-
222
Lcd_Init
Lcd_Out
Lcd_Out_Cp
Lcd_Chr
Lcd_Chr_Cp
Lcd_Cmd
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Lcd_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Lcd_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Initializes LCD module.
Global variables:
Requires
-
LCD_D7: data bit 7
LCD_D6: data bit 6
LCD_D5: data bit 5
LCD_D4: data bit 4
RS: register select (data/instruction) signal pin
EN: enable signal pin
must be defined before using this function.
' lcd pinout settings
Example
dim
LCD_RS
LCD_EN
LCD_D7
LCD_D6
LCD_D5
LCD_D4
as
as
as
as
as
as
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
sbit
at
at
at
at
at
at
P2.B0
P2.B1
P2.B5
P2.B4
P2.B3
P2.B2
...
Lcd_Init()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
223
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Lcd_Out
Prototype
sub procedure Lcd_Out(dim row as byte, dim column as byte, dim
byref text as string[20])
Returns
Nothing.
Prints text on LCD starting from specified position. Both string variables and literals can be passed as a text.
Description
Parameters :
- row: starting position row number
- column: starting position column number
- text: text to be written
Requires
The LCD module needs to be initialized. See Lcd_Init routine.
Example
' Write text &quot;Hello!&quot; on LCD starting from row 1, column 3:
Lcd_Out(1, 3, &quot;Hello!&quot;)
Lcd_Out_Cp
Prototype
sub procedure Lcd_Out_Cp(dim byref text as string[19])
Returns
Nothing.
Prints text on LCD at current cursor position. Both string variables and literals
can be passed as a text.
Description
Parameters :
- text: text to be written
224
Requires
The LCD module needs to be initialized. See Lcd_Init routine.
Example
' Write text &quot;Here!&quot; at current cursor position:
Lcd_Out_Cp(&quot;Here!&quot;)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Lcd_Chr
Prototype
sub procedure Lcd_Chr(dim row as byte, dim column as byte, dim
out_char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints character on LCD at specified position. Both variables and literals can be
passed as a character.
Description
Parameters :
- row: writing position row number
- column: writing position column number
- out_char: character to be written
Requires
The LCD module needs to be initialized. See Lcd_Init routine.
Example
' Write character &quot;i&quot; at row 2, column 3:
Lcd_Chr(2, 3, 'i')
Lcd_Chr_Cp
Prototype
sub procedure Lcd_Chr_Cp(dim out_char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints character on LCD at current cursor position. Both variables and literals
can be passed as a character.
Description
Parameters :
- out_char: character to be written
Requires
The LCD module needs to be initialized. See Lcd_Init routine.
Example
' Write character &quot;e&quot; at current cursor position:
Lcd_Chr_Cp('e')
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
225
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Lcd_Cmd
Prototype
sub procedure Lcd_Cmd(dim out_char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sends command to LCD.
Parameters :
Description
- out_char: command to be sent
Note: Predefined constants can be passed to the function, see Available LCD
Commands.
Requires
The LCD module needs to be initialized. See Lcd_Init table.
Example
' Clear LCD display:
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
Available LCD Commands
Lcd Command
226
Purpose
LCD_FIRST_ROW
Move cursor to the 1st row
LCD_SECOND_ROW
Move cursor to the 2nd row
LCD_THIRD_ROW
Move cursor to the 3rd row
LCD_FOURTH_ROW
Move cursor to the 4th row
LCD_CLEAR
Clear display
LCD_RETURN_HOME
Return cursor to home position, returns a shifted display to its original
position. Display data RAM is unaffected.
LCD_CURSOR_OFF
Turn off cursor
LCD_UNDERLINE_ON
Underline cursor on
LCD_BLINK_CURSOR_ON
Blink cursor on
LCD_MOVE_CURSOR_LEFT
Move cursor left without changing display data RAM
LCD_MOVE_CURSOR_RIGHT
Move cursor right without changing display data RAM
LCD_TURN_ON
Turn LCD display on
LCD_TURN_OFF
Turn LCD display off
LCD_SHIFT_LEFT
Shift display left without changing display data RAM
LCD_SHIFT_RIGHT
Shift display right without changing display data RAM
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Library Example
The following code demonstrates usage of the LCD Library routines:
program Lcd
' LCD module connections
dim LCD_RS as sbit at P2.0
dim LCD_EN as sbit at P2.1
dim LCD_D7 as sbit at P2.5
dim LCD_D6 as sbit at P2.4
dim LCD_D5 as sbit at P2.3
dim LCD_D4 as sbit at P2.2
' End LCD module connections
dim txt1
txt2
txt3
txt4
i as
as char[16]
as char[9]
as char[8]
as char[7]
byte
sub procedure Move_Delay()
Delay_ms(400)
end sub
main:
txt1 = &quot;mikroElektronika&quot;
txt2 = &quot;Easy8051B&quot;
txt3 = &quot;lcd 4bit&quot;
txt4 = &quot;example&quot;
Lcd_Init()
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CURSOR_OFF)
LCD_Out(1,6,txt3)
LCD_Out(2,6,txt4)
Delay_ms(2000)
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
LCD_Out(1,1,txt1)
LCD_Out(2,4,txt2)
Delay_ms(500)
' Moving texts
for i = 0 to 3
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_SHIFT_RIGHT)
Move_Delay()
next i
' Loop variable
' Function used for text moving
' You can change the moving speed here
' Initialize LCD
' Clear display
' Cursor off
' Write text in first row
' Write text in second row
' Clear display
' Write text in first row
' Write text in second row
' Move text to the right 4 times
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
227
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
while TRUE
for i = 0 to 6
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_SHIFT_LEFT)
Move_Delay()
next i
for i = 0 to 6
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_SHIFT_RIGHT)
Move_Delay()
next i
' Endless loop
' Move text to the left 7 times
' Move text to the right 7 times
wend
end.
LCD HW connection
228
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
ONEWIRE LIBRARY
The OneWire library provides routines for communication via the Dallas OneWire
protocol, e.g. with DS18x20 digital thermometer. OneWire is a Master/Slave protocol, and all communication cabling required is a single wire. OneWire enabled
devices should have open collector drivers (with single pull-up resistor) on the
shared data line.
Slave devices on the OneWire bus can even get their power supply from data line.
For detailed schematic see device datasheet.
Some basic characteristics of this protocol are:
-
single master system,
low cost,
low transfer rates (up to 16 kbps),
fairly long distances (up to 300 meters),
small data transfer packages.
Each OneWire device has also a unique 64-bit registration number (8-bit device
type, 48-bit serial number and 8-bit CRC), so multiple slaves can co-exist on the
same bus.
Note: Oscillator frequency Fosc needs to be at least 8MHz in order to use the routines with Dallas digital thermometers.
External dependencies of OneWire Library
This variable must be
defined in any project
that is using OneWire
Library:
dim OW_Bit as sbit
external
Description:
OneWire line.
Example :
dim OW_Bit as sbit at
P2.B7
Library Routines
- Ow_Reset
- Ow_Read
- Ow_Write
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
229
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Ow_Reset
Prototype
sub function Ow_Reset() as word
- 0 if the device is present
- 1 if the device is not present
Returns
Issues OneWire reset signal for DS18x20.
Description Parameters :
- None.
Devices compliant with the Dallas OneWire protocol.
Requires
Global variable OW_Bit must be defined before using this function.
Example
' Issue Reset signal on One-Wire Bus
Ow_Reset()
Ow_Read
Prototype
sub function Ow_Read() as byte
Returns
Data read from an external device over the OneWire bus.
Description Reads one byte of data via the OneWire bus.
Devices compliant with the Dallas OneWire protocol.
Requires
Global variable OW_Bit must be defined before using this function.
Example
230
' Read a byte from the One-Wire Bus
dim read_data as byte
...
read_data = Ow_Read()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Ow_Write
Prototype
sub procedure Ow_Write(dim par as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes one byte of data via the OneWire bus.
Description Parameters :
- par: data to be written
Devices compliant with the Dallas OneWire protocol.
Requires
Global variable OW_Bit must be defined before using this function.
Example
' Send a byte to the One-Wire Bus
Ow_Write(0xCC)
Library Example
This example reads the temperature using DS18x20 connected to pin P1.2. After reset, MCU
obtains temperature from the sensor and prints it on the LCD. Make sure to pull-up P1.2 line and
to turn off the P1 leds.
program OneWire
' Lcd pinout definition
dim LCD_RS as sbit at P2.0
dim LCD_EN as sbit at P2.1
dim LCD_D7 as sbit at
dim LCD_D6 as sbit at
dim LCD_D5 as sbit at
dim LCD_D4 as sbit at
' end Lcd definition
P2.5
P2.4
P2.3
P2.2
' OneWire pinout
dim OW_Bit as sbit at P1.B2
' end OneWire definition
' Set TEMP_RESOLUTION to the corresponding resolution of used DS18x20 sensor:
' 18S20: 9 (default setting can be 9,10,11,or 12)
' 18B20: 12
const TEMP_RESOLUTION as byte = 9
dim text as char[8]
temp as word
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
231
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
sub procedure Display_Temperature(dim temp2write as word)
const RES_SHIFT as byte = TEMP_RESOLUTION - 8
dim temp_whole as byte
temp_fraction as word
text = &quot;000.0000&quot;
' check if temperature is negative
if (temp2write and 0x8000) then
text[0] = &quot;-&quot;
temp2write = not temp2write + 1
end if
' extract temp_whole
temp_whole = temp2write &gt;&gt; RES_SHIFT
' convert temp_whole to characters
if (temp_whole div 100 ) then
text[0] = temp_whole div 100 + 48
end if
text[1] = (temp_whole div 10) mod 10 + 48
tens digit
text[2] = temp_whole mod 10
+ 48
ones digit
' Extract
' Extract
' extract temp_fraction and convert it to unsigned int
temp_fraction = temp2write &lt;&lt; (4-RES_SHIFT)
temp_fraction = temp_fraction and 0x000F
temp_fraction = temp_fraction * 625
' convert temp_fraction to characters
text[4] = temp_fraction
thousands digit
text[5] = (temp_fraction
hundreds digit
text[6] = (temp_fraction
tens digit
text[7] = temp_fraction
ones digit
div 1000
+ 48
' Extract
div 100) mod 10 + 48
' Extract
div 10) mod 10
' Extract
mod 10
+ 48
+ 48
' Extract
' print temperature on LCD
Lcd_Out(2, 5, text)
end sub
232
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
main:
Lcd_Init()
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CURSOR_OFF)
Lcd_Out(1, 1, &quot; Temperature:
&quot;)
' Print degree character, &quot;C&quot; for Centigrades
Lcd_Chr(2,13,223)
Lcd_Chr(2,14,&quot;C&quot;)
' main loop
while TRUE
' Perform temperature reading
Ow_Reset()
signal
Ow_Write(0xCC)
SKIP_ROM
Ow_Write(0x44)
CONVERT_T
Delay_us(120)
Ow_Reset()
Ow_Write(0xCC)
SKIP_ROM
Ow_Write(0xBE)
READ_SCRATCHPAD
' Initialize LCD
' Clear LCD
' Turn cursor off
' Onewire reset
' Issue command
' Issue command
' Issue command
' Issue command
temp = Ow_Read()
temp = (Ow_Read() &lt;&lt; 8) or temp
' Format and display result on Lcd
Display_Temperature(temp)
Delay_ms(500)
wend
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
233
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
HW Connection
Example of DS1820 connection
234
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
MANCHESTER CODE LIBRARY
The mikroBasic for 8051 provides a library for handling Manchester coded signals.
The Manchester code is a code in which data and clock signals are combined to
form a single self-synchronizing data stream; each encoded bit contains a transition
at the midpoint of a bit period, the direction of transition determines whether the bit
is 0 or 1; the second half is the true bit value and the first half is the complement of
the true bit value (as shown in the figure below).
Notes: The Manchester receive routines are blocking calls (Man_Receive_Init and
Man_Synchro). This means that MCU will wait until the task has been performed
(e.g. byte is received, synchronization achieved, etc).
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using Manchester Code Library:
dim MANRXPIN as sbit
external
dim MANTXPIN as sbit
external
Description:
Receive line.
Transmit line.
Example :
dim MANRXPIN as sbit
at P0.B0
dim MANTXPIN as sbit
at P1.B1
Library Routines
-
Man_Receive_Init
Man_Receive
Man_Send_Init
Man_Send
Man_Synchro
Man_Out
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
235
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
The following routines are for the internal use by compiler only:
- Manchester_0
- Manchester_1
- Manchester_Out
Man_Receive_Init
Prototype
sub function Man_Receive_Init()as word
- 0 - if initialization and synchronization were successful.
- 1 - upon unsuccessful synchronization.
Returns
The function configures Receiver pin and performs synchronization procedure in
order to retrieve baud rate out of the incoming signal.
Description
Note: In case of multiple persistent errors on reception, the user should call this
routine once again or Man_Synchro routine to enable synchronization.
Requires
MANRXPIN variable must be defined before using this function.
Example
' Initialize Receiver
dim MANRXPIN as sbit at P0.B0
...
Man_Receive_Init()
Man_Receive
Prototype
sub function Man_Receive(dim byreferror as byte) as byte
Returns
A byte read from the incoming signal.
The function extracts one byte from incoming signal.
Description
Parameters :
- error: error flag. If signal format does not match the expected, the error flag
will be set to non-zero.
Requires
Example
To use this function, the user must prepare the MCU for receiving. See
Man_Receive_Init.
dim data, error as byte
...
data = 0
error = 0
data = Man_Receive(&amp;error)
if (error &lt;&gt; 0) then
' error handling
end if
236
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Man_Send_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Man_Send_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
Description The function configures Transmitter pin.
Requires
MANTXPIN variable must be defined before using this function.
Example
' Initialize Transmitter:
dim MANTXPIN as sbit at P1.B1
...
Man_Send_Init()
Man_Send
Prototype
sub procedure Man_Send(tr_data as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sends one byte.
Parameters :
Description
- tr_data: data to be sent
Note: Baud rate used is 500 bps.
Requires
To use this function, the user must prepare the MCU for sending. See
Man_Send_Init.
Example
dim msg as byte
...
Man_Send(msg)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
237
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Man_Synchro
Prototype
Returns
sub function Man_Synchro() as word
- 0 - if synchronization was not successful.
- Half of the manchester bit length, given in multiples of 10us - upon
successful synchronization.
Description Measures half of the manchester bit length with 10us resolution.
Requires
To use this function, you must first prepare the MCU for receiving. See
Man_Receive_Init.
Example
dim man__half_bit_len as word
...
man__half_bit_len = Man_Synchro()
Man_Out
Prototype
sub procedure Man_Out(BitValue as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sends one byte in Manchester format.
Description Parameters :
- BitValue: data to be sent
238
Requires
To use this function, the user must prepare the MCU for sending. See
Man_Send_Init.
Example
dim BitValue as byte
...
Man_Out(BitValue)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Library Example
The following code is code for the Manchester receiver, it shows how to use the
Manchester Library for receiving data:
program Manchester_Receiver
' LCD module connections
dim LCD_RS as sbit at P2.0
dim LCD_EN as sbit at P2.1
dim LCD_D7 as sbit at P2.5
dim LCD_D6 as sbit at P2.4
dim LCD_D5 as sbit at P2.3
dim LCD_D4 as sbit at P2.2
' End LCD module connections
' Manchester module connections
dim MANRXPIN as sbit at P0.B0
dim MANTXPIN as sbit at P1.B1
' End Manchester module connections
dim error_, ErrorCount, temp as byte
main:
ErrorCount = 0
Lcd_Init()
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
' Initialize LCD
' Clear LCD display
Man_Receive_Init()
' Initialize Receiver
while TRUE
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_FIRST_ROW)
1st row
while TRUE
byte
temp = Man_Receive(error_)
if (temp = 0x0B) then
Transmitter example
break
ing sequence
end if
if (error_ &lt;&gt; 0) then
loop forever
break
end if
' Inc(P1)
wend
' Endless loop
' Move cursor to the
' Wait for the &quot;start&quot;
' Attempt byte receive
' &quot;Start&quot; byte, see
' We got the start-
' Exit so we do not
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
239
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
while ( temp &lt;&gt; 0x0E )
temp = Man_Receive(error_)
' Attempt byte receive
if (error_ &lt;&gt; 0) then
' If error occured
Lcd_Chr_CP(&quot;?&quot;)
' Write question mark on LCD
Inc(ErrorCount)
' Update error counter
if (ErrorCount &gt; 20) then
' In case of multiple errors
temp = Man_Synchro()
' Try to synchronize again
'Man_Receive_Init()
' Alternative, try to
Initialize Receiver again
ErrorCount = 0
' Reset error counter
end if
else
' No error occured
if (temp &lt;&gt; 0x0E) then
' If &quot;End&quot; byte was
received(see Transmitter example)
Lcd_Chr_CP(temp)
' do not write received byte on LCD
end if
end if
Delay_ms(25)
wend
wend
' If &quot;End&quot; byte was received exit do loop
end.
The following code is code for the Manchester transmitter, it shows how to use the
Manchester Library for transmitting data:
program Manchester_Transmitter
' Manchester module connections
dim MANRXPIN as sbit at P0.B0
dim MANTXPIN as sbit at P1.B1
' End Manchester module connections
dim index, character as byte
s1 as char[17]
main:
s1 = &quot;mikroElektronika&quot;
Man_Send_Init()
while TRUE
Man_Send(0x0B)
Delay_ms(100)
character = s1[0]
index = 0
while (character &lt;&gt; 0)
Man_Send(character)
Delay_ms(90)
Inc(index)
character = s1[index]
wend
Man_Send(0x0E)
Delay_ms(1000)
wend
end.
240
' Initialize transmitter
' Endless loop
' Send &quot;start&quot; byte
' Wait for a while
' Take first char from string
' Initialize index variable
' String ends with zero
' Send character
' Wait for a while
' Increment index variable
' Take next char from string
' Send &quot;end&quot; byte
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Connection Example
Simple Transmitter connection
Simple Receiver connection
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
241
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
PORT EXPANDER LIBRARY
The mikroBasic for 8051 provides a library for communication with the Microchip’s
Port Expander MCP23S17 via SPI interface. Connections of the 8051 compliant
MCU and MCP23S17 is given on the schematic at the bottom of this page.
Note: Library uses the SPI module for communication. The user must initialize SPI
module before using the Port Expander Library.
Note: Library does not use Port Expander interrupts.
External dependencies of Port Expander Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using Port
Expander Library:
dim SPExpanderCS as
sbit external
dim SPExpanderRST as
sbit external
Description:
Chip Select line.
Reset line.
Example :
dim SPExpanderCS as
sbit at P1.B1
dim SPExpanderRST as
sbit at P1.B0
Library Routines
-
242
Expander_Init
Expander_Read_Byte
Expander_Write_Byte
Expander_Read_PortA
Expander_Read_PortB
Expander_Read_PortAB
Expander_Write_PortA
Expander_Write_PortB
Expander_Write_PortAB
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortA
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortAB
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Expander_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Init(dim ModuleAddress as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initializes Port Expander using SPI communication.
Port Expander module settings :
Description -
hardware addressing enabled
automatic address pointer incrementing disabled (byte mode)
BANK_0 register adressing
slew rate enabled
Parameters :
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
SPExpanderCS and SPExpanderRST variables must be defined before using this
function.
Requires
SPI module needs to be initialized. See Spi_Init and Spi_Init_Advanced routines.
Example
' port expander pinout definition
dim SPExpanderCS as sbit at P1.B1
SPExpanderRST as sbit at P1.B0
...
Spi_Init()
' initialize SPI module
Expander_Init(0) ' initialize port expander
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
243
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Expander_Read_Byte
Prototype
sub function Expander_Read_Byte(dim ModuleAddress as byte, dim
RegAddress as byte) as byte
Returns
Byte read.
The function reads byte from Port Expander.
Parameters :
Description
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- RegAddress: Port Expander's internal register address
Requires
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Example
' Read a byte from Port Expander's register
dim read_data as byte
...
read_data = Expander_Read_Byte(0,1)
Expander_Write_Byte
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Write_Byte(dim ModuleAddress as byte, dim
RegAddress as byte, dim Data_ as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Routine writes a byte to Port Expander.
Parameters :
Description
244
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- RegAddress: Port Expander's internal register address
- Data_: data to be written
Requires
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Example
' Write a byte to the Port Expander's register
Expander_Write_Byte(0,1,0xFF)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Expander_Read_PortA
Prototype
sub function Expander_Read_PortA(dim ModuleAddress as byte) as byte
Returns
Byte read.
The function reads byte from Port Expander's PortA.
Description
Parameters :
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Requires
Example
Port Expander's PortA should be configured as input. See Expander_Set_DirectionPortA and Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB routines.
' Read a byte from Port Expander's PORTA
dim read_data as byte
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA(0,0xFF)
to be input
...
read_data = Expander_Read_PortA(0)
' set expander's porta
Expander_Read_PortB
Prototype
sub function Expander_Read_PortB(dim ModuleAddress as byte) as byte
Returns
Byte read.
The function reads byte from Port Expander's PortB.
Description
Parameters :
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Requires
Example
Port Expander's PortB should be configured as input. See Expander_Set_DirectionPortB and Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB routines.
' Read a byte from Port Expander's PORTB
dim read_data as byte
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB(0,0xFF)
to be input
...
read_data = Expander_Read_PortB(0)
' set expander's portb
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
245
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Expander_Read_PortAB
Prototype
sub function Expander_Read_PortAB(dim ModuleAddress as byte) as word
Returns
Word read.
The function reads word from Port Expander's ports. PortA readings are in the
higher byte of the result. PortB readings are in the lower byte of the result.
Description Parameters :
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Requires
Example
246
Port Expander's PortA and PortB should be configured as inputs. See
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA, Expander_Set_DirectionPortB and
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB routines.
' Read a byte from Port Expander's PORTA and PORTB
dim read_data as word
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB(0,0xFFFF)
' set expander's
porta and portb to be input
...
read_data = Expander_Read_PortAB(0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Expander_Write_PortA
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Write_PortA(dim ModuleAddress as byte, dim
Data_ as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
The function writes byte to Port Expander's PortA.
Parameters :
Description
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- Data_: data to be written
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Requires
Port Expander's PortA should be configured as output. See
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA and Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB routines.
' Write a byte to Port Expander's PORTA
Example
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA(0,0x00)
to be output
...
Expander_Write_PortA(0, 0xAA)
' set expander's porta
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
247
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Expander_Write_PortB
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Write_PortB(dim ModuleAddress as byte, dim
Data_ as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
The function writes byte to Port Expander's PortB.
Parameters :
Description
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the bottom of this page
- Data_: data to be written
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Requires
Port Expander's PortB should be configured as output. See
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB and Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB routines.
' Write a byte to Port Expander's PORTB
Example
248
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB(0,0x00)
to be output
...
Expander_Write_PortB(0, 0x55)
' set expander's portb
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Expander_Write_PortAB
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Write_PortAB(dim ModuleAddress as byte,
dim Data_ as word)
Returns
Nothing.
The function writes word to Port Expander's ports.
Parameters :
Description
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- Data_: data to be written. Data to be written to PortA are passed in Data's
higher byte. Data to be written to PortB are passed in Data's lower byte
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Requires
Port Expander's PortA and PortB should be configured as outputs. See
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA, Expander_Set_DirectionPortB and
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB routines.
' Write a byte to Port Expander's PORTA and PORTB
Example
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB(0,0x0000)
porta and portb to be output
...
Expander_Write_PortAB(0, 0xAA55)
' set expander's
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
249
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Set_DirectionPortA(dim ModuleAddress as
byte, dim Data_ as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
The function sets Port Expander's PortA direction.
Parameters :
Description - ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- Data_: data to be written to the PortA direction register. Each bit corresponds
to the appropriate pin of the PortA register. Set bit designates corresponding
pin as input. Cleared bit designates corresponding pin as output.
Requires
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Example
' Set Port Expander's PORTA to be output
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA(0,0x00)
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Set_DirectionPortB(dim ModuleAddress as
byte, dim Data_ as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
The function sets Port Expander's PortB direction.
Parameters :
Description - ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- Data_: data to be written to the PortB direction register. Each bit corresponds
to the appropriate pin of the PortB register. Set bit designates corresponding
pin as input. Cleared bit designates corresponding pin as output.
250
Requires
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Example
' Set Port Expander's PORTB to be input
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB(0,0xFF)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB(dim ModuleAddress as
byte, dim Direction as word)
Returns
Nothing.
The function sets Port Expander's PortA and PortB direction.
Parameters :
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
Description
- Direction: data to be written to direction registers. Data to be written to the
PortA direction register are passed in Direction's higher byte. Data to be written
to the PortB direction register are passed in Direction's lower byte. Each bit
corresponds to the appropriate pin of the PortA/PortB register. Set bit designates corresponding pin as input. Cleared bit designates corresponding pin as
output.
Requires
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Example
' Set Port Expander's PORTA to be output and PORTB to be input
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB(0,0x00FF)
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortA
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Set_PullUpsPortA(dim ModuleAddress as
byte, dim Data_ as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
The function sets Port Expander's PortA pull up/down resistors.
Parameters :
Description - ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- Data_: data for choosing pull up/down resistors configuration. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate pin of the PortA register. Set bit enables pull-up for
corresponding pin.
Requires
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Example
' Set Port Expander's PORTA pull-up resistors
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortA(0, 0xFF)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
251
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB(dim ModuleAddress as
byte, dim Data_ as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
The function sets Port Expander's PortB pull up/down resistors.
Parameters :
Description - ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- Data_: data for choosing pull up/down resistors configuration. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate pin of the PortB register. Set bit enables pull-up for
corresponding pin.
Requires
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Example
' Set Port Expander's PORTB pull-up resistors
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB(0, 0xFF)
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortAB
Prototype
sub procedure Expander_Set_PullUpsPortAB(dim ModuleAddress as
byte, dim PullUps as word)
Returns
Nothing.
The function sets Port Expander's PortA and PortB pull up/down resistors.
Parameters :
Description
252
- ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the
bottom of this page
- PullUps: data for choosing pull up/down resistors configuration. PortA pull
up/down resistors configuration is passed in PullUps's higher byte. PortB pull
up/down resistors configuration is passed in PullUps's lower byte. Each bit
corresponds to the appropriate pin of the PortA/PortB register. Set bit enables
pull-up for corresponding pin.
Requires
Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Example
' Set Port Expander's PORTA and PORTB pull-up resistors
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortAB(0, 0xFFFF)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Library Example
The example demonstrates how to communicate with Port Expander MCP23S17.
Note that Port Expander pins A2 A1 A0 are connected to GND so Port Expander
Hardware Address is 0.
program PortExpander
dim i as byte
' Port Expander module connections
dim SPExpanderRST as sbit at P1.B0
dim SPExpanderCS as sbit at P1.B1
' End Port Expander module connections
main:
i = 0
Spi_Init()
ule
Expander_Init(0)
Expander
' Initialize SPI mod-
' Initialize Port
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA(0, 0x00)
to be output
' Set Expander&quot;s PORTA
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB(0,0xFF)
to be input
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB(0,0xFF)
of the Expander&quot;s PORTB pins
' Set Expander&quot;s PORTB
while TRUE
Expander_Write_PortA(0, i)
PORTA
Inc(i)
P0 = Expander_Read_PortB(0)
and write it to PORT0
Delay_ms(100)
wend
end.
' Set pull-ups to all
' Endless loop
' Write i to expander&quot;s
' Read expander&quot;s PORTB
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
253
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
HW Connection
Port Expander HW connection
254
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
PS/2 LIBRARY
The mikroBasic for 8051 provides a library for communication with the common
PS/2 keyboard.
Note: The library does not utilize interrupts for data retrieval, and requires the oscillator clock to be at least 6MHz.
Note: The pins to which a PS/2 keyboard is attached should be connected to the
pull-up resistors.
Note: Although PS/2 is a two-way communication bus, this library does not provide
MCU-to-keyboard communication; e.g. pressing the Caps Lock key will not turn on
the Caps Lock LED.
External dependencies of PS/2 Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using PS/2
Library:
Description:
dim PS2_DATA as sbit
PS/2 Data line.
external
dim PS2_CLOCK as sbit
PS/2 Clock line.
external
Example :
dim PS2_DATA as sbit
at P0.B0
dim PS2_CLOCK as sbit
at P0.B1
Library Routines
- Ps2_Config
- Ps2_Key_Read
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
255
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Ps2_Config
Prototype
sub procedure Ps2_Config()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Initializes the MCU for work with the PS/2 keyboard.
Global variables :
Requires
- PS2_DATA: Data signal pin
- PS2_CLOCK: Clock signal pin
must be defined before using this function.
Example
256
' PS2 pinout definition
dim PS2_DATA as sbit at P0.B0
PS2_CLOCK as sbit at P0.B1
...
Ps2_Config()
' Init PS/2 Keyboard
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Ps2_Key_Read
Prototype
Returns
sub function Ps2_Key_Read(dim byref value as byte, dim byref special as byte, dim byref pressed as byte) as byte
- 1 if reading of a key from the keyboard was successful
- 0 if no key was pressed
The function retrieves information on key pressed.
Parameters :
Description
- value: holds the value of the key pressed. For characters, numerals, punctuation marks, and space value will store the appropriate ASCII code. Routine
“recognizes” the function of Shift and Caps Lock, and behaves appropriately.
For special function keys see Special Function Keys Table.
- special: is a flag for special function keys (F1, Enter, Esc, etc). If key pressed
is one of these, special will be set to 1, otherwise 0.
- pressed: is set to 1 if the key is pressed, and 0 if it is released.
Requires
PS/2 keyboard needs to be initialized. See Ps2_Config routine.
Example
dim value, special, pressed as byte
...
do {
if (Ps2_Key_Read(value, special, pressed)) then
if ((value = 13) and (special = 1)) then
break
end if
end if
loop until (0=1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
257
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Special Function Keys
Key
258
Value returned
Scroll Lock
28
F1
1
Num Lock
29
F2
2
Left Arrow
30
F3
3
Right Arrow
31
F4
4
Up Arrow
32
F5
5
Down Arrow
33
F6
6
Escape
34
F7
7
Tab
35
F8
8
F9
9
F10
10
F11
11
F12
12
Enter
13
Page Up
14
Page Down
15
Backspace
16
Insert
17
Delete
18
Windows
19
Ctrl
20
Shift
21
Alt
22
Print Screen
23
Pause
24
Caps Lock
25
End
26
Home
27
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Library Example
This simple example reads values of the pressed keys on the PS/2 keyboard and
sends them via UART.
program PS2
dim keydata, special, down as byte
' PS2 module connections
dim PS2_DATA as sbit at P0.B0
PS2_CLOCK as sbit at P0.B1
' End PS2 module connections
main:
Uart_Init(4800)
Ps2_Config()
Delay_ms(100)
keydata = 0 special = 0 down
'
'
'
=
Initialize UART module at 4800 bps
Initialize PS/2 Keyboard
Wait for keyboard to finish
0
while true
if (Ps2_Key_Read(keydata, special, down)) &lt;&gt; 0 then
was read from PS/2
if ((down = 1) and (keydata = 16)) &lt;&gt; 0 then
Backspace read
Uart_Write(0x08)
Backspace to usart terminal
else if ((down = 1) and (keydata = 13)) &lt;&gt; 0 then
' If data
'
' Send
' Enter
read
Uart_Write(10)
Uart_Write(13)
also expects line feed
' Send carriage return to usart terminal
' Uncomment this line if usart terminal
'
for new line transition
else if ((down = 1) and (special = 0) and (keydata &lt;&gt; 0))
then
' Common key read
Uart_Write(keydata)
'
Send key to usart terminal
end if
end if
end if
end if
Delay_ms(10)
' Debounce period
wend
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
259
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
HW Connection
Example of PS2 keyboard connection
260
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
RS-485 LIBRARY
RS-485 is a multipoint communication which allows multiple devices to be connected to a single bus. The mikroBasic for 8051 provides a set of library routines for
comfortable work with RS485 system using Master/Slave architecture. Master and
Slave devices interchange packets of information. Each of these packets contains
synchronization bytes, CRC byte, address byte and the data. Each Slave has
unique address and receives only packets addressed to it. The Slave can never initiate communication.
It is the user’s responsibility to ensure that only one device transmits via 485 bus at
a time.
The RS-485 routines require the UART module. Pins of UART need to be attached
to RS-485 interface transceiver, such as LTC485 or similar (see schematic at the
bottom of this page).
Library constants:
- START byte value = 150
- STOP byte value = 169
- Address 50 is the broadcast address for all Slaves (packets containing
address 50 will be received by all Slaves except the Slaves with addresses
150 and 169).
External dependencies of RS-485 Library
The following variable
must be defined in all
projects using RS-485
Library:
Description:
Control RS-485
dim rs485_transceive as
Transmit/Receive
sbit external
operation mode
Example :
dim
rs485_transceive
as sbit at P3.B2
Library Routines
-
RS485master_Init
RS485master_Receive
RS485master_Send
RS485slave_Init
RS485slave_Receive
RS485slave_Send
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
261
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
RS485master_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Rs485master_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Initializes MCU as a Master for RS-485 communication.
rs485_transceive variable must be defined before using this function. This pin
Requires
is connected to RE/DE input of RS-485 transceiver(see schematic at the bottom
of this page). RE/DE signal controls RS-485 transceiver operation mode. Valid
values: 1 (for transmitting) and 0 (for receiving)
UART HW module needs to be initialized. See Uart_Init.
Example
' rs485 module pinout
dim rs485_transceive as sbit at P3.B2 ' transmit/receive control
set to port3.bit2
...
Uart_Init(9600)
' initialize usart module
Rs485master_Init()
' intialize mcu as a Master
for RS-485 communication
RS485master_Receive
Prototype
sub procedure Rs485master_Receive(dim byref data_buffer as
array[20] of byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Receives messages from Slaves. Messages are multi-byte, so this routine must
be called for each byte received.
Parameters :
Description
-
data_buffer: 7 byte buffer for storing received data, in the following manner:
data[0..2]: message content
data[3]: number of message bytes received, 1–3
data[4]: is set to 255 when message is received
data[5]: is set to 255 if error has occurred
data[6]: address of the Slave which sent the message
The function automatically adjusts data[4] and data[5] upon every received
message. These flags need to be cleared by software.
262
Requires
MCU must be initialized as a Master for RS-485 communication. See
RS485master_Init.
Example
dim msg as array[20] of byte
...
RS485master_Receive(msg)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
RS485master_Send
Prototype
sub procedure Rs485master_Send(dim byref data_buffer as array[20]
of byte, dim datalen as byte, dim slave_address as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sends message to Slave(s). Message format can be found at the bottom of this
page.
Description
Parameters :
- data_buffer: data to be sent
- datalen: number of bytes for transmition. Valid values: 0...3.
- slave_address: Slave(s) address
MCU must be initialized as a Master for RS-485 communication. See
RS485master_Init.
Requires
It is the user’s responsibility to ensure (by protocol) that only one device sends
data via 485 bus at a time.
Example
dim msg as array[20] of byte
...
' send 3 bytes of data to slave with address 0x12
RS485master_Send(msg, 3, 0x12)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
263
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
RS485slave_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Rs485slave_Init(dim slave_address as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initializes MCU as a Slave for RS-485 communication.
Description Parameters :
- slave_address: Slave address
rs485_transceive variable must be defined before using this function. This pin
Requires
is connected to RE/DE input of RS-485 transceiver(see schematic at the bottom
of this page). RE/DE signal controls RS-485 transceiver operation mode. Valid
values: 1 (for transmitting) and 0 (for receiving)
UART HW module needs to be initialized. See Uart_Init.
Example
264
' rs485 module pinout
dim rs485_transceive as sbit at P3.B2
' transmit/receive
control set to port3.bit2
...
Uart_Init(9600)
' initialize usart module
Rs485slave_Init(160)
' intialize mcu as a Slave
for RS-485 communication with address 160
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
RS485slave_Receive
Prototype
sub procedure RS485slave_Receive(dim byref data_buffer as
array[20] of byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Receives messages from Master. If Slave address and Message address field
don't match then the message will be discarded. Messages are multi-byte, so
this routine must be called for each byte received.
Parameters :
Description
-
data_buffer: 6 byte buffer for storing received data, in the following manner:
data[0..2]: message content
data[3]: number of message bytes received, 1–3
data[4]: is set to 255 when message is received
data[5]: is set to 255 if error has occurred
The function automatically adjusts data[4] and data[5] upon every received
message. These flags need to be cleared by software.
Requires
MCU must be initialized as a Slave for RS-485 communication. See
RS485slave_Init.
Example
dim msg as array[5] of byte
...
RS485slave_Read(msg)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
265
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
RS485slave_Send
Prototype
sub procedure Rs485slave_Send(dim byref data_buffer as array[20]
of byte, dim datalen as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sends message to Master. Message format can be found at the bottom of this
page.
Description Parameters :
- data_buffer: data to be sent
- datalen: number of bytes for transmition. Valid values: 0...3.
Requires
MCU must be initialized as a Slave for RS-485 communication. See
RS485slave_Init. It is the user’s responsibility to ensure (by protocol) that only
one device sends data via 485 bus at a time.
Example
dim msg as array[8] of byte
...
' send 2 bytes of data to the master
RS485slave_Send(msg, 2)
Library Example
This is a simple demonstration of RS485 Library routines usage.
Master sends message to Slave with address 160 and waits for a response. The Slave accepts
data, increments it and sends it back to the Master. Master then does the same and sends incremented data back to Slave, etc.
Master displays received data on P0, while error on receive (0xAA) and number of consecutive
unsuccessful retries are displayed on P1. Slave displays received data on P0, while error on
receive (0xAA) is displayed on P1. Hardware configurations in this example are made for the
Easy8051B board and AT89S8253.
RS485 Master code:
program RS485_Master
dim dat as byte[20]
counter, j as byte
count as longint
' RS485 module connections
dim rs485_transceive as sbit at P3.B2
' End RS485 module connections
266
' Buffer for receving/sending messages
' Transmit/Receive control set to P3.2
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
' Interrupt routine
sub procedure UartRxHandler() ORG 0x23
EA = 0
' Clear global interrupt enable flag
if ( RI &lt;&gt; 0 ) then
' Test UART receive interrupt flag
Rs485master_Receive(dat)
' UART receive interrupt detected,
'
receive data using RS485 communication
RI = 0
' Clear UART interrupt flag
end if
EA = 1
' Set global interrupt enable flag
end sub
main:
count = 0
P0 = 0
P1 = 0
Uart_Init(9600)
Delay_ms(100)
' Clear ports
' Initialize UART module at 9600 bps
Rs485master_Init()
' Intialize MCU as RS485 master
dat[0] = 0x55
' Fill buffer
dat[1] = 0x00
dat[2] = 0x00
dat[4] = 0
' Ensure that message received flag is 0
dat[5] = 0
' Ensure that error flag
is 0
dat[6] = 0
Rs485master_Send(dat,1,160)
' Send message to slave with
address 160
'
message data is stored
in dat
'
message is 1 byte long
ES = 1
RI = 0
flag
EA = 1
while TRUE
' Enable UART interrupt
' Clear UART RX interrupt
' Enable interrupts
' Endless loop
' Upon completed valid
message receiving
Inc(count)
'
data[4] is set to 255
' Increment loop pass count-
er
if (dat[5] &lt;&gt; 0) then
nal it by
P1 = 0xAA
end if
' If error detected, sig'
setting PORT1 to 0xAA
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
267
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
if (dat[4] &lt;&gt; 0) then
' If message received successfully
count = 0
' Reset loop pass counter
dat[4] = 0
' Clear message received flag
j = dat[3]
' Read number of message received bytes
for counter = 1 to j
P0 = dat[counter-1]
' Show received data on PORT0
next counter
Inc(dat[0])
' Increment first received byte dat[0]
Delay_ms(10)
Rs485master_Send(dat,1,160)
end if
if ( count &gt; 10000 ) then
times with
' And send it back to Slave
' If loop is passed 100000
'
no message received
Inc(P1)
' Signal receive message failure on PORT1
count = 0
' Reset loop pass counter
Rs485master_Send(dat,1,160)
' Retry send message
if (P1 &gt; 10) then
' If sending failed 10 times
P1 = 0
' Clear PORT1
Rs485master_Send(dat,1,50)
' Send message on broadcast
address
end if
end if
wend
end.
RS485 Slave code:
program RS485_Slave
dim dat as byte[20]
ing messages
counter, j as byte
' RS485 module connections
dim rs485_transceive as sbit at P3.B2
set to P3.2
' End RS485 module connections
' Buffer for receving/send-
' Transmit/Receive control
' Interrupt routine
sub procedure UartRxHandler() ORG 0x23
EA = 0
' Clear global interrupt enable flag
if( RI &lt;&gt; 0) then
' Test UART receive interrupt flag
Rs485slave_Receive(dat)
' UART receive interrupt detected,
268
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
RI = 0
end if
EA = 1
end sub
'
receive data using RS485 communication
' Clear UART interrupt flag
' Set global interrupt enable flag
main:
P0 = 0
P1 = 0
Uart_Init(9600)
Delay_ms(100)
Rs485slave_Init(160)
dat[4] = 0
dat[5] = 0
' Clear ports
' Initialize UART module at 9600 bps
' Intialize MCU as slave, address 160
' ensure that message received flag is 0
' ensure that error flag is 0
ES = 1
RI = 0
EA = 1
while TRUE
' Enable UART interrupt
' Clear UART RX interrupt flag
' Enable interrupts
' Endless loop
' Upon completed valid
message receiving
if (dat[5] &lt;&gt; 0) then
nal it by
P1 = 0xAA
end if
if (dat[4] &lt;&gt; 0) then
cessfully
dat[4] = 0
'
data[4] is set to 255
' If error detected, sig'
setting PORT1 to 0xAA
' If message received suc-
' Clear message received
flag
j = dat[3]
received bytes
for counter = 1 to j
P0 = dat[counter-1]
PORT0
next counter
dat[0] = dat[0] + 1
Delay_ms(10)
Rs485slave_Send(dat,1)
end if
wend
end.
' Read number of message
' Show received data on
' Increment received dat[0]
' And send back to Master
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
269
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
HW Connection
Example of interfacing PC to 8051 MCU via RS485 bus with LTC485 as RS-485
transceiver
270
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Message format and CRC calculations
Q: How is CRC checksum calculated on RS485 master side?
START_BYTE = 0x96; ' 10010110
STOP_BYTE = 0xA9; ' 10101001
PACKAGE:
-------START_BYTE 0x96
ADDRESS
DATALEN
[DATA1]
[DATA2]
[DATA3]
CRC
STOP_BYTE 0xA9
' if exists
' if exists
' if exists
DATALEN bits
-----------bit7 = 1 MASTER SENDS
0 SLAVE SENDS
bit6 = 1 ADDRESS WAS XORed with 1, IT WAS EQUAL
STOP_BYTE
0 ADDRESS UNCHANGED
bit5 = 0 FIXED
bit4 = 1
DATA3 (if exists) WAS XORed with 1,
START_BYTE or STOP_BYTE
0 DATA3 (if exists) UNCHANGED
bit3 = 1
DATA2 (if exists) WAS XORed with 1,
START_BYTE or STOP_BYTE
0 DATA2 (if exists) UNCHANGED
bit2 = 1
DATA1 (if exists) WAS XORed with 1,
START_BYTE or STOP_BYTE
0 DATA1 (if exists) UNCHANGED
bit1bit0 = 0 to 3 NUMBER OF DATA BYTES SEND
TO START_BYTE or
IT WAS EQUAL TO
IT WAS EQUAL TO
IT WAS EQUAL TO
CRC generation :
---------------crc_send = datalen ^ address;
crc_send ^= data[0];
' if exists
crc_send ^= data[1];
' if exists
crc_send ^= data[2];
' if exists
crc_send = ~crc_send;
if ((crc_send == START_BYTE) || (crc_send == STOP_BYTE))
crc_send++;
NOTE:
DATALEN&lt;4..0&gt;
can
STOP_BYTE&lt;4..0&gt; values.
not
take
the
START_BYTE&lt;4..0&gt;
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
or
271
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
SOFTWARE I&sup2;C LIBRARY
The mikroBasic for 8051 provides routines for implementing Software I˛C communication. These routines are hardware independent and can be used with any MCU.
The Software I˛C library enables you to use MCU as Master in I˛C communication.
Multi-master mode is not supported.
Note: This library implements time-based activities, so interrupts need to be disabled when using Software I˛C.
Note: All I˛C Library functions are blocking-call functions (they are waiting for I˛C
clock line to become logical one).
Note: The pins used for I˛C communication should be connected to the pull-up
resistors. Turning off the LEDs connected to these pins may also be required.
External dependecies of Soft_I2C Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using Soft_I2C
Library:
dim Soft_I2C_Scl as
sbit external
dim Soft_I2C_Sda as
sbit external
Description:
Soft I˛C Clock line.
Soft I˛C Data line.
Example :
dim Soft_I2C_Scl as
sbit at P1.B3
dim Soft_I2C_Sda as
sbit at P1.B4
Library Routines
-
272
Soft_I2C_Init
Soft_I2C_Start
Soft_I2C_Read
Soft_I2C_Write
Soft_I2C_Stop
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Soft_I2C_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Soft_I2C_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Configures the software I˛C module.
Requires
Example
Soft_I2C_Scl and Soft_I2C_Sda variables must be defined before using this
function.
' soft_i2c pinout definition
dim Soft_I2C_Scl as sbit at P1.B3
Soft_I2C_Sda as sbit at P1.B4
...
Soft_I2C_Init()
Soft_I2C_Start
Prototype
sub procedure Soft_I2C_Start()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Determines if the I˛C bus is free and issues START signal.
Requires
Software I˛C must be configured before using this function. See Soft_I2C_Init routine.
Example
' Issue START signal
Soft_I2C_Start()
Soft_I2C_Read
Prototype
sub function Soft_I2C_Read(dim ack as word) as byte
Returns
One byte from the Slave.
Reads one byte from the slave.
Description
Parameters :
- ack: acknowledge signal parameter. If the ack==0 not acknowledge signal will
be sent after reading, otherwise the acknowledge signal will be sent.
Soft I˛C must be configured before using this function. See Soft_I2C_Init routine.
Requires
Example
Also, START signal needs to be issued in order to use this function. See
Soft_I2C_Start routine.
dim take as word
...
' Read data and send the not_acknowledge signal
take = Soft_I2C_Read(0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
273
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Soft_I2C_Write
Prototype
sub function Soft_I2C_Write(dim _Data as byte) as byte
- 0 if there were no errors.
- 1 if write collision was detected on the I˛C bus.
Returns
Sends data byte via the I˛C bus.
Description Parameters :
- _Data: data to be sent
Soft I˛C must be configured before using this function. See Soft_I2C_Init routine.
Requires
Example
Also, START signal needs to be issued in order to use this function. See
Soft_I2C_Start routine.
dim _data, error as byte
...
error = Soft_I2C_Write(data)
error = Soft_I2C_Write(0xA3)
Soft_I2C_Stop
Prototype
sub procedure Soft_I2C_Stop()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Issues STOP signal.
274
Requires
Soft I˛C must be configured before using this function. See Soft_I2C_Init routine
Example
' Issue STOP signal
Soft_I2C_Stop()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Library Example
The example demonstrates Software I˛C Library routines usage. The 8051 MCU is
connected (SCL, SDA pins) to PCF8583 RTC (real-time clock). Program reads date
and time are read from the RTC and prints it on LCD.
program Soft_I2C
dim seconds, minutes, hours, day, month_, year as byte
date/time variables
' Global
' Software I2C connections
dim Soft_I2C_Scl as sbit at P1.B3
dim Soft_I2C_Sda as sbit at P1.B4
' End Software I2C connections
' LCD module connections
dim LCD_RS as sbit at P2.0
dim LCD_EN as sbit at P2.1
dim LCD_D7 as sbit at P2.5
dim LCD_D6 as sbit at P2.4
dim LCD_D5 as sbit at P2.3
dim LCD_D4 as sbit at P2.2
' End LCD module connections
'--------------------- Reads
(PCF8583)
sub procedure Read_Time()
time
Soft_I2C_Start()
Soft_I2C_Write(0xA0)
datasheet
Soft_I2C_Write(2)
Soft_I2C_Start()
Soft_I2C_Write(0xA1)
R/W=1
seconds = Soft_I2C_Read(1)
minutes = Soft_I2C_Read(1)
hours = Soft_I2C_Read(1)
day = Soft_I2C_Read(1)
month_ = Soft_I2C_Read(0)
Soft_I2C_Stop()
end sub
and
date
information
from
RTC
' Issue start signal
' Address PCF8583, see PCF8583
' Start from address 2
' Issue repeated start signal
' Address PCF8583 for reading
' Read seconds byte
' Read minutes byte
' Read hours byte
' Read year/day byte
' Read weekday/month byte
' Issue stop signal
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
275
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
'-------------------- Formats date and time
sub procedure Transform_Time()
seconds = ((seconds and 0xF0) &gt;&gt; 4)*10 + (seconds and 0x0F)
Transform seconds
minutes = ((minutes and 0xF0) &gt;&gt; 4)*10 + (minutes and 0x0F)
Transform months
hours
= ((hours and 0xF0) &gt;&gt; 4)*10 + (hours and 0x0F)
Transform hours
year
=
(day and 0xC0) &gt;&gt; 6
Transform year
day
= ((day and 0x30) &gt;&gt; 4)*10
+ (day and 0x0F)
Transform day
month_
= ((month_ and 0x10) &gt;&gt; 4)*10 + (month_ and 0x0F)
Transform month
end sub
'
'
'
'
'
'
'-------------------- Output values to LCD
sub procedure Display_Time()
Lcd_Chr(1, 6, (day / 10)
+ 48)
' Print tens digit of day
variable
Lcd_Chr(1, 7, (day mod 10)
+ 48) ' Print oness digit of day
variable
Lcd_Chr(1, 9, (month_ / 10) + 48)
Lcd_Chr(1,10, (month_ mod 10) + 48)
Lcd_Chr(1,15, year
+ 56)
' Print year vaiable + 8
(start from year 2008)
Lcd_Chr(2, 6,
Lcd_Chr(2, 7,
Lcd_Chr(2, 9,
Lcd_Chr(2,10,
Lcd_Chr(2,12,
Lcd_Chr(2,13,
end sub
(hours / 10)
+ 48)
(hours mod 10)
+ 48)
(minutes / 10) + 48)
(minutes mod 10) + 48)
(seconds / 10) + 48)
(seconds mod 10) + 48)
'------------------ Performs project-wide init
sub procedure Init_Main()
Soft_I2C_Init()
Lcd_Init()
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CURSOR_OFF)
276
' Initialize Soft I2C communication
' Initialize LCD
' Clear LCD display
' Turn cursor off
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
LCD_Out(1,1,&quot;Date:&quot;)
LCD_Chr(1,8,&quot;:&quot;)
LCD_Chr(1,11,&quot;:&quot;)
LCD_Out(2,1,&quot;Time:&quot;)
LCD_Chr(2,8,&quot;:&quot;)
LCD_Chr(2,11,&quot;:&quot;)
LCD_Out(1,12,&quot;200&quot;)
end sub
Libraries
' Prepare and output static text on LCD
'----------------- Main sub procedure
main:
Init_Main()
' Perform initialization
while TRUE
Read_Time()
Transform_Time()
Display_Time()
wend
end.
' Endless loop
' Read time from RTC(PCF8583)
' Format date and time
' Prepare and display on LCD
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
277
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
SOFTWARE SPI LIBRARY
The mikroBasic for 8051 provides routines for implementing Software SPI communication. These routines are hardware independent and can be used with any MCU.
The Software SPI Library provides easy communication with other devices via SPI:
A/D converters, D/A converters, MAX7219, LTC1290, etc.
Library configuration:
-
SPI to Master mode
Clock value = 20 kHz.
Data sampled at the middle of interval.
Clock idle state low.
Data sampled at the middle of interval.
Data transmitted at low to high edge.
Note: The Software SPI library implements time-based activities, so interrupts need
to be disabled when using it.
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using Software
SPI Library:
dim SoftSpi_SDI as
sbit external
dim SoftSpi_SDO as
sbit external
dim SoftSpi_CLK as
sbit external
Description:
Data In line.
Data Out line.
Clock line.
Example :
dim SoftSpi_SDI as
sbit at P0.B4
dim SoftSpi_SDO as
sbit at P0.B5
dim SoftSpi_CLK as
sbit at P0.B3
Library Routines
- Soft_Spi_Init
- Soft_Spi_Read
- Soft_Spi_Write
278
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Soft_Spi_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Soft_SPI_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Configures and initializes the software SPI module.
Requires
SoftSpi_CLK, SoftSpi_SDI and SoftSpi_SDO variables must be defined before
using this function.
Example
' soft_spi pinout definition
dim SoftSpi_SDI as sbit at P0.B4
SoftSpi_SDO as sbit at P0.B5
SoftSpi_CLK as sbit at P0.B3
...
Soft_SPI_Init() ' Init Soft_SPI
Soft_Spi_Read
Prototype
sub function Soft_Spi_Read(dim sdata as byte) as byte
Returns
Byte received via the SPI bus.
This routine performs 3 operations simultaneously. It provides clock for the Software SPI bus, reads a byte and sends a byte.
Description
Parameters :
- sdata: data to be sent.
Requires
Soft SPI must be initialized before using this function. See Soft_Spi_Init routine.
Example
dim data_read as byte
data_send as byte
...
' Read a byte and assign it to data_read variable
' (data_send byte will be sent via SPI during the Read operation)
data_read = Soft_Spi_Read(data_send)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
279
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Soft_Spi_Write
Prototype
sub procedure Soft_Spi_Write(dim sdata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This routine sends one byte via the Software SPI bus.
Description Parameters :
- sdata: data to be sent.
Requires
Soft SPI must be initialized before using this function. See Soft_Spi_Init routine.
Example
' Write a byte to the Soft SPI bus
Soft_Spi_Write(0xAA)
Library Example
This code demonstrates using library routines for Soft_SPI communication. Also, this example
demonstrates working with Microchip's MCP4921 12-bit D/A converter.
program Soft_SPI
' DAC module connections
dim Chip_Select as sbit at P3.B4
SoftSpi_CLK as sbit at P1.B7
SoftSpi_SDI as sbit at P1.B6
SoftSpi_SDO as sbit at P1.B5
' End DAC module connections
dim value as word
sub procedure InitMain()
P0 = 255
Soft_SPI_Init()
end sub
' Set PORT0 as input
' Initialize Soft_SPI
' DAC increments (0..4095) --&gt; output voltage (0..Vref)
sub procedure DAC_Output(dim valueDAC as word)
dim temp as byte
Chip_Select = 0
' Send High Byte
temp = word(valueDAC &gt;&gt; 8)
temp = (temp and 0x0F) or 0x30
datasheet
Soft_SPI_Write(temp)
280
' Select DAC chip
' Store valueDAC[11..8] to temp[3..0]
' Define DAC setting, see MCP4921
' Send high byte via Soft SPI
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
' Send Low Byte
temp = valueDAC
Soft_SPI_Write(temp)
Chip_Select = 1
end sub
main:
InitMain()
Libraries
' Store valueDAC[7..0] to temp[7..0]
' Send low byte via Soft SPI
' Deselect DAC chip
' Perform main initialization
value = 2048
' When program starts, DAC gives
'
the output in the mid-range
while TRUE
' Endless loop
if ((P0_0 = 0) and (value &lt; 4095)) then
' If P0.0 is connected to GND
Inc(value)
'
increment value
else
if (( P0_1 = 0 ) and (value &gt; 0)) then ' If P0.1 is connected to GND
Dec(value)
'
decrement value
end if
end if
DAC_Output(value)
Delay_ms(10)
wend
end.
' Perform output
' Slow down key repeat pace
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
281
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
SOFTWARE UART LIBRARY
The mikroBasic for 8051 provides routines for implementing Software UART communication. These routines are hardware independent and can be used with any
MCU. The Software UART Library provides easy communication with other devices
via the RS232 protocol.
Note: The Software UART library implements time-based activities, so interrupts
need to be disabled when using it.
External dependencies of Software UART Library
The following variable
must be defined in all
projects using RS-485
Library:
dim Soft_Uart_RX as
sbit external
dim Soft_Uart_TX as
sbit external
Description:
Receive line.
Transmit line.
Example :
dim Soft_Uart_RX as
sbit at P3.B0
dim Soft_Uart_TX as
sbit at P3.B1
Library Routines
- Soft_Uart_Init
- Soft_Uart_Read
- Soft_Uart_Write
282
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Soft_Uart_Init
Prototype
sub function Soft_Uart_Init(dim baud_rate as longword, dim
inverted as byte) as word
Returns
Nothing.
Configures and initializes the software UART module.
Parameters :
Description
- baud_rate: baud rate to be set. Maximum baud rate depends on the MCU’s
clock and working conditions.
- inverted: inverted output flag. When set to a non-zero value, inverted logic on
output is used.
Global variables:
Requires
- Soft_Uart_RX receiver pin
- Soft_Uart_TX transmiter pin
must be defined before using this function.
Example
' Initialize Software UART communication on pins Rx, Tx, at 9600
bps
Soft_Uart_Init(9600, 0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
283
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Soft_Uart_Read
Prototype
sub function Soft_Uart_Read(dim byref error as byte) as byte
Returns
Byte received via UART.
The function receives a byte via software UART. This is a blocking function call
(waits for start bit).
Description
Parameters :
- error: Error flag. Error code is returned through this variable. Upon successful transfer this flag will be set to zero. An non zero value indicates communication error.
Requires
Example
Software UART must be initialized before using this function. See the
Soft_Uart_Init routine.
dim data as byte
error as byte
...
' wait until data is received
do
data = Soft_Uart_Read(error)
loop until (error = 0)
' Now we can work with data:
if (data) then
...
end if
284
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Soft_Uart_Write
Prototype
sub procedure Soft_Uart_Write(dim udata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This routine sends one byte via the Software UART bus.
Description Parameters :
- udata: data to be sent.
Software UART must be initialized before using this function. See the
Soft_Uart_Init routine.
Requires
Example
Be aware that during transmission, software UART is incapable of receiving
data – data transfer protocol must be set in such a way to prevent loss of information.
dim some_byte as byte
...
' Write a byte via Soft Uart
some_byte = 0x0A
Soft_Uart_Write(some_byte)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
285
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Library Example
This example demonstrates simple data exchange via software UART. If MCU is
connected to the PC, you can test the example from the mikroBasic for 8051
USART Terminal Tool.
program Soft_UART
' Soft UART connections
dim Soft_Uart_RX as sbit at P3.B0
dim Soft_Uart_TX as sbit at P3.B1
' End Soft UART connections
dim i, error_, byte_read as byte
main:
Soft_Uart_Init(4800, 0)
at 4800 bps
for i = &quot;A&quot; to &quot;z&quot; step -1
downto &quot;z&quot;
Soft_Uart_Write(i)
Delay_ms(100)
next i
while TRUE
byte_read = Soft_Uart_Read ( error_ )
error flag
if (error_ &lt;&gt; 0) then
ed
P0 = 0xAA
PORT0
else
Soft_Uart_Write(byte_read)
detected, return byte read
end if
wend
end.
286
' Auxiliary variables
' Initialize Soft UART
' Send bytes from &quot;A&quot;
' Endless loop
' Read byte, then test
' If error was detect'
signal it on
' If error was not
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
SOUND LIBRARY
The mikroBasic for 8051 provides a Sound Library to supply users with routines necessary for
sound signalization in their applications. Sound generation needs additional hardware, such as
piezo-speaker (example of piezo-speaker interface is given on the schematic at the bottom of this
page).
External dependencies of Sound Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using Sound
Library:
Description:
dim Sound_Play_Pin as
Sound output pin.
sbit external
Example :
dim Sound_Play_Pin as
sbit at P0.B3
Library Routines
- Sound_Init
- Sound_Play
Sound_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Sound_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Configures the appropriate MCU pin for sound generation.
Requires
Sound_Play_Pin variable must be defined before using this function.
Example
' Initialize the pin P0.3 for playing sound
dim Sound_Play_Pin as sbit at P0.B3
...
Sound_Init()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
287
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Sound_Play
Prototype
sub procedure Sound_Play(dim byref freq_in_Hz as word, dim byref
duration_ms as word)
Returns
Nothing.
Generates the square wave signal on the appropriate pin.
Description
Parameters :
- freq_in_Hz: signal frequency in Hertz (Hz)
- duration_ms: signal duration in miliseconds (ms)
Requires
In order to hear the sound, you need a piezo speaker (or other hardware) on
designated port. Also, you must call Sound_Init to prepare hardware for output
before using this function.
Example
' Play sound of 1KHz in duration of 100ms
Sound_Play(1000, 100)
Library Example
The example is a simple demonstration of how to use the Sound Library for playing tones on a
piezo speaker.
program Sound
' Sound connections
dim Sound_Play_Pin as sbit at P0.B3
' End Sound connections
sub procedure Tone1()
Sound_Play(500, 200)
200ms
end sub
sub procedure Tone2()
Sound_Play(555, 200)
200ms
end sub
sub procedure Tone3()
Sound_Play(625, 200)
200ms
end sub
288
' Frequency = 500Hz, Duration =
' Frequency = 555Hz, Duration =
' Frequency = 625Hz, Duration =
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
sub procedure Melody()
&quot;Yellow house&quot;
Tone1() Tone2() Tone3()
Tone1() Tone2() Tone3()
Tone1() Tone2() Tone3()
Tone1() Tone2() Tone3()
Tone1() Tone2() Tone3()
Tone3() Tone3() Tone2()
end sub
sub procedure ToneA()
sub function
Sound_Play(1250, 20)
end sub
Libraries
' Plays the melody
Tone3()
Tone3()
Tone3()
Tone2() Tone1()
' Tones used in Melody2
sub procedure ToneC()
Sound_Play(1450, 20)
end sub
sub procedure ToneE()
Sound_Play(1650, 80)
end sub
sub procedure Melody2()
dim i as byte
i = 1
while (i &lt; 9)
ToneA()
ToneC()
ToneE()
Inc(i)
wend
end sub
main:
P1 = 255
Sound_Init()
Sound_Play(2000, 1000)
ond
while TRUE
if (P1_7 = 0) then
Tone1()
while ( P1_7 = 0)
nop
wend
end if
' Plays Melody2
' Configure PORT1 as input
' Initialize sound pin
' Play starting sound, 2kHz, 1 sec' endless loop
' If P1.7 is pressed play Tone1
' Wait for button to be released
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
289
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
if ( P1_6 = 0) then
Tone2()
while ( P1_6 = 0)
nop
wend
end if
if ( P1_5 = 0) then
Tone3()
while ( P1_5 = 0)
nop
wend
end if
if ( P1_4 = 0 ) then
Melody2()
while ( P1_4 = 0 )
nop
wend
end if
if ( P1_3 = 0) then
Melody()
while ( P1_3 = 0 )
nop
wend
end if
wend
end.
' If P1.6 is pressed play Tone2
' Wait for button to be released
' If P1.5 is pressed play Tone3
' Wait for button to be released
' If P1.4 is pressed play Melody2
' Wait for button to be released
' If P1.3 is pressed play Melody
' Wait for button to be released
HW Connection
Example of Sound Library
sonnection
290
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
SPI LIBRARY
mikroBasic for 8051 provides a library for comfortable with SPI work in Master mode. The 8051
MCU can easily communicate with other devices via SPI: A/D converters, D/A converters,
MAX7219, LTC1290, etc.
Library Routines
-
Spi_Init
Spi_Init_Advanced
Spi_Read
Spi_Write
Spi_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Init()
Returns
Nothing.
This routine configures and enables SPI module with the following settings:
Description
-
master mode
clock idle low
8 bit data transfer
most significant bit sent first
serial output data changes on idle to active transition of clock state
serial clock = fosc/128 (fosc/64 in x2 mode)
Requires
MCU must have SPI module.
Example
' Initialize the SPI module with default settings
Spi_Init()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
291
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Init_Advanced
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Init_Advanced(dim adv_setting as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This routine configures and enables the SPI module with the user defined settings.
Parameters :
- adv_setting: SPI module configuration flags. Predefined library constants
(see the table below) can be ORed to form appropriate configuration value.
Bit
Mask
Description
Predefined library
const
Master/slave [4] and clock rate select [1:0] bits
4, 1,
0
Description
0x10
Sck = Fosc/4 (Fosc/2 in x2
mode), Master mode
MASTER_OSC_DIV4
0x11
Sck = Fosc/16 (f/8 in x2 mode),
Master mode
MASTER_OSC_DIV16
0x12
Sck = Fosc/64 (f/32 in x2 mode),
MASTER_OSC_DIV64
Master mode
0x13
Sck = Fosc/128 (f/64 in x2
mode), Master mode
MASTER_OSC_DIV128
SPI clock phase
2
Data changes on idle to active
0x00
transition of the clock
IDLE_2_ACTIVE
Data changes on active to idle
transition of the clock
ACTIVE_2_IDLE
0x04
SPI clock polarity
3
0x00 Clock idle level is low
CLK_IDLE_LOW
0x08 Clock idle level is high
CLK_IDLE_HIGH
Data order
292
0x00 Most significant bit sent first
DATA_ORDER_MSB
0x20 Least significant bit sent first
DATA_ORDER_LSB
Requires
MCU must have SPI module.
Example
' Set SPI to the Master Mode, clock = Fosc/4 , clock IDLE state
low and data transmitted at low to high clock edge:
Spi_Init_Advanced(MASTER_OSC_DIV4 or DATA_ORDER_MSB or
CLK_IDLE_LOW or IDLE_2_ACTIVE)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Read
Prototype
sub function Spi_Read(dim buffer as byte) as byte
Returns
Received data.
Reads one byte from the SPI bus.
Description
Parameters :
- buffer: dummy data for clock generation (see device Datasheet for SPI
modules implementation details)
Requires
SPI module must be initialized before using this function. See Spi_Init and
Spi_Init_Advanced routines.
Example
' read a byte from the SPI bus
dim take, dummy1 as byte
...
take = Spi_Read(dummy1)
Spi_Write
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Write(dim wrdata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes byte via the SPI bus.
Description Parameters :
- wrdata: data to be sent
Requires
SPI module must be initialized before using this function. See Spi_Init and
Spi_Init_Advanced routines.
Example
' write a byte to the SPI bus
dim buffer as byte
...
Spi_Write(buffer)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
293
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Library Example
The code demonstrates how to use SPI library functions for communication between
SPI module of the MCU and MAX7219 chip. MAX7219 controls eight 7 segment displays.
program SPI
' Serial 7-seg Display connections
dim CHIP_SEL as sbit at P1.B0
' Chip Select pin definition
' End Serial 7-seg Display connections
sub procedure Select_max()
CHIP_SEL = 0
Delay_us(1)
end sub
' Function for selecting MAX7219
sub procedure Deselect_max()
Delay_us(1)
CHIP_SEL = 1
end sub
' Function for deselecting MAX7219
sub procedure Max7219_init()
' Initializing MAX7219
Select_max()
Spi_Write(0x09)
' BCD mode for digit decoding
Spi_Write(0xFF)
Deselect_max()
Select_max()
Spi_Write(0x0A)
Spi_Write(0x0F)
Deselect_max()
Select_max()
Spi_Write(0x0B)
Spi_Write(0x07)
Deselect_max()
Select_max()
Spi_Write(0x0C)
Spi_Write(0x01)
Deselect_max()
Select_max()
Spi_Write(0x00)
Spi_Write(0xFF)
Deselect_max()
end sub
294
' Segment luminosity intensity
' Display refresh
' Turn on the display
' No test
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
dim digit_position, digit_value as byte
main:
Spi_Init()
' Initialize SPI module, standard configuration
' Instead of SPI_init, you can use SPI_init_Advanced
as shown below
' Spi_Init_Advanced(MASTER_OSC_DIV4 | DATA_ORDER_MSB
| CLK_IDLE_LOW | IDLE_2_ACTIVE)
Max7219_init()
' Initialize max7219
while TRUE
' Endless loop
for digit_value = 0 to 9
for digit_position = 8 to 1 step -1
Select_max()
' Select max7219
Spi_Write(digit_position)
' Send digit position
Spi_Write(digit_value)
' Send digit value
Deselect_max()
' Deselect MAX7219
Delay_ms(300)
next digit_position
next digit_value
wend
end.
HW Connection
SPI HW connection
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
295
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
SPI ETHERNET LIBRARY
The ENC28J60 is a stand-alone Ethernet controller with an industry standard Serial
Peripheral Interface (SPI™). It is designed to serve as an Ethernet network interface
for any controller equipped with SPI.
The ENC28J60 meets all of the IEEE 802.3 specifications. It incorporates a number
of packet filtering schemes to limit incoming packets. It also provides an internal
DMA module for fast data throughput and hardware assisted IP checksum calculations. Communication with the host controller is implemented via two interrupt pins
and the SPI, with data rates of up to 10 Mb/s. Two dedicated pins are used for LED
link and network activity indication.
This library is designed to simplify handling of the underlying hardware (ENC28J60).
It works with any 8051 MCU with integrated SPI and more than 4 Kb ROM memory.
SPI Ethernet library supports:
- IPv4 protocol.
- ARP requests.
- ICMP echo requests.
- UDP requests.
- TCP requests (no stack, no packet reconstruction).
- packet fragmentation is NOT supported.
Note: The appropriate hardware SPI module must be initialized before using any of
the SPI Ethernet library routines. Refer to Spi Library.
External dependencies of SPI Ethernet Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using SPI Ethernet Library:
dim Spi_Ethernet_CS
as sbit external sfr
dim Spi_Ethernet_RST
as sbit external sfr
296
Description:
ENC28J60 chip select
pin.
ENC28J60 reset pin.
Example :
dim Spi_Ethernet_CS
as sbit at P1.B1 sfr
dim Spi_Ethernet_RST
as sbit at P1.B0 sfr
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
The following routines must be defined in all
project using SPI Ethernet Library:
Description:
sub function Spi_Ethernet_UserTCP(dim
remoteHost as ^byte,
dim
remotePort as word,
dim
TCP request
handler.
Example :
Refer to the
library example at the
bottom of this
page
localPort as word,
dim
for code
implementation.
reqLength as word) as word
sub function Spi_Ethernet_UserUDP(dim
remoteHost as ^byte,
dim
remotePort as word,
dim
destPort as word,
dim
reqLength as word) as word
UDP request
handler.
Refer to the
library example at the
bottom of this
page
for code
implementation.
Library Routines
-
Spi_Ethernet_Init
Spi_Ethernet_Enable
Spi_Ethernet_Disable
Spi_Ethernet_doPacket
Spi_Ethernet_putByte
Spi_Ethernet_putBytes
Spi_Ethernet_putString
Spi_Ethernet_putConstString
Spi_Ethernet_putConstBytes
Spi_Ethernet_getByte
Spi_Ethernet_getBytes
Spi_Ethernet_UserTCP
Spi_Ethernet_UserUDP
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
297
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Ethernet_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Ethernet_Init(dim mac as ^byte, dim ip as
^byte, dim fullDuplex as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This is MAC module routine. It initializes ENC28J60 controller. This function is
internaly splited into 2 parts to help linker when coming short of memory.
ENC28J60 controller settings (parameters not mentioned here are set to default):
Description -
receive buffer start address : 0x0000.
receive buffer end address : 0x19AD.
transmit buffer start address: 0x19AE.
transmit buffer end address : 0x1FFF.
RAM buffer read/write pointers in auto-increment mode.
receive filters set to default: CRC + MAC Unicast + MAC Broadcast in OR mode.
flow control with TX and RX pause frames in full duplex mode.
frames are padded to 60 bytes + CRC.
maximum packet size is set to 1518.
Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap: 0x15 in full duplex mode; 0x12 in half duplex mode.
Non-Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap: 0x0012 in full duplex mode; 0x0C12 in
half duplex mode.
- Collision window is set to 63 in half duplex mode to accomodate some
ENC28J60 revisions silicon bugs.
- CLKOUT output is disabled to reduce EMI generation.
- half duplex loopback disabled.
- LED configuration: default (LEDA-link status, LEDB-link activity).
Parameters:
- mac: RAM buffer containing valid MAC address.
- ip: RAM buffer containing valid IP address.
- fullDuplex: ethernet duplex mode switch. Valid values: 0 (half duplex mode)
and 1 (full duplex mode).
Requires
The appropriate hardware SPI module must be previously initialized.
const Spi_Ethernet_HALFDUPLEX = 0
const Spi_Ethernet_FULLDUPLEX = 1
Example
298
myMacAddr as
myIpAddr as
...
myMacAddr[0]
myMacAddr[1]
byte[6] ' my MAC address
byte[4] ' my IP addr
= 0x00
= 0x14
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
myMacAddr[2] =
myMacAddr[3]
myMacAddr[4]
myMacAddr[5]
Example
myIpAddr[0]
myIpAddr[1]
myIpAddr[2]
myIpAddr[3]
0xA5
= 0x76
= 0x19
= 0x3F
=
=
=
=
192
168
20
60
Spi_Init()
Spi_Ethernet_Init(PORTC, 0, PORTC, 1, myMacAddr, myIpAddr,
Spi_Ethernet_FULLDUPLEX)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
299
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Ethernet_Enable
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Ethernet_Enable(dim enFlt as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This is MAC module routine. This routine enables appropriate network traffic on the
ENC28J60 module by the means of it's receive filters (unicast, multicast, broadcast,
crc). Specific type of network traffic will be enabled if a corresponding bit of this routine's input parameter is set. Therefore, more than one type of network traffic can be
enabled at the same time. For this purpose, predefined library constants (see the
table below) can be ORed to form appropriate input value.
Parameters:
- enFlt: network traffic/receive filter flags. Each bit corresponds to the
appropriate network traffic/receive filter:
Bit Mask
Description
Description
Predefined library const
0
0x01
MAC Broadcast traffic/receive filter flag.
When set, MAC broadcast traffic will be Spi_Ethernet_BROADCAST
enabled.
1
0x02
MAC Multicast traffic/receive filter flag.
When set, MAC multicast traffic will be
enabled.
2
0x04
not used
none
3
0x08
not used
none
4
0x10
not used
none
5
0x20
CRC check flag. When set, packets with
invalid CRC field will be discarded.
6
0x40
not used
7
0x80
Spi_Ethernet_MULTICAST
Spi_Ethernet_CRC
none
MAC Unicast traffic/receive filter flag. When
Spi_Ethernet_UNICAST
set, MAC unicast traffic will be enabled.
Note: Advance filtering available in the ENC28J60 module such as Pattern
Match, Magic Packet and Hash Table can not be enabled by this routine. Additionaly, all filters, except CRC, enabled with this routine will work in OR mode,
which means that packet will be received if any of the enabled filters accepts it.
Note: This routine will change receive filter configuration on-the-fly. It will not, in
any way, mess with enabling/disabling receive/transmit logic or any other part of
the ENC28J60 module. The ENC28J60 module should be properly cofigured by
the means of Spi_Ethernet_Init routine.
300
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
Spi_Ethernet_Enable(Spi_Ethernet_CRC or Spi_Ethernet_UNICAST) '
enable CRC checking and Unicast traffic
Spi_Ethernet_Disable
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Ethernet_Disable(dim disFlt as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This is MAC module routine. This routine disables appropriate network traffic on the
ENC28J60 module by the means of it's receive filters (unicast, multicast, broadcast,
crc). Specific type of network traffic will be disabled if a corresponding bit of this routine's input parameter is set. Therefore, more than one type of network traffic can be
disabled at the same time. For this purpose, predefined library constants (see the
table below) can be ORed to form appropriate input value.
Parameters:
- disFlt: network traffic/receive filter flags. Each bit corresponds to the
appropriate network traffic/receive filter:
Bit Mask
Description
Predefined library const
0
0x01
MAC Broadcast traffic/receive filter flag.
When set, MAC broadcast traffic will be Spi_Ethernet_BROADCAST
disabled.
1
0x02
MAC Multicast traffic/receive filter flag.
When set, MAC multicast traffic will be
disabled.
2
0x04
not used
none
3
0x08
not used
none
4
0x10
not used
none
5
0x20
6
0x40
7
0x80
Description
Spi_Ethernet_MULTICAST
CRC check flag. When set, CRC check will
be disabled and packets with invalid CRC Spi_Ethernet_CRC
field will be accepted.
not used
none
MAC Unicast traffic/receive filter flag. When
Spi_Ethernet_UNICAST
set, MAC unicast traffic will be disabled.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
301
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Note: Advance filtering available in the ENC28J60 module such as Pattern
Match, Magic Packet and Hash Table can not be disabled by this routine.
Description Note: This routine will change receive filter configuration on-the-fly. It will not, in
any way, mess with enabling/disabling receive/transmit logic or any other part of
the ENC28J60 module. The ENC28J60 module should be properly cofigured by
the means of Spi_Ethernet_Init routine.
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
Spi_Ethernet_Disable(Spi_Ethernet_CRC or Spi_Ethernet_UNICAST) '
disable CRC checking and Unicast traffic
Spi_Ethernet_doPacket
Prototype
sub function Spi_Ethernet_doPacket() as byte
Returns
- 0 - upon successful packet processing (zero packets received or received
packet processed successfully).
- 1 - upon reception error or receive buffer corruption. ENC28J60 controller needs
to be restarted.
- 2 - received packet was not sent to us (not our IP, nor IP broadcast address).
- 3 - received IP packet was not IPv4.
- 4 - received packet was of type unknown to the library.
This is MAC module routine. It processes next received packet if such exists.
Packets are processed in the following manner:
- ARP &amp; ICMP requests are replied automatically.
- upon TCP request the Spi_Ethernet_UserTCP function is called for further
Description
processing.
- upon UDP request the Spi_Ethernet_UserUDP function is called for further
processing.
Note: Spi_Ethernet_doPacket must be called as often as possible in user's code.
302
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
while TRUE
...
Spi_Ethernet_doPacket() ' process received packets
...
wend
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Ethernet_putByte
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Ethernet_putByte(dim v as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This is MAC module routine. It stores one byte to address pointed by the current
ENC28J60 write pointer (EWRPT).
Description
Parameters:
- v: value to store
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
dim data as byte
...
Spi_Ethernet_putByte(data) ' put an byte into ENC28J60 buffer
Spi_Ethernet_putBytes
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Ethernet_putBytes(dim ptr as ^byte, dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This is MAC module routine. It stores requested number of bytes into ENC28J60
RAM starting from current ENC28J60 write pointer (EWRPT) location.
Description Parameters:
- ptr: RAM buffer containing bytes to be written into ENC28J60 RAM.
- n: number of bytes to be written.
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
dim
buffer as byte[17]
...
buffer = &quot;mikroElektronika&quot;
...
Spi_Ethernet_putBytes(buffer, 16) ' put an RAM array into
ENC28J60 buffer
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
303
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Ethernet_putConstBytes
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Ethernet_putConstBytes(const ptr as ^byte, dim
n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This is MAC module routine. It stores requested number of const bytes into
ENC28J60 RAM starting from current ENC28J60 write pointer (EWRPT) location.
Description Parameters:
- ptr: const buffer containing bytes to be written into ENC28J60 RAM.
- n: number of bytes to be written.
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
const
buffer as byte[17]
...
buffer = &quot;mikroElektronika&quot;
...
Spi_Ethernet_putConstBytes(buffer, 16) ' put a const array into
ENC28J60 buffer
Spi_Ethernet_putString
Prototype
sub function Spi_Ethernet_putString(dim ptr as ^byte) as word
Returns
Number of bytes written into ENC28J60 RAM.
This is MAC module routine. It stores whole string (excluding null termination) into
ENC28J60 RAM starting from current ENC28J60 write pointer (EWRPT) location.
Description
Parameters:
- ptr: string to be written into ENC28J60 RAM.
304
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
dim
buffer as string[16]
...
buffer = &quot;mikroElektronika&quot;
...
Spi_Ethernet_putString(buffer) ' put a RAM string into ENC28J60
buffer
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Ethernet_putConstString
Prototype
sub function Spi_Ethernet_putConstString(const ptr as ^byte) as word
Returns
Number of bytes written into ENC28J60 RAM.
This is MAC module routine. It stores whole const string (excluding null termination) into ENC28J60 RAM starting from current ENC28J60 write pointer (EWRPT)
location.
Description
Parameters:
- ptr: const string to be written into ENC28J60 RAM.
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
const
buffer as string[16]
...
buffer = &quot;mikroElektronika&quot;
...
Spi_Ethernet_putConstString(buffer) ' put a const string into
ENC28J60 buffer
Spi_Ethernet_getByte
Prototype
sub function Spi_Ethernet_getByte() as byte
Returns
Byte read from ENC28J60 RAM.
Description
This is MAC module routine. It fetches a byte from address pointed to by current
ENC28J60 read pointer (ERDPT).
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
dim buffer as byte&lt;&gt;
...
buffer = Spi_Ethernet_getByte() ' read a byte from ENC28J60 buffer
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
305
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Ethernet_getBytes
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Ethernet_getBytes(dim ptr as ^byte, dim addr as
word, dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
This is MAC module routine. It fetches equested number of bytes from
ENC28J60 RAM starting from given address. If value of 0xFFFF is passed as the
address parameter, the reading will start from current ENC28J60 read pointer
(ERDPT) location.
Description
Parameters:
- ptr: buffer for storing bytes read from ENC28J60 RAM.
- addr: ENC28J60 RAM start address. Valid values: 0..8192.
- n: number of bytes to be read.
306
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
dim
buffer as byte[16]
...
Spi_Ethernet_getBytes(buffer, 0x100, 16) ' read 16 bytes,
starting from address 0x100
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Ethernet_UserTCP
Prototype
sub function Spi_Ethernet_UserTCP(dim remoteHost as ^byte, dim
remotePort as word, dim localPort as word, dim reqLength as word)
as word
- 0 - there should not be a reply to the request.
- Length of TCP/HTTP reply data field - otherwise.
Returns
This is TCP module routine. It is internally called by the library. The user accesses to the TCP/HTTP request by using some of the Spi_Ethernet_get routines.
The user puts data in the transmit buffer by using some of the Spi_Ethernet_put
routines. The function must return the length in bytes of the TCP/HTTP reply, or
0 if there is nothing to transmit. If there is no need to reply to the TCP/HTTP
requests, just define this function with return(0) as a single statement.
Description
Parameters:
-
remoteHost: client's IP address.
remotePort: client's TCP port.
localPort: port to which the request is sent.
reqLength: TCP/HTTP request data field length.
Note: The function source code is provided with appropriate example projects.
The code should be adjusted by the user to achieve desired reply.
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
This function is internally called by the library and should not be called by the
user's code.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
307
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Ethernet_UserUDP
Prototype
sub function Spi_Ethernet_UserUDP(dim remoteHost as ^byte, dim
remotePort as word, dim destPort as word, dim reqLength as word)
as word
- 0 - there should not be a reply to the request.
- Length of UDP reply data field - otherwise.
Returns
This is UDP module routine. It is internally called by the library. The user
accesses to the UDP request by using some of the Spi_Ethernet_get routines.
The user puts data in the transmit buffer by using some of the Spi_Ethernet_put
routines. The function must return the length in bytes of the UDP reply, or 0 if
nothing to transmit. If you don't need to reply to the UDP requests, just define
this function with a return(0) as single statement.
Description
Parameters:
-
remoteHost: client's IP address.
remotePort: client's port.
destPort: port to which the request is sent.
reqLength: UDP request data field length.
Note: The function source code is provided with appropriate example projects.
The code should be adjusted by the user to achieve desired reply.
Requires
Ethernet module has to be initialized. See Spi_Ethernet_Init.
Example
This function is internally called by the library and should not be called by the
user's code.
Library Example
This code shows how to use the 8051 mini Ethernet library :
- the board will reply to ARP &amp; ICMP echo requests
- the board will reply to UDP requests on any port :
returns the request in upper char with a header made of remote host IP &amp; port number
- the board will reply to HTTP requests on port 80, GET method with pathnames :
/ will return the HTML main page
/s will return board status as text string
/t0 ... /t7 will toggle P3.b0 to P3.b7 bit and return HTML main page
all other requests return also HTML main page.
308
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
// duplex config flags
#define Spi_Ethernet_HALFDUPLEX
#define Spi_Ethernet_FULLDUPLEX
Libraries
0x00
0x01
// half duplex
// full duplex
// mE ehternet NIC pinout
sfr sbit Spi_Ethernet_RST at P1.B0;
sfr sbit Spi_Ethernet_CS at P1.B1;
// end ethernet NIC definitions
/************************************************************
* ROM constant strings
*/
const code byte httpHeader[] = &quot;HTTP/1.1 200 OK\nContent-type: &quot; ;
// HTTP header
const code byte httpMimeTypeHTML[] = &quot;text/html\n\n&quot; ;
//
HTML MIME type
const code byte httpMimeTypeScript[] = &quot;text/plain\n\n&quot; ;
//
TEXT MIME type
idata byte httpMethod[] = &quot;GET /&quot;;
/*
* web page, splited into 2 parts :
* when coming short of ROM, fragmented data is handled more efficiently by linker
*
* this HTML page calls the boards to get its status, and builds
itself with javascript
*/
const code char
*indexPage =
// Change the IP
address of the page to be refreshed
&quot;&lt;meta
http-equiv=\&quot;refresh\&quot;
content=\&quot;3;url=http://192.168.1.60\&quot;&gt;\
&lt;HTML&gt;&lt;HEAD&gt;&lt;/HEAD&gt;&lt;BODY&gt;\
&lt;h1&gt;8051 + ENC28J60 Mini Web Server&lt;/h1&gt;\
&lt;a href=/&gt;Reload&lt;/a&gt;\
&lt;script src=/s&gt;&lt;/script&gt;\
&lt;table&gt;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;table border=1 style=\&quot;font-size:20px ;font-family:
terminal ;\&quot;&gt;\
&lt;tr&gt;&lt;th colspan=2&gt;P0&lt;/th&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;\
&lt;script&gt;\
var str,i;\
str=\&quot;\&quot;;\
for(i=0;i&lt;8;i++)\
{str+=\&quot;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td bgcolor=pink&gt;BUTTON #\&quot;+i+\&quot;&lt;/td&gt;\&quot;;\
if(P0&amp;(1&lt;&lt;i)){str+=\&quot;&lt;td bgcolor=red&gt;ON\&quot;;}\
else {str+=\&quot;&lt;td bgcolor=#cccccc&gt;OFF\&quot;;}\
str+=\&quot;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;\&quot;;}\
document.write(str) ;\
&lt;/script&gt;\
&quot; ;
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
309
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
const char
*indexPage2 = &quot;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;\
&lt;table border=1 style=\&quot;font-size:20px ;font-family: terminal ;\&quot;&gt;\
&lt;tr&gt;&lt;th colspan=3&gt;P3&lt;/th&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;\
&lt;script&gt;\
var str,i;\
str=\&quot;\&quot;;\
for(i=0;i&lt;8;i++)\
{str+=\&quot;&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td bgcolor=yellow&gt;LED #\&quot;+i+\&quot;&lt;/td&gt;\&quot;;\
if(P3&amp;(1&lt;&lt;i)){str+=\&quot;&lt;td bgcolor=red&gt;ON\&quot;;}\
else {str+=\&quot;&lt;td bgcolor=#cccccc&gt;OFF\&quot;;}\
str+=\&quot;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;td&gt;&lt;a href=/t\&quot;+i+\&quot;&gt;Toggle&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;\&quot;;}\
document.write(str) ;\
&lt;/script&gt;\
&lt;/table&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/table&gt;\
This
is
HTTP
request
#&lt;script&gt;document.write(REQ)&lt;/script&gt;&lt;/BODY&gt;&lt;/HTML&gt;\
&quot; ;
/***********************************
* RAM variables
*/
idata byte
myMacAddr[6] = {0x00, 0x14, 0xA5, 0x76, 0x19, 0x3f} ;
// my MAC address
idata byte
myIpAddr[4] = {192, 168, 1, 60} ;
//
my IP address
idata byte
getRequest[15] ;
//
HTTP request buffer
idata byte
dyna[29] ;
//
buffer for dynamic response
idata
unsigned
long
httpCounter
=
0
;
// counter of HTTP requests
/*******************************************
* functions
*/
/*
* put the constant string pointed to by s to the ENC transmit buffer.
*/
/*unsigned int
putConstString(const code char *s)
{
unsigned int ctr = 0 ;
while(*s)
{
Spi_Ethernet_putByte(*s++) ;
ctr++ ;
}
return(ctr) ;
}*/
310
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
/*
* it will be much faster to use library Spi_Ethernet_putConstString
routine
* instead of putConstString routine above. However, the code will
be a little
* bit bigger. User should choose between size and speed and pick the
implementation that
* suites him best. If you choose to go with the putConstString definition above
* the #define line below should be commented out.
*
*/
#define putConstString Spi_Ethernet_putConstString
/*
* put the string pointed to by s to the ENC transmit buffer
*/
/*unsigned int
putString(char *s)
{
unsigned int ctr = 0 ;
while(*s)
{
Spi_Ethernet_putByte(*s++) ;
ctr++ ;
}
return(ctr) ;
}*/
/*
* it will be much faster to use library Spi_Ethernet_putString routine
* instead of putString routine above. However, the code will be a
little
* bit bigger. User should choose between size and speed and pick the
implementation that
* suites him best. If you choose to go with the putString definition above
* the #define line below should be commented out.
*
*/
#define putString Spi_Ethernet_putString
/*
* this function is called by the library
* the user accesses to the HTTP request by successive calls to
Spi_Ethernet_getByte()
* the user puts data in the transmit buffer by successive calls to
Spi_Ethernet_putByte()
* the function must return the length in bytes of the HTTP reply,
or 0 if nothing to transmit
*
* if you don't need to reply to HTTP requests,
* just define this function with a return(0) as single statement
*
*/
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
311
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
unsigned int
Spi_Ethernet_UserTCP(byte *remoteHost, unsigned int
remotePort, unsigned int localPort, unsigned int reqLength)
{
idata unsigned int
len;
// my reply length
if(localPort != 80)
only to web request on port 80
{
return(0) ;
}
// I listen
// get 10 first bytes only of the request, the rest does not
matter here
for(len = 0 ; len &lt; 10 ; len++)
{
getRequest[len] = Spi_Ethernet_getByte() ;
}
getRequest[len] = 0 ;
len = 0;
if(memcmp(getRequest, httpMethod, 5))
method is supported here
{
return(0) ;
}
// only GET
httpCounter++ ;
request done
// one more
if(getRequest[5] == 's')
// if request
path name starts with s, store dynamic data in transmit buffer
{
// the text string replied by this request can be
interpreted as javascript statements
// by browsers
len = putConstString(httpHeader) ;
//
HTTP header
len += putConstString(httpMimeTypeScript) ;
with text MIME type
//
// add P3 value (buttons) to reply
len += putConstString(&quot;var P3=&quot;) ;
WordToStr(P3, dyna) ;
len += putString(dyna) ;
len += putConstString(&quot;;&quot;) ;
312
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
// add P0 value (LEDs) to reply
len += putConstString(&quot;var P0=&quot;) ;
WordToStr(P0, dyna) ;
len += putString(dyna) ;
len += putConstString(&quot;;&quot;) ;
// add HTTP requests counter to reply
WordToStr(httpCounter, dyna) ;
len += putConstString(&quot;var REQ=&quot;) ;
len += putString(dyna) ;
len += putConstString(&quot;;&quot;) ;
}
else if(getRequest[5] == 't')
//
if request path name starts with t, toggle P3 (LED) bit number that
comes after
{
byte
bitMask = 0 ;
// for bit
mask
if(isdigit(getRequest[6]))
//
if 0 &lt;= bit number &lt;= 9, bits 8 &amp; 9 does not exist but does not matter
{
bitMask = getRequest[6] - '0' ;
//
convert ASCII to integer
bitMask = 1 &lt;&lt; bitMask ;
//
create bit mask
P3 ^= bitMask ;
//
toggle P3 with xor operator
}
}
if(len == 0)
what do to by default
{
len =
HTTP header
len +=
with HTML MIME type
len +=
HTML page first part
len +=
HTML page second part
}
//
putConstString(httpHeader) ;
//
putConstString(httpMimeTypeHTML) ;
//
putConstString(indexPage) ;
//
putConstString(indexPage2) ;
//
return(len) ;
return to the library with the number of bytes to transmit
}
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
//
313
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
/*
* this function is called by the library
* the user accesses to the UDP request by successive calls to
Spi_Ethernet_getByte()
* the user puts data in the transmit buffer by successive calls to
Spi_Ethernet_putByte()
* the function must return the length in bytes of the UDP reply, or
0 if nothing to transmit
*
* if you don't need to reply to UDP requests,
* just define this function with a return(0) as single statement
*
*/
unsigned int
Spi_Ethernet_UserUDP(byte *remoteHost, unsigned int
remotePort, unsigned int destPort, unsigned int reqLength)
{
idata unsigned int
len ;
// my reply
length
idata byte
* ptr ;
// pointer to the
dynamic buffer
// reply is made of the remote host IP address in human readable format
ByteToStr(remoteHost[0], dyna) ;
// first IP
address byte
dyna[3] = '.' ;
ByteToStr(remoteHost[1], dyna + 4) ;
// second
dyna[7] = '.' ;
ByteToStr(remoteHost[2], dyna + 8) ;
// third
dyna[11] = '.' ;
ByteToStr(remoteHost[3], dyna + 12) ;
// fourth
dyna[15] = ':' ;
// add
separator
// then remote host port number
WordToStr(remotePort, dyna + 16) ;
dyna[21] = '[' ;
WordToStr(destPort, dyna + 22) ;
dyna[27] = ']' ;
dyna[28] = 0 ;
// the total length of the request is the length of the
dynamic string plus the text of the request
len = 28 + reqLength;
// puts the dynamic string into the transmit buffer
Spi_Ethernet_putBytes(dyna, 28) ;
314
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
// then puts the request string converted into upper char into the
transmit buffer
while(reqLength--)
{
Spi_Ethernet_putByte(toupper(Spi_Ethernet_getByte()))
;
}
return(len) ;
length of the UDP reply
}
// back to the library with the
/*
* main entry
*/
procedure
main()
{
/*
* starts ENC28J60 with :
* reset bit on P1_0
* CS bit on P1_1
* my MAC &amp; IP address
* full duplex
*/
Spi_Init_Advanced(MASTER_OSC_DIV16 | CLK_IDLE_LOW |
IDLE_2_ACTIVE | DATA_ORDER_MSB);
Spi_Ethernet_Init(myMacAddr, myIpAddr, Spi_Ethernet_FULLDUPLEX) ; // full duplex, CRC + MAC Unicast + MAC Broadcast filtering
while(1)
// do forever
{
/*
* if necessary, test the return value to get error
code
*/
Spi_Ethernet_doPacket() ;
// process incoming
Ethernet packets
/*
* add your stuff here if needed
* Spi_Ethernet_doPacket() must be called as often
as possible
* otherwise packets could be lost
*/
}
}
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
315
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
HW Connection
316
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
SPI GRAPHIC LCD LIBRARY
The mikroBasic for 8051 provides a library for operating Graphic LCD 128x64 (with
commonly used Samsung KS108/KS107 controller) via SPI interface.
For creating a custom set of GLCD images use GLCD Bitmap Editor Tool.
Note: The library uses the SPI module for communication. User must initialize SPI
module before using the SPI Graphic LCD Library.
Note: This Library is designed to work with the mikroElektronika's Serial LCD/GLCD
Adapter Board pinout, see schematic at the bottom of this page for details.
External dependencies of SPI Graphic LCD Library
The implementation of SPI Graphic LCD Library routines is based on Port Expander
Library routines.
External dependencies are the same as Port Expander Library external dependencies.
Library Routines
Basic routines:
-
Spi_Glcd_Init
Spi_Glcd_Set_Side
Spi_Glcd_Set_Page
Spi_Glcd_Set_X
Spi_Glcd_Read_Data
Spi_Glcd_Write_Data
Advanced routines:
-
Spi_Glcd_Fill
Spi_Glcd_Dot
Spi_Glcd_Line
Spi_Glcd_V_Line
Spi_Glcd_H_Line
Spi_Glcd_Rectangle
Spi_Glcd_Box
Spi_Glcd_Circle
Spi_Glcd_Set_Font
Spi_Glcd_Write_Char
Spi_Glcd_Write_Text
Spi_Glcd_Image
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
317
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Glcd_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Glcd_Init(dim DeviceAddress as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initializes the GLCD module via SPI interface.
Description
Parameters :
- DeviceAddress: spi expander hardware address, see schematic at the bottom
of this page
SPExpanderCS and SPExpanderRST variables must be defined before using this
function.
Requires
The SPI module needs to be initialized. See Spi_Init and Spi_Init_Advanced
routines.
Example
318
' port expander pinout definition
dim SPExpanderRST as sbit at P1.B0
SPExpanderCS as sbit at P1.B1
...
Spi_Init_Advanced(MASTER_OSC_DIV4 or CLK_IDLE_LOW or IDLE_2_ACTIVE
or DATA_ORDER_MSB)
Spi_Glcd_Init(0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Glcd_Set_Side
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Set_Side(dim x_pos as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Selects GLCD side. Refer to the GLCD datasheet for detail explanation.
Parameters :
- x_pos: position on x-axis. Valid values: 0..127
Description
The parameter x_pos specifies the GLCD side: values from 0 to 63 specify the
left side, values from 64 to 127 specify the right side.
Note: For side, x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom
of this page.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Glcd_Init routines.
The following two lines are equivalent, and both of them select the left side of
GLCD:
Example
SPI_Glcd_Set_Side(0)
SPI_Glcd_Set_Side(10)
Spi_Glcd_Set_Page
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Glcd_Set_Page(dim page as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Selects page of GLCD.
Parameters :
Description
- page: page number. Valid values: 0..7
Note: For side, x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom
of this page.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
Spi_Glcd_Set_Page(5)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
319
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Glcd_Set_X
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Set_X(dim x_pos as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets x-axis position to x_pos dots from the left border of GLCD within the selected side.
Parameters :
Description
- x_pos: position on x-axis. Valid values: 0..63
Note: For side, x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom
of this page.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
Spi_Glcd_Set_X(25)
Spi_Glcd_Read_Data
Prototype
sub function Spi_Glcd_Read_Data() as byte
Returns
One byte from GLCD memory.
Description
Reads data from the current location of GLCD memory and moves to the next
location.
GLCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Glcd_Init routines.
Requires
Example
320
GLCD side, x-axis position and page should be set first. See the functions
Spi_Glcd_Set_Side, Spi_Glcd_Set_X, and Spi_Glcd_Set_Page.
dim data as byte
...
data = Spi_Glcd_Read_Data()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Glcd_Write_Data
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Glcd_Write_Data(dim Ddata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes one byte to the current location in GLCD memory and moves to the next
location.
Description
Parameters :
- Ddata: data to be written
GLCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Glcd_Init routines.
Requires
Example
GLCD side, x-axis position and page should be set first. See the functions
Spi_Glcd_Set_Side, Spi_Glcd_Set_X, and Spi_Glcd_Set_Page.
dim ddata as byte
...
Spi_Glcd_Write_Data(ddata)
Spi_Glcd_Fill
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Glcd_Fill(dim pattern as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fills GLCD memory with byte pattern.
Parameters :
Description - pattern: byte to fill GLCD memory with
To clear the GLCD screen, use Spi_Glcd_Fill(0).
To fill the screen completely, use Spi_Glcd_Fill(0xFF).
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Clear screen
Spi_Glcd_Fill(0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
321
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Glcd_Dot
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Glcd_Dot(dim x_pos as byte, dim y_pos as byte,
dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a dot on GLCD at coordinates (x_pos, y_pos).
Parameters :
- x_pos: x position. Valid values: 0..127
- y_pos: y position. Valid values: 0..63
- color: colx_pos as byte; page_num as byte; color as byte)
Description
or parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the dot state: 0 clears dot, 1 puts a dot, and 2
inverts dot state.
Note: For x and y axis layout explanation see schematic at the bottom of this
page.
322
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Invert the dot in the upper left corner
Spi_Glcd_Dot(0, 0, 2)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Glcd_Line
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Line(dim x_start as integer, dim y_start
as integer, dim x_end as integer, dim y_end as integer, dim color
as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a line on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description -
x_start: x coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..127
y_start: y coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..63
x_end: x coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..127
y_end: y coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..63
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
Parameter color determines the line color: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Draw a line between dots (0,0) and (20,30)
Spi_Glcd_Line(0, 0, 20, 30, 1)
Spi_Glcd_V_Line
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Glcd_V_Line(dim y_start as byte, dim y_end as
byte, dim x_pos as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a vertical line on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description
-
y_start: y coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..63
y_end: y coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..63
x_pos: x coordinate of vertical line. Valid values: 0..127
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
Parameter color determines the line color: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Draw a vertical line between dots (10,5) and (10,25)
Spi_Glcd_V_Line(5, 25, 10, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
323
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Glcd_H_Line
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Glcd_V_Line(dim x_start as byte, dim x_end as
byte, dim y_pos as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a horizontal line on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description -
x_start: x coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..127
x_end: x coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..127
y_pos: y coordinate of horizontal line. Valid values: 0..63
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the line color: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts
each dot.
324
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Draw a horizontal line between dots (10,20) and (50,20)
Spi_Glcd_H_Line(10, 50, 20, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Glcd_Rectangle
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Glcd_Rectangle(dim x_upper_left as byte, dim
y_upper_left as byte, dim x_bottom_right as byte, dim
y_bottom_right as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a rectangle on GLCD.
Parameters :
- x_upper_left: x coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner. Valid values: 0..127
- y_upper_left: y coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner. Valid values: 0..63
- x_bottom_right: x coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner. Valid values:
Description
0..127
- y_bottom_right: y coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner. Valid values:
0..63
- color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the rectangle border: 0 white, 1
black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Draw a rectangle between dots (5,5) and (40,40)
Spi_Glcd_Rectangle(5, 5, 40, 40, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
325
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Glcd_Box
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Glcd_Box(dim x_upper_left as byte, dim
y_upper_left as byte, dim x_bottom_right as byte, dim
y_bottom_right as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a box on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description
-
x_upper_left: x coordinate of the upper left box corner. Valid values: 0..127
y_upper_left: y coordinate of the upper left box corner. Valid values: 0..63
x_bottom_right: x coordinate of the lower right box corner. Valid values: 0..127
y_bottom_right: y coordinate of the lower right box corner. Valid values: 0..63
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the box fill: 0 white, 1 black, and 2
inverts each dot.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Draw a box between dots (5,15) and (20,40)
Spi_Glcd_Box(5, 15, 20, 40, 1)
Spi_Glcd_Circle
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Glcd_Circle(dim x_center as integer, dim y_center as integer, dim radius as integer, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a circle on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description -
x_center: x coordinate of the circle center. Valid values: 0..127
y_center: y coordinate of the circle center. Valid values: 0..63
radius: radius size
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the circle line: 0 white, 1 black,
and 2 inverts each dot.
326
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Glcd_Init routine.
Example
' Draw a circle with center in (50,50) and radius=10
Spi_Glcd_Circle(50, 50, 10, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Glcd_Set_Font
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Set_Font(dim const activeFont as ^byte, dim
aFontWidth as byte, dim aFontHeight as byte, dim aFontOffs as word)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets font that will be used with Spi_Glcd_Write_Char and Spi_Glcd_Write_Text
routines.
Parameters :
Description
-
activeFont: font to be set. Needs to be formatted as an array of char
aFontWidth: width of the font characters in dots.
aFontHeight: height of the font characters in dots.
aFontOffs: number that represents difference between the mikroBasic charac-
ter set and regular ASCII set (eg. if 'A' is 65 in ASCII character, and 'A' is 45 in
the mikroBasic character set, aFontOffs is 20). Demo fonts supplied with the
library have an offset of 32, which means that they start with space.
The user can use fonts given in the file “__Lib_GLCD_fonts.mpas” file located in
the Uses folder or create his own fonts.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Use the custom 5x7 font &quot;myfont&quot; which starts with space (32):
Spi_Glcd_Set_Font(myfont, 5, 7, 32)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
327
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Glcd_Write_Char
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Write_Char(dim chr1 as byte, dim x_pos as
byte, dim page_num as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints character on GLCD.
Parameters :
- chr1: character to be written
- x_pos: character starting position on x-axis. Valid values: 0..(127-FontWidth)
- page_num: the number of the page on which character will be written. Valid
Description values: 0..7
- color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the character: 0 white, 1 black,
and 2 inverts each dot.
Note: For x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom of
this page.
GLCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Glcd_Init routines.
Requires
Example
328
Use the Spi_Glcd_Set_Font to specify the font for display; if no font is specified,
then the default 5x8 font supplied with the library will be used.
' Write character 'C' on the position 10 inside the page 2:
Spi_Glcd_Write_Char(&quot;C&quot;, 10, 2, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Glcd_Write_Text
Prototype
sub procedure SPI_Glcd_Write_Text(dim byref text as string[20],
dim x_pos as byte, dim page_numb as byte, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints text on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description
-
text: text to be written
x_pos: text starting position on x-axis.
page_num: the number of the page on which text will be written. Valid values: 0..7
color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines the color of the text: 0 white, 1 black, and 2
inverts each dot.
Note: For x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom of
this page.
GLCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Glcd_Init routines.
Requires
Example
Use the Spi_Glcd_Set_Font to specify the font for display; if no font is specified,
then the default 5x8 font supplied with the library will be used.
' Write text &quot;Hello world!&quot; on the position 10 inside the page 2:
Spi_Glcd_Write_Text(&quot;Hello world!&quot;, 10, 2, 1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
329
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Glcd_Image
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Glcd_Image(dim const image as ^byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Displays bitmap on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description
- image: image to be displayed. Bitmap array can be located in both code and
RAM memory (due to the mikroBasic for 8051 pointer to const and pointer to
RAM equivalency).
Use the mikroBasic’s integrated GLCD Bitmap Editor (menu option Tools ›
GLCD Bitmap Editor) to convert image to a constant array suitable for displaying on GLCD.
Requires
GLCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Glcd_Init routines.
Example
' Draw image my_image on GLCD
Spi_Glcd_Image(my_image)
Library Example
The example demonstrates how to communicate to KS0108 GLCD via the SPI module, using
serial to parallel convertor MCP23S17.
program SPI_Glcd
include bitmap
' Port Expander module connections
dim SPExpanderRST as sbit at P1.B0
dim SPExpanderCS as sbit at P1.B1
' End Port Expander module connections
dim counter, counter2 as byte
jj as word
someText as string[20]
sub procedure delay2S
Delay_ms(2000)
end sub
main:
Spi_Init_Advanced(MASTER_OSC_DIV4
DATA_ORDER_MSB)
Spi_Glcd_Init(0)
Spi_Glcd_Fill(0x00)
330
or
CLK_IDLE_LOW
or
IDLE_2_ACTIVE
or
' Initialize GLCD via SPI
' Clear GLCD
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
while TRUE
Spi_Glcd_Image(@truck_bmp)
Delay2S() Delay2S()
Spi_Glcd_Fill(0x0)
Delay2S
Spi_Glcd_Box(62,40,124,56,1)
Spi_Glcd_Rectangle(5,5,84,35,1)
Spi_Glcd_Line(0, 63, 127, 0,1)
Delay2S()
counter = 5
and vertical line
while counter &lt; 60
Delay_ms(250)
Spi_Glcd_V_Line(2, 54, counter, 1)
Spi_Glcd_H_Line(2, 120, counter, 1)
counter = counter + 5
wend
' Draw image
' Draw box
' Draw rectangle
' Draw line
' Draw horizontal
Delay2S()
Spi_Glcd_Fill(0x00)
Spi_Glcd_Set_Font(@Character8x8, 8, 8, 32)
Spi_Glcd_Write_Text(&quot;mikroE&quot;, 5, 7, 2)
for counter2 = 1 to 10
Spi_Glcd_Circle(63,32, 3*counter2, 1)
next counter2
Delay2S()
' Choose font
' Write string
' Draw circles
Spi_Glcd_Box(12,20, 70,63, 2)
Delay2S()
' Draw box
Spi_Glcd_Set_Font(@FontSystem5x8, 5, 8, 32)
someText = &quot;Hello 8051&quot;
Spi_Glcd_Write_Text(someText, 5, 3, 0)
Delay2S()
' Change font
Spi_Glcd_Set_Font(@System3x6, 3, 6, 32)
someText = &quot;SMALL:NOT:SMALLER&quot;
Spi_Glcd_Write_Text(someText, 20,5, 1)
Delay2S()
wend
end.
' Write string
' Write string
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
331
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
HW Connection
SPI GLCD HW connection
332
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
SPI LCD LIBRARY
The mikroBasic for 8051 provides a library for communication with LCD (with
HD44780 compliant controllers) in 4-bit mode via SPI interface.
For creating a custom set of LCD characters use LCD Custom Character Tool.
Note: The library uses the SPI module for communication. The user must initialize
the SPI module before using the SPI LCD Library.
Note: This Library is designed to work with the mikroElektronika's Serial LCD
Adapter Board pinout. See schematic at the bottom of this page for details.
External dependencies of SPI LCD Library
The implementation of SPI LCD Library routines is based on Port Expander Library
routines.
External dependencies are the same as Port Expander Library external dependencies.
Library Routines
-
Spi_Lcd_Config
Spi_Lcd_Out
Spi_Lcd_Out_Cp
Spi_Lcd_Chr
Spi_Lcd_Chr_Cp
Spi_Lcd_Cmd
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
333
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Lcd_Config
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Lcd_Config(dim DeviceAddress as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initializes the LCD module via SPI interface.
Description
Parameters :
- DeviceAddress: spi expander hardware address, see schematic at the bottom
of this page
SPExpanderCS and SPExpanderRST variables must be defined before using this
function.
Requires
The SPI module needs to be initialized. See Spi_Init and Spi_Init_Advanced
routines.
Example
' port expander pinout definition
dim SPExpanderCS as sbit at P1.B1
SPExpanderRST as sbit at P1.B0
...
Spi_Init()
' initialize spi
Spi_Lcd_Config(0)
' initialize lcd over spi interface
Spi_Lcd_Out
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Lcd_Out(dim row as byte, dim column as byte,
dim byref text as string[19])
Returns
Nothing.
Prints text on the LCD starting from specified position. Both string variables and
literals can be passed as a text.
Description
Parameters :
- row: starting position row number
- column: starting position column number
- text: text to be written
334
Requires
LCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Lcd_Config routines.
Example
' Write text &quot;Hello!&quot; on LCD starting from row 1, column 3:
Spi_Lcd_Out(1, 3, &quot;Hello!&quot;)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Lcd_Out_Cp
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Lcd_Out_CP(dim text as string[19])
Returns
Nothing.
Prints text on the LCD at current cursor position. Both string variables and literals can be passed as a text.
Description
Parameters :
- text: text to be written
Requires
LCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Lcd_Config routines.
Example
' Write text &quot;Here!&quot; at current cursor position:
Spi_Lcd_Out_CP(&quot;Here!&quot;)
Spi_Lcd_Chr
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Lcd_Chr(dim Row as byte, dim Column as byte,
dim Out_Char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints character on LCD at specified position. Both variables and literals can be
passed as character.
Description
Parameters :
- Row: writing position row number
- Column: writing position column number
- Out_Char: character to be written
Requires
LCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Lcd_Config routines.
Example
' Write character &quot;i&quot; at row 2, column 3:
Spi_Lcd_Chr(2, 3, 'i')
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
335
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Lcd_Chr_Cp
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Lcd_Chr_CP(dim Out_Char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints character on LCD at current cursor position. Both variables and literals
can be passed as character.
Description
Parameters :
- Out_Char: character to be written
Requires
LCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Lcd_Config routines.
Example
' Write character &quot;e&quot; at current cursor position:
Spi_Lcd_Chr_Cp('e')
Spi_Lcd_Cmd
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Lcd_Cmd(dim out_char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sends command to LCD.
Parameters :
Description
- out_char: command to be sent
Note: Predefined constants can be passed to the function, see Available LCD
Commands.
336
Requires
LCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Lcd_Config routines.
Example
' Clear LCD display:
Spi_Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Available LCD Commands
Lcd Command
Purpose
LCD_FIRST_ROW
Move cursor to the 1st row
LCD_SECOND_ROW
Move cursor to the 2nd row
LCD_THIRD_ROW
Move cursor to the 3rd row
LCD_FOURTH_ROW
Move cursor to the 4th row
LCD_CLEAR
Clear display
LCD_RETURN_HOME
Return cursor to home position, returns a shifted display
to its original position. Display data RAM is unaffected.
LCD_CURSOR_OFF
Turn off cursor
LCD_UNDERLINE_ON
Underline cursor on
LCD_BLINK_CURSOR_ON
Blink cursor on
LCD_MOVE_CURSOR_LEFT
Move cursor left without changing display data RAM
LCD_MOVE_CURSOR_RIGHT
Move cursor right without changing display data RAM
LCD_TURN_ON
Turn LCD display on
LCD_TURN_OFF
Turn LCD display off
LCD_SHIFT_LEFT
Shift display left without changing display data RAM
LCD_SHIFT_RIGHT
Shift display right without changing display data RAM
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
337
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Library Example
This example demonstrates how to communicate LCD via the SPI module, using
serial to parallel convertor MCP23S17.
program Spi_LCD
dim text as char[17]
' Port Expander module connections
dim SPExpanderRST as sbit at P1.B0
dim SPExpanderCS as sbit at P1.B1
' End Port Expander module connections
main:
text = &quot;mikroElektronika&quot;
Spi_Init()
' Initialize SPI
Spi_Lcd_Config(0)
' Initialize LCD over SPI interface
Spi_Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
' Clear display
Spi_Lcd_Cmd(LCD_CURSOR_OFF) ' Turn cursor off
Spi_Lcd_Out(1,6, &quot;mikroE&quot;)' Print text to LCD, 1st row, 6th column
Spi_Lcd_Chr_CP(&quot;!&quot;)
' Append &quot;!&quot;
Spi_Lcd_Out(2,1, text)
' Print text to LCD, 2nd row, 1st column
Spi_Lcd_Out(3,1,&quot;mikroE&quot;)
' For LCD with more than two rows
Spi_Lcd_Out(4,15,&quot;mikroE&quot;)
' For LCD with more than two rows
end.
338
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
HW Connection
SPI LCD HW connection
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
339
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
SPI LCD8 (8-BIT INTERFACE) LIBRARY
The mikroBasic for 8051 provides a library for communication with LCD (with
HD44780 compliant controllers) in 8-bit mode via SPI interface.
For creating a custom set of LCD characters use LCD Custom Character Tool.
Note: Library uses the SPI module for communication. The user must initialize the
SPI module before using the SPI LCD Library.
Note: This Library is designed to work with mikroElektronika's Serial LCD/GLCD
Adapter Board pinout, see schematic at the bottom of this page for details.
External dependencies of SPI LCD Library
The implementation of SPI LCD Library routines is based on Port Expander Library
routines.
External dependencies are the same as Port Expander Library external dependencies.
Library Routines
-
340
Spi_Lcd8_Config
Spi_Lcd8_Out
Spi_Lcd8_Out_Cp
Spi_Lcd8_Chr
Spi_Lcd8_Chr_Cp
Spi_Lcd8_Cmd
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Lcd8_Config
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Lcd8_Config(dim DeviceAddress as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initializes the LCD module via SPI interface.
Description
Parameters :
- DeviceAddress: spi expander hardware address, see schematic at the bottom
of this page
SPExpanderCS and SPExpanderRST variables must be defined before using
this function.
Requires
The SPI module needs to be initialized. See Spi_Init and Spi_Init_Advanced
routines.
Example
' port expander pinout definition
dim SPExpanderCS as sbit at P1.B1
SPExpanderRST as sbit at P1.B0
...
Spi_Init()
' initialize spi interface
Spi_Lcd8_Config(0)
' intialize lcd in 8bit mode via spi
Spi_Lcd8_Out
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Lcd8_Out(dim row as byte, dim column as byte,
dim byref text as string[19])
Returns
Nothing.
Prints text on LCD starting from specified position. Both string variables and literals can be passed as a text.
Description
Parameters :
- row: starting position row number
- column: starting position column number
- text: text to be written
Requires
LCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Lcd8_Config routines.
Example
' Write text &quot;Hello!&quot; on LCD starting from row 1, column 3:
Spi_Lcd8_Out(1, 3, &quot;Hello!&quot;)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
341
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Lcd8_Out_Cp
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Lcd8_Out_CP(dim text as string[19])
Returns
Nothing.
Prints text on LCD at current cursor position. Both string variables and literals
can be passed as a text.
Description
Parameters :
- text: text to be written
Requires
LCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Lcd8_Config routines.
Example
' Write text &quot;Here!&quot; at current cursor position:
Spi_Lcd8_Out_CP(&quot;Here!&quot;)
Spi_Lcd8_Chr
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Lcd8_Chr(dim Row as byte, dim Column as byte,
dim Out_Char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints character on LCD at specified position. Both variables and literals can be
passed as character.
Description
Parameters :
- row: writing position row number
- column: writing position column number
- out_char: character to be written
342
Requires
LCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Lcd8_Config routines.
Example
' Write character &quot;i&quot; at row 2, column 3:
Spi_Lcd8_Chr(2, 3, 'i')
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_Lcd8_Chr_Cp
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Lcd8_Chr_CP(dim Out_Char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Prints character on LCD at current cursor position. Both variables and literals
can be passed as character.
Description
Parameters :
- out_char: character to be written
Requires
LCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Lcd8_Config routines.
Print “e” at current cursor position:
Example
' Write character &quot;e&quot; at current cursor position:
Spi_Lcd8_Chr_Cp('e')
Spi_Lcd8_Cmd
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_Lcd8_Cmd(dim out_char as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sends command to LCD.
Parameters :
Description
- out_char: command to be sent
Note: Predefined constants can be passed to the function, see Available LCD
Commands.
Requires
LCD needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see Spi_Lcd8_Config routines.
Example
' Clear LCD display:
Spi_Lcd8_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
343
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Available LCD Commands
Lcd Command
344
Purpose
LCD_FIRST_ROW
Move cursor to the 1st row
LCD_SECOND_ROW
Move cursor to the 2nd row
LCD_THIRD_ROW
Move cursor to the 3rd row
LCD_FOURTH_ROW
Move cursor to the 4th row
LCD_CLEAR
Clear display
LCD_RETURN_HOME
Return cursor to home position, returns a shifted display
to its original position. Display data RAM is unaffected.
LCD_CURSOR_OFF
Turn off cursor
LCD_UNDERLINE_ON
Underline cursor on
LCD_BLINK_CURSOR_ON
Blink cursor on
LCD_MOVE_CURSOR_LEFT
Move cursor left without changing display data RAM
LCD_MOVE_CURSOR_RIGHT
Move cursor right without changing display data RAM
LCD_TURN_ON
Turn LCD display on
LCD_TURN_OFF
Turn LCD display off
LCD_SHIFT_LEFT
Shift display left without changing display data RAM
LCD_SHIFT_RIGHT
Shift display right without changing display data RAM
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Library Example
This example demonstrates how to communicate LCD in 8-bit mode via the SPI
module, using serial to parallel convertor MCP23S17.
program SPI_Lcd8
dim text as char[16]
' Port Expander module connections
dim SPExpanderRST as sbit at P1.B0
dim SPExpanderCS as sbit at P1.B1
' End Port Expander module connections
main:
text = &quot;mikroE&quot;
Spi_Init()
face
Spi_Lcd8_Config(0)
8bit mode via SPI
Spi_Lcd8_Cmd(LCD_CLEAR)
Spi_Lcd8_Cmd(LCD_CURSOR_OFF)
Spi_Lcd8_Out(1,6, text)
1st row, 6th column...
Spi_Lcd8_Chr_CP(&quot;!&quot;)
Spi_Lcd8_Out(2,1, &quot;mikroelektronika&quot;)
2nd row, 1st column...
Spi_Lcd8_Out(3,1, text)
more than two rows
Spi_Lcd8_Out(4,15, text)
more than two rows
end.
' Initialize SPI inter' Intialize LCD in
' Clear display
' Turn cursor off
' Print text to LCD,
' Append &quot;!&quot;
' Print text to LCD,
' For LCD modules with
' For LCD modules with
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
345
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
HW Connection
SPI LCD8 HW connection
346
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
SPI T6963C GRAPHIC LCD LIBRARY
The mikroBasic for 8051 provides a library for working with GLCDs based on
TOSHIBA T6963C controller via SPI interface. The Toshiba T6963C is a very popular LCD controller for the use in small graphics modules. It is capable of controlling
displays with a resolution up to 240x128. Because of its low power and small outline it is most suitable for mobile applications such as PDAs, MP3 players or mobile
measurement equipment. Although this controller is small, it has a capability of displaying and merging text and graphics and it manages all interfacing signals to the
displays Row and Column drivers.
For creating a custom set of GLCD images use GLCD Bitmap Editor Tool.
Note: The library uses the SPI module for communication. The user must initialize
SPI module before using the Spi T6963C GLCD Library.
Note: This Library is designed to work with mikroElektronika's Serial GLCD 240x128
and 240x64 Adapter Boards pinout, see schematic at the bottom of this page for
details.
Note: Some mikroElektronika's adapter boards have pinout different from T6369C
datasheets. Appropriate relations between these labels are given in the table below:
Adapter Board
T6369C datasheet
RS
C/D
R/W
/RD
E
/WR
External dependencies of Spi T6963C Graphic LCD Library
The implementation of Spi T6963C Graphic LCD Library routines is based on Port
Expander Library routines.
External dependencies are the same as Port Expander Library external dependencies.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
347
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Library Routines
-
Spi_T6963C_Config
Spi_T6963C_WriteData
Spi_T6963C_WriteCommand
Spi_T6963C_SetPtr
Spi_T6963C_WaitReady
Spi_T6963C_Fill
Spi_T6963C_Dot
Spi_T6963C_Write_Char
Spi_T6963C_Write_Text
Spi_T6963C_Line
Spi_T6963C_Rectangle
Spi_T6963C_Box
Spi_T6963C_Circle
Spi_T6963C_Image
Spi_T6963C_Sprite
Spi_T6963C_Set_Cursor
Note: The following low level library routines are implemented as macros. These
macros can be found in the Spi_T6963C.h header file which is located in the SPI
T6963C example projects folders.
-
348
Spi_T6963C_ClearBit
Spi_T6963C_SetBit
Spi_T6963C_NegBit
Spi_T6963C_DisplayGrPanel
Spi_T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel
Spi_T6963C_SetGrPanel
Spi_T6963C_SetTxtPanel
Spi_T6963C_PanelFill
Spi_T6963C_GrFill
Spi_T6963C_TxtFill
Spi_T6963C_Cursor_Height
Spi_T6963C_Graphics
Spi_T6963C_Text
Spi_T6963C_Cursor
Spi_T6963C_Cursor_Blink
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_T6963C_Config
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_Config(dim width as word, dim height as
byte, dim fntW as byte, dim DeviceAddress as byte, dim wr as
byte, dim rd as byte, dim cd as byte, dim rst as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initalizes the Graphic Lcd controller.
Parameters :
Description
-
width: width of the GLCD panel
height: height of the GLCD panel
fntW: font width
DeviceAddress: SPI expander hardware address, see schematic at the
-
bottom of this page
wr: write signal pin on GLCD control port
rd: read signal pin on GLCD control port
cd: command/data signal pin on GLCD control port
rst: reset signal pin on GLCD control port
Display RAM organization:
The library cuts RAM into panels : a complete panel is one graphics panel followed by a text panel (see schematic below).
schematic:
+---------------------+ /\
+ GRAPHICS PANEL #0
+ |
+
+ |
+
+ |
+
+ |
+---------------------+ | PANEL 0
+ TEXT PANEL #0
+ |
+
+ \/
+---------------------+ /\
+ GRAPHICS PANEL #1
+ |
+
+ |
+
+ |
+
+ |
+---------------------+ | PANEL 1
+ TEXT PANEL #2
+ |
+
+ |
+---------------------+ \/
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
349
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
SPExpanderCS and SPExpanderRST variables must be defined before using this
function.
Requires
The SPI module needs to be initialized. See the Spi_Init and Spi_Init_Advanced
routines.
Example
' port expander pinout definition
dim SPExpanderRST as sbit at P1.B0
dim SPExpanderCS sbit at P1.B1
...
Spi_Init_Advanced(MASTER_OSC_DIV4 OR CLK_IDLE_LOW OR IDLE_2_ACTIVE
OR DATA_ORDER_MSB)
Spi_T6963C_Config(240, 64, 8, 0, 0, 1, 3, 4)
Spi_T6963C_WriteData
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_WriteData(dim Ddata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes data to T6963C controller via SPI interface.
Description Parameters :
- Ddata: data to be written
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
Spi_T6963C_WriteData(AddrL)
Spi_T6963C_WriteCommand
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_WriteCommand(dim Ddata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes command to T6963C controller via SPI interface.
Description Parameters :
- Ddata: command to be written
350
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
Spi_T6963C_WriteCommand(Spi_T6963C_CURSOR_POINTER_SET)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_T6963C_SetPtr
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_SetPtr(dim p as word, dim c as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets the memory pointer p for command c.
Description
Parameters :
- p: address where command should be written
- c: command to be written
Requires
SToshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
Spi_T6963C_SetPtr(T6963C_grHomeAddr + start, T6963C_ADDRESS_POINTER_SET)
Spi_T6963C_WaitReady
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_WaitReady()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Pools the status byte, and loops until Toshiba GLCD module is ready.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
Spi_T6963C_WaitReady()
Spi_T6963C_Fill
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_Fill(dim v as byte, dim start as word,
dim len as word)
Returns
Nothing.
Fills controller memory block with given byte.
Parameters :
Description
- v: byte to be written
- start: starting address of the memory block
- len: length of the memory block in bytes
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
Spi_T6963C_Fill(0x33, 0x00FF, 0x000F)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
351
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_T6963C_Dot
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_Dot(dim x as integer, dim y as integer,
dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a dot in the current graphic panel of GLCD at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters :
Description
352
- x: dot position on x-axis
- y: dot position on y-axis
- color: color parameter. Valid values: Spi_T6963C_BLACK and
Spi_T6963C_WHITE
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
Spi_T6963C_Dot(x0, y0, pcolor)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_T6963C_Write_Char
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_Write_Char(dim c as byte, dim x as byte,
dim y as byte, dim mode as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes a char in the current text panel of GLCD at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters :
-
c: char to be written
x: char position on x-axis
y: char position on y-axis
mode: mode parameter. Valid values:
Spi_T6963C_ROM_MODE_OR, Spi_T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR,
Spi_T6963C_ROM_MODE_AND and
Spi_T6963C_ROM_MODE_TEXT
Description
Mode parameter explanation:
- OR Mode: In the OR-Mode, text and graphics can be displayed and the data is
logically “OR-ed”. This is the most common way of combining text and graphics for example labels on buttons.
- XOR-Mode: In this mode, the text and graphics data are combined via the logical “exclusive OR”. This can be useful to display text in negative mode, i.e.
white text on black background.
- AND-Mode: The text and graphic data shown on display are combined via the
logical “AND function”.
- TEXT-Mode: This option is only available when displaying just a text. The Text
Attribute values are stored in the graphic area of display memory.
For more details see the T6963C datasheet.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
Spi_T6963C_Write_Char(&quot;A&quot;,22,23,AND)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
353
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_T6963C_Write_Text
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_Write_Text(dim str as ^byte, dim x as
byte, dim y as byte, dim mode as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes text in the current text panel of GLCD at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters :
-
str: text to be written
x: text position on x-axis
y: text position on y-axis
mode: mode parameter. Valid values:
Spi_T6963C_ROM_MODE_OR, Spi_T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR,
Spi_T6963C_ROM_MODE_AND and
Spi_T6963C_ROM_MODE_TEXT
Description
Mode parameter explanation:
- OR Mode: In the OR-Mode, text and graphics can be displayed and the data is
logically “OR-ed”. This is the most common way of combining text and graphics for example labels on buttons.
- XOR-Mode: In this mode, the text and graphics data are combined via the logical “exclusive OR”. This can be useful to display text in negative mode, i.e.
white text on black background.
- AND-Mode: The text and graphic data shown on the display are combined via
the logical “AND function”.
- TEXT-Mode: This option is only available when displaying just a text. The Text
Attribute values are stored in the graphic area of display memory.
For more details see the T6963C datasheet.
354
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
Spi_T6963C_Write_Text(&quot;GLCD LIBRARY DEMO, WELCOME !&quot;, 0, 0,
T6963C_ROM_MODE_EXOR)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_T6963C_Line
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_Line(dim x0 as integer, dim y0 as integer, dim x1 as integer, dim y1 as integer, dim pcolor as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a line from (x0, y0) to (x1, y1).
Parameters :
Description
-
x0: x coordinate of the line start
y0: y coordinate of the line end
x1: x coordinate of the line start
y1: y coordinate of the line end
pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: Spi_T6963C_BLACK and
Spi_T6963C_WHITE
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
Spi_T6963C_Line(0, 0, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE)
Spi_T6963C_Rectangle
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_Rectangle(dim x0 as integer, dim y0 as
integer, dim x1 as integer, dim y1 as integer, dim pcolor as
byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a rectangle on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description
-
x0: x coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner
y0: y coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner
x1: x coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner
y1: y coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner
pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: Spi_T6963C_BLACK and
Spi_T6963C_WHITE
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
Spi_T6963C_Rectangle(20, 20, 219, 107, T6963C_WHITE)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
355
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_T6963C_Box
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_Box(dim x0 as integer, dim y0 as integer,
dim x1 as integer, dim y1 as integer, dim pcolor as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a box on the GLCD
Parameters :
Description
-
x0: x coordinate of the upper left box corner
y0: y coordinate of the upper left box corner
x1: x coordinate of the lower right box corner
y1: y coordinate of the lower right box corner
pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: Spi_T6963C_BLACK and
Spi_T6963C_WHITE
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
Spi_T6963C_Box(0, 119, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE)
Spi_T6963C_Circle
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_Circle(dim x as integer, dim y as integer, dim r as longint, dim pcolor as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a circle on the GLCD.
Parameters :
Description -
x: x coordinate of the circle center
y: y coordinate of the circle center
r: radius size
pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: Spi_T6963C_BLACK and
Spi_T6963C_WHITE
356
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
Spi_T6963C_Circle(120, 64, 110, T6963C_WHITE)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_T6963C_Image
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_image(const pic as ^byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Displays bitmap on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description
- pic: image to be displayed. Bitmap array can be located in both code and
RAM memory (due to the mikroBasic for 8051 pointer to const and pointer to
RAM equivalency).
Use the mikroBasic’s integrated GLCD Bitmap Editor (menu option Tools ›
GLCD Bitmap Editor) to convert image to a constant array suitable for displaying on GLCD.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
Spi_T6963C_Image(my_image)
Spi_T6963C_Sprite
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_sprite(dim px, py, sx, sy as byte, const
pic as ^byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fills graphic rectangle area (px, py) to (px+sx, py+sy) with custom size picture.
Parameters :
- px: x coordinate of the upper left picture corner. Valid values: multiples of the
font width
Description - py: y coordinate of the upper left picture corner
- pic: picture to be displayed
- sx: picture width. Valid values: multiples of the font width
- sy: picture height
Note: If px and sx parameters are not multiples of the font width they will be
scaled to the nearest lower number that is a multiple of the font width.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
Spi_T6963C_Sprite(76, 4, einstein, 88, 119) ' draw a sprite
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
357
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_T6963C_Set_Cursor
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_set_cursor(dim x, y as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets cursor to row x and column y.
Description
Parameters :
- x: cursor position row number
- y: cursor position column number
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
Spi_T6963C_Set_Cursor(cposx, cposy)
Spi_T6963C_ClearBit
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_clearBit(dim b as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Clears control port bit(s).
Description Parameters :
- b: bit mask. The function will clear bit x on control port if bit x in bit mask is set to 1.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' clear bits 0 and 1 on control port
Spi_T6963C_ClearBit(0x03)
Spi_T6963C_SetBit
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_setBit(dim b as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets control port bit(s).
Description Parameters :
- b: bit mask. The function will set bit x on control port if bit x in bit mask is set to 1.
358
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' set bits 0 and 1 on control port
Spi_T6963C_SetBit(0x03)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_T6963C_NegBit
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_negBit(dim b as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Negates control port bit(s).
Description
Parameters :
- b: bit mask. The function will negate bit x on control port if bit x in bit mask is
set to 1.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' negate bits 0 and 1 on control port
Spi_T6963C_NegBit(0x03)
Spi_T6963C_DisplayGrPanel
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_DisplayGrPanel(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Display selected graphic panel.
Description Parameters :
- n: graphic panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' display graphic panel 1
Spi_T6963C_DisplayGrPanel(1)
Spi_T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Display selected text panel.
Description Parameters :
- n: text panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' display text panel 1
Spi_T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel(1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
359
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_T6963C_SetGrPanel
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_SetGrPanel(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Compute start address for selected graphic panel and set appropriate internal
pointers. All subsequent graphic operations will be preformed at this graphic
panel.
Description
Parameters :
- n: graphic panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' set graphic panel 1 as current graphic panel.
Spi_T6963C_SetGrPanel(1)
Spi_T6963C_SetTxtPanel
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_SetTxtPanel(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Compute start address for selected text panel and set appropriate internal pointers. All subsequent text operations will be preformed at this text panel.
Description
Parameters :
- n: text panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
360
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' set text panel 1 as current text panel.
Spi_T6963C_SetTxtPanel(1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_T6963C_PanelFill
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_PanelFill(dim v as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fill current panel in full (graphic+text) with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Description Parameters :
- v: value to fill panel with.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
clear current panel
Spi_T6963C_PanelFill(0)
Spi_T6963C_GrFill
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_GrFill(dim v as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fill current graphic panel with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Description Parameters :
- v: value to fill graphic panel with.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' clear current graphic panel
Spi_T6963C_GrFill(0)
Spi_T6963C_TxtFill
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_TxtFill(dim v as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fill current text panel with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Description Parameters :
- v: this value increased by 32 will be used to fill text panel.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' clear current text panel
Spi_T6963C_TxtFill(0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
361
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_T6963C_Cursor_Height
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_Cursor_Height(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Set cursor size.
Description Parameters :
- n: cursor height. Valid values: 0..7.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
Spi_T6963C_Cursor_Height(7)
Spi_T6963C_Graphics
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_Graphics(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Enable/disable graphic displaying.
Description
Parameters :
- n: graphic enable/disable parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable graphic dispaying) and 1 (enable graphic displaying).
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
enable graphic displaying
Spi_T6963C_Graphics(1)
Spi_T6963C_Text
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_Text(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Enable/disable text displaying.
Description
Parameters :
- n: text enable/disable parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable text dispaying) and 1
(enable text displaying).
362
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' enable text displaying
Spi_T6963C_Text(1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Spi_T6963C_Cursor
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_Cursor(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Set cursor on/off.
Description Parameters :
- n: on/off parameter. Valid values: 0 (set cursor off) and 1 (set cursor on).
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' set cursor on
Spi_T6963C_Cursor(1)
Spi_T6963C_Cursor_Blink
Prototype
sub procedure Spi_T6963C_Cursor_Blink(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Enable/disable cursor blinking.
Description
Parameters :
- n: cursor blinking enable/disable parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable cursor
blinking) and 1 (enable cursor blinking).
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See Spi_T6963C_Config routine.
Example
' enable cursor blinking
Spi_T6963C_Cursor_Blink(1)
Library Example
The following drawing demo tests advanced routines of the Spi T6963C GLCD library. Hardware
configurations in this example are made for the T6963C 240x128 display, Easy8051B board and
AT89S8253.
program SPI_T6963C_240x128
include __Lib_T6963C_Consts
include bitmap
include bitmap2
' Port Expander module connections
dim SPExpanderRST as sbit at P1.B0
dim SPExpanderCS as sbit at P1.B1
' End Port Expander module connections
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
363
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
dim
panel as byte
' current panel
i as word
' general purpose register
curs as byte
' cursor visibility
cposx, cposy as word
' cursor x-y position
txtcols as byte
' number of text coloms
txt, txt1 as string[29] idata
txt1 = &quot; EINSTEIN WOULD HAVE LIKED mC&quot;
txt = &quot; GLCD LIBRARY DEMO, WELCOME !&quot;
P0 = 255
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
' all inputs
* init display for 240 pixel width and 128 pixel height
* 8 bits character width
* data bus on MCP23S17 portB
* control bus on MCP23S17 portA
* bit 2 is !WR
* bit 1 is !RD
* bit 0 is !CD
* bit 4 is RST
*
* chip enable, reverse on, 8x8 font internaly set in library
' Initialize SPI module
Spi_Init_Advanced(MASTER_OSC_DIV4
or
CLK_IDLE_LOW
IDLE_2_ACTIVE or DATA_ORDER_MSB)
' Initialize SPI Toshiba 240x128
Spi_T6963C_Config(240, 128, 8, 0, 2, 1, 0, 4)
Delay_ms(1000)
'
'
'
or
*
* Enable both graphics and text display at the same time
*
Spi_T6963C_graphics(1)
Spi_T6963C_text(1)
panel = 0
i = 0
curs = 0
cposy = 0
cposx = 0
'
'
'
*
* Text messages
*
Spi_T6963C_write_text(txt, 0, 0, T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR)
Spi_T6963C_write_text(txt1, 0, 15, T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR)
364
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
'
'
'
Libraries
*
* Cursor
*
Spi_T6963C_cursor_height(8)
Spi_T6963C_set_cursor(0, 0)
Spi_T6963C_cursor(0)
'
'
'
' 8 pixel height
' Move cursor to top left
' Cursor off
*
* Draw rectangles
*
Spi_T6963C_rectangle( 0, 0, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE)
Spi_T6963C_rectangle(20, 20, 219, 107, T6963C_WHITE)
Spi_T6963C_rectangle(40, 40, 199, 87, T6963C_WHITE)
Spi_T6963C_rectangle(60, 60, 179, 67, T6963C_WHITE)
'
'
'
*
* Draw a cross
*
Spi_T6963C_line(0, 0, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE)
Spi_T6963C_line(0, 127, 239, 0, T6963C_WHITE)
'
'
'
*
* Draw solid boxes
*
Spi_T6963C_box(0, 0, 239, 8, T6963C_WHITE)
Spi_T6963C_box(0, 119, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE)
'
'
'
*
* Draw circles
*
Spi_T6963C_circle(120,
Spi_T6963C_circle(120,
Spi_T6963C_circle(120,
Spi_T6963C_circle(120,
Spi_T6963C_circle(120,
Spi_T6963C_circle(120,
Spi_T6963C_circle(120,
64,
64,
64,
64,
64,
64,
64,
10, T6963C_WHITE)
30, T6963C_WHITE)
50, T6963C_WHITE)
70, T6963C_WHITE)
90, T6963C_WHITE)
110, T6963C_WHITE)
130, T6963C_WHITE)
Spi_T6963C_sprite(76, 4, @einstein, 88, 119)
Spi_T6963C_setGrPanel(1)
Spi_T6963C_image(@banner_bmp)
screen with a picture
' Draw a sprite
' Select other graphic panel
' Fill the graphic
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
365
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
while TRUE
' Endless loop
'
*
'
* If P0_0 is pressed, toggle the display between graphic
panel 0 and graphic 1
'
*
if ( P0_0 = 0) then
Inc(panel)
panel = panel and 1
Spi_T6963C_displayGrPanel(panel)
Delay_ms(300)
'
'
'
*
* If P0_1 is pressed, display only graphic panel
*
else
if ( P0_1 = 0) then
Spi_T6963C_graphics(1)
Spi_T6963C_text(0)
Delay_ms(300)
'
'
'
*
* If P0_2 is pressed, display only text panel
*
else
if ( P0_2 = 0) then
Spi_T6963C_graphics(0)
Spi_T6963C_text(1)
Delay_ms(300)
'
'
'
*
* If P0_3 is pressed, display text and graphic panels
*
else
if( P0_3 = 0) then
Spi_T6963C_graphics(1)
Spi_T6963C_text(1)
Delay_ms(300)
'
'
'
366
*
* If P0_4 is pressed, change cursor
*
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
else
if ( P0_4 = 0) then
Inc(curs)
if (curs = 3) then
curs = 0
end if
select case curs
case 0
' No cursor
Spi_T6963C_cursor(0)
case 1
' Blinking cursor
Spi_T6963C_cursor(1)
Spi_T6963C_cursor_blink(1)
case 2
' Non blinking cursor
Spi_T6963C_cursor(1)
Spi_T6963C_cursor_blink(0)
end select 'end case
end if
Delay_ms(300)
end if
end if
end if
end if
'
'
'
*
* Move cursor, even if not visible
*
Inc(cposx)
if (cposx = txtcols) then
cposx = 0
cposy = cposy + 1
if (cposy = (128 div T6963C_CHARACTER_HEIGHT)) then
if y end
cposy = 0
grafic height (128) div character height
end if
Spi_T6963C_set_cursor(cposx, cposy)
Delay_ms(100)
end if
wend
end.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
'
'
367
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
HW Connection
Spi T6963C GLCD HW connection
368
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
T6963C GRAPHIC LCD LIBRARY
The mikroBasic for 8051 provides a library for working with GLCDs based on
TOSHIBA T6963C controller. The Toshiba T6963C is a very popular LCD controller
for the use in small graphics modules. It is capable of controlling displays with a resolution up to 240x128. Because of its low power and small outline it is most suitable
for mobile applications such as PDAs, MP3 players or mobile measurement equipment. Although small, this contoller has a capability of displaying and merging text
and graphics and it manages all the interfacing signals to the displays Row and Column drivers.
For creating a custom set of GLCD images use GLCD Bitmap Editor Tool.
Note: ChipEnable(CE), FontSelect(FS) and Reverse(MD) have to be set to appropriate levels by the user outside of the T6963C_Init function. See the Library Example code at the bottom of this page.
Note: Some mikroElektronika's adapter boards have pinout different from T6369C
datasheets. Appropriate relations between these labels are given in the table below:
Adapter Board
T6369C datasheet
RS
C/D
R/W
/RD
E
/WR
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
369
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
External dependencies of T6963C Graphic LCD Library
The following variables
must be defined in all
projects using T6963C
Graphic LCD library:
dim T6963C_dataPort
as byte external sfr
dim T6963C_ctrlPort
as byte external sfr
dim T6963C_ctrlwr as
sbit external
dim T6963C_ctrlrd as
sbit external
dim T6963C_ctrlcd as
sbit external
dim T6963C_ctrlrst as
sbit external
Description:
T6963C Data Port.
T6963C Control Port.
Write signal.
Read signal.
Command/Data signal.
Reset signal.
Example :
dim T6963C_dataPort
as byte at P0 sfr
dim T6963C_ctrlPort
as byte at P1 sfr
dim T6963C_ctrlwr as
sbit at P1.B2
dim T6963C_ctrlrd as
sbit at P1.B1
dim T6963C_ctrlcd as
sbit at P1.B0
dim T6963C_ctrlrst as
sbit at P1.B4
Library Routines
- T6963C_Init
- T6963C_WriteData
- T6963C_WriteCommand
- T6963C_SetPtr
- T6963C_WaitReady
- T6963C_Fill
- T6963C_Dot
- T6963C_Write_Char
- T6963C_Write_Text
- T6963C_Line
- T6963C_Rectangle
- T6963C_Box
- T6963C_Circle
- T6963C_Image
- T6963C_Sprite
- T6963C_Set_Cursor
Note: The following low level library routines are implemented as macros. These
macros can be found in the T6963C.h header file which is located in the T6963C
example projects folders.
370
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
- T6963C_ClearBit
- T6963C_SetBit
- T6963C_NegBit
- T6963C_DisplayGrPanel
- T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel
- T6963C_SetGrPanel
- T6963C_SetTxtPanel
- T6963C_PanelFill
- T6963C_GrFill
- T6963C_TxtFill
- T6963C_Cursor_Height
- T6963C_Graphics
- T6963C_Text
- T6963C_Cursor
- T6963C_Cursor_Blink
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
371
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
T6963C_Init
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_init(dim width as word, dim height, fntW as
byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Initalizes the Graphic Lcd controller.
Parameters :
- width: width of the GLCD panel
- height: height of the GLCD panel
- fntW: font width
Display RAM organization:
The library cuts the RAM into panels : a complete panel is one graphics panel
followed by a text panel (see schematic below).
schematic:
+---------------------+ /\
Description + GRAPHICS PANEL #0
+ |
+
+ |
+
+ |
+
+ |
+---------------------+ | PANEL 0
+ TEXT PANEL #0
+ |
+
+ \/
+---------------------+ /\
+ GRAPHICS PANEL #1
+ |
+
+ |
+
+ |
+
+ |
+---------------------+ | PANEL 1
+ TEXT PANEL #2
+ |
+
+ |
+---------------------+ \/
Global variables :
Requires
-
T6963C_dataPort : Data Port
T6963C_ctrlPort : Control Port
T6963C_ctrlwr : write signal pin
T6963C_ctrlrd : read signal pin
T6963C_ctrlcd : command/data signal pin
T6963C_ctrlrst : reset signal pin
must be defined before using this function.
372
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Example
Libraries
' T6963CGLCD pinout definition
dim T6963C_dataPort as byte at P0 sfr
' pointer to DATA BUS
port
dim T6963C_ctrlPort as byte at P1 sfr
' pointer to CONTROL
BUS port
dim T6963C_ctrlwr as sbit at P1.B2
' WR write signal
dim T6963C_ctrlrd as sbit at P1.B1
' RD read signal
dim T6963C_ctrlcd as sbit at P1.B0
' CD command/data
signal
dim T6963C_ctrlrst as sbit at P1.B4
' RST reset signal
...
' init display for 240 pixel width, 128 pixel height and 8 bits
character width
T6963C_init(240, 128, 8)
T6963C_WriteData
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_WriteData(dim mydata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes data to T6963C controller.
Description Parameters :
- mydata: data to be written
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_WriteData(AddrL)
T6963C_WriteCommand
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_WriteCommand(dim mydata as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes command to T6963C controller.
Description Parameters :
- mydata: command to be written
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_WriteCommand(T6963C_CURSOR_POINTER_SET)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
373
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
T6963C_SetPtr
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_SetPtr(dim p as word, dim c as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets the memory pointer p for command c.
Description
Parameters :
- p: address where command should be written
- c: command to be written
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_SetPtr(T6963C_grHomeAddr + start,
T6963C_ADDRESS_POINTER_SET)
T6963C_WaitReady
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_WaitReady()
Returns
Nothing.
Description Pools the status byte, and loops until Toshiba GLCD module is ready.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_WaitReady()
T6963C_Fill
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Fill(dim v as byte, dim start, len as word)
Returns
Nothing.
Fills controller memory block with given byte.
Parameters :
Description
- v: byte to be written
- start: starting address of the memory block
- len: length of the memory block in bytes
374
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Fill(0x33,0x00FF,0x000F)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
T6963C_Dot
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Dot(dim x, y as integer, dim color as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a dot in the current graphic panel of GLCD at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters :
Description
- x: dot position on x-axis
- y: dot position on y-axis
- color: color parameter. Valid values: T6963C_BLACK and T6963C_WHITE
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Dot(x0, y0, pcolor)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
375
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
T6963C_Write_Char
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Write_Char(dim c, x, y, mode as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes a char in the current text panel of GLCD at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters :
- c: char to be written
- x: char position on x-axis
- y: char position on y-axis
- mode: mode parameter. Valid values: T6963C_ROM_MODE_OR,
T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR, T6963C_ROM_MODE_AND and
T6963C_ROM_MODE_TEXT
Mode parameter explanation:
Description
- OR Mode: In the OR-Mode, text and graphics can be displayed and the data is
logically “OR-ed”. This is the most common way of combining text and graphics for example labels on buttons.
- XOR-Mode: In this mode, the text and graphics data are combined via the logical “exclusive OR”. This can be useful to display text in the negative mode, i.e.
white text on black background.
- AND-Mode: The text and graphic data shown on display are combined via the
logical “AND function”.
- TEXT-Mode: This option is only available when displaying just a text. The Text
Attribute values are stored in the graphic area of display memory.
For more details see the T6963C datasheet.
376
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Write_Char('A',22,23,AND)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
T6963C_Write_Text
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Write_Text(dim str as ^byte, dim x, y, mode
as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Writes text in the current text panel of GLCD at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters :
-
str: text to be written
x: text position on x-axis
y: text position on y-axis
mode: mode parameter. Valid values: T6963C_ROM_MODE_OR,
T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR, T6963C_ROM_MODE_AND and
T6963C_ROM_MODE_TEXT
Mode parameter explanation:
Description
- OR Mode: In the OR-Mode, text and graphics can be displayed and the data is
logically “OR-ed”. This is the most common way of combining text and graphics for example labels on buttons.
- XOR-Mode: In this mode, the text and graphics data are combined via the logical “exclusive OR”. This can be useful to display text in the negative mode, i.e.
white text on black background.
- AND-Mode: The text and graphic data shown on display are combined via the
logical “AND function”.
- TEXT-Mode: This option is only available when displaying just a text. The Text
Attribute values are stored in the graphic area of display memory.
For more details see the T6963C datasheet.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Write_Text(&quot; GLCD LIBRARY DEMO, WELCOME !&quot;, 0, 0,
T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
377
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
T6963C_Line
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Line(dim x0, y0, x1, y1 as integer, dim
pcolor as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a line from (x0, y0) to (x1, y1).
Parameters :
Description -
x0: x coordinate of the line start
y0: y coordinate of the line end
x1: x coordinate of the line start
y1: y coordinate of the line end
pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: T6963C_BLACK and T6963C_WHITE
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Line(0, 0, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE)
T6963C_Rectangle
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Rectangle(dim x0, y0, x1, y1 as integer, dim
pcolor as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a rectangle on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description -
378
x0: x coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner
y0: y coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner
x1: x coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner
y1: y coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner
pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: T6963C_BLACK and T6963C_WHITE
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Rectangle(20, 20, 219, 107, T6963C_WHITE)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
T6963C_Box
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Box(dim x0, y0, x1, y1 as integer, dim pcolor as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a box on GLCD
Parameters :
Description -
x0: x coordinate of the upper left box corner
y0: y coordinate of the upper left box corner
x1: x coordinate of the lower right box corner
y1: y coordinate of the lower right box corner
pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: T6963C_BLACK and T6963C_WHITE
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Box(0, 119, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE)
T6963C_Circle
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Circle(dim x, y as integer, dim r as
longint, dim pcolor as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Draws a circle on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description
-
x: x coordinate of the circle center
y: y coordinate of the circle center
r: radius size
pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: T6963C_BLACK and T6963C_WHITE
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Circle(120, 64, 110, T6963C_WHITE)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
379
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
T6963C_Image
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Image(const pic as ^byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Displays bitmap on GLCD.
Parameters :
Description
- pic: image to be displayed. Bitmap array can be located in both code and
RAM memory (due to the mikroBasic for 8051 pointer to const and pointer to
RAM equivalency).
Use the mikroBasic’s integrated GLCD Bitmap Editor (menu option Tools ›
GLCD Bitmap Editor) to convert image to a constant array suitable for displaying on GLCD.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Image(mc)
T6963C_Sprite
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Sprite(dim px, py, sx, sy as byte, const pic
as ^byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fills graphic rectangle area (px, py) to (px+sx, py+sy) with custom size picture.
Parameters :
- px: x coordinate of the upper left picture corner. Valid values: multiples of the
font width
Description - py: y coordinate of the upper left picture corner
- pic: picture to be displayed
- sx: picture width. Valid values: multiples of the font width
- sy: picture height
Note: If px and sx parameters are not multiples of the font width they will be
scaled to the nearest lower number that is a multiple of the font width.
380
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Sprite(76, 4, einstein, 88, 119) ' draw a sprite
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
T6963C_Set_Cursor
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Set_Cursor(dim x, y as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets cursor to row x and column y.
Description
Parameters :
- x: cursor position row number
- y: cursor position column number
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Set_Cursor(cposx, cposy)
T6963C_ClearBit
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_ClearBit(dim b as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Clears control port bit(s).
Description
Parameters :
- b: bit mask. The function will clear bit x on control port if bit x in bit mask
is set to 1.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' clear bits 0 and 1 on control port
T6963C_ClearBit(0x03)
T6963C_SetBit
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_SetBit(dim b as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Sets control port bit(s).
Description Parameters :
- b: bit mask. The function will set bit x on control port if bit x in bit mask is set to 1.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' set bits 0 and 1 on control port
T6963C_SetBit(0x03)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
381
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
T6963C_NegBit
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_NegBit(dim b as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Negates control port bit(s).
Description
Parameters :
- b: bit mask. The function will negate bit x on control port if bit x in bit mask is
set to 1.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' negate bits 0 and 1 on control port
T6963C_NegBit(0x03)
T6963C_DisplayGrPanel
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_DisplayGrPanel(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Display selected graphic panel.
Description Parameters :
- n: graphic panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' display graphic panel 1
T6963C_DisplayGrPanel(1)
T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Display selected text panel.
Description Parameters :
- n: text panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
382
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' display text panel 1
T6963C_DisplayTxtPanel(1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
T6963C_SetGrPanel
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_SetGrPanel(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Compute start address for selected graphic panel and set appropriate internal
pointers. All subsequent graphic operations will be preformed at this graphic
panel.
Description
Parameters :
- n: graphic panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' set graphic panel 1 as current graphic panel.
T6963C_SetGrPanel(1)
T6963C_SetTxtPanel
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_SetTxtPanel(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Compute start address for selected text panel and set appropriate internal pointers. All subsequent text operations will be preformed at this text panel.
Description
Parameters :
- n: text panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' set text panel 1 as current text panel.
T6963C_SetTxtPanel(1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
383
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
T6963C_PanelFill
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_PanelFill(dim v as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fill current panel in full (graphic+text) with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Description Parameters :
- v: value to fill panel with.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
clear current panel
T6963C_PanelFill(0)
T6963C_GrFill
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_GrFill(dim v as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fill current graphic panel with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Description Parameters :
- v: value to fill graphic panel with.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' clear current graphic panel
T6963C_GrFill(0)
T6963C_TxtFill
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_TxtFill(dim v as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Fill current text panel with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Description Parameters :
- v: this value increased by 32 will be used to fill text panel.
384
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' clear current text panel
T6963C_TxtFill(0)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
T6963C_Cursor_Height
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Cursor_Height(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Set cursor size.
Description Parameters :
- n: cursor height. Valid values: 0..7.
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
T6963C_Cursor_Height(7)
T6963C_Graphics
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Graphics(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Enable/disable graphic displaying.
Description
Parameters :
- n: on/off parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable graphic dispaying) and 1 (enable
graphic displaying).
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' enable graphic displaying
T6963C_Graphics(1)
T6963C_Text
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Text(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Enable/disable text displaying.
Description
Parameters :
- n: on/off parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable text dispaying) and 1 (enable text
displaying).
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' enable text displaying
T6963C_Text(1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
385
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
T6963C_Cursor
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Cursor(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Set cursor on/off.
Description Parameters :
- n: on/off parameter. Valid values: 0 (set cursor off) and 1 (set cursor on).
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' set cursor on
T6963C_Cursor(1)
T6963C_Cursor_Blink
Prototype
sub procedure T6963C_Cursor_Blink(dim n as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
Enable/disable cursor blinking.
Description
Parameters :
- n: on/off parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable cursor blinking) and 1 (enable
cursor blinking).
Requires
Toshiba GLCD module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_Init routine.
Example
' enable cursor blinking
T6963C_Cursor_Blink(1)
Library Example
The following drawing demo tests advanced routines of the T6963C GLCD library. Hardware configurations in this example are made for the T6963C 240x128 display, Easy8051B board and
AT89S8253.
program T6963C_240x128
include __Lib_T6963C_Consts
include bitmap
include bitmap2
' T6963C module connections
dim T6963C_dataPort as byte at P0 sfr
dim T6963C_cntlPort as byte at P1 sfr
386
' DATA port
' CONTROL port
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
dim T6963C_cntlwr as sbit at P1.B2
dim T6963C_cntlrd as sbit at P1.B1
dim T6963C_cntlcd as sbit at P1.B0
dim T6963C_cntlrst as sbit at P1.B4
' End T6963C module connections
dim
'
'
'
'
WR write signal
RD read signal
CD command/data signal
RST reset signal
panel as byte
' current panel
i as word
' general purpose register
curs as byte
' cursor visibility
cposx, cposy as word ' cursor x-y position
txtcols as byte
' number of text coloms
txt, txt1 as string[29] idata
txt1 = &quot; EINSTEIN WOULD HAVE LIKED mC&quot;
txt = &quot; GLCD LIBRARY DEMO, WELCOME !&quot;
P2 = 255 ' all inputs
' Clear T6963C ports
P1 = 0
' control bus
P0 = 0
' data bus
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
init display for 240 pixel width and 128 pixel height
8 bits character width
data bus on P0
control bus on P1
bit 2 is !WR
bit 1 is !RD
bit 0 is !CD
bit 4 is RST
T6963C_init(240, 128, 8)
'
'
'
*
* enable both graphics and text display at the same time
*
T6963C_graphics(1)
T6963C_text(1)
panel = 0
i
= 0
curs = 0
cposx = 0
cposy = 0
txtcols = 240 div 8
' calculate number of text colomns
' (grafic display width divided by
font width)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
387
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
'
'
'
*
* text messages
*
T6963C_write_text(txt, 0, 0, T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR)
T6963C_write_text(txt1, 0, 15, T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR)
'
'
'
*
* cursor
*
T6963C_cursor_height(8)
T6963C_set_cursor(0, 0)
T6963C_cursor(0)
'
'
'
' 8 pixel height
' move cursor to top left
' cursor off
*
* draw rectangles
*
T6963C_rectangle(0,
0, 239, 127, T6963C_BLACK)
T6963C_rectangle(20, 20, 219, 107, T6963C_BLACK)
T6963C_rectangle(40, 40, 199, 87, T6963C_BLACK)
T6963C_rectangle(60, 60, 179, 67, T6963C_BLACK)
'
'
'
*
* draw a cross
*
T6963C_line(0,
0, 239, 127, T6963C_BLACK)
T6963C_line(0, 127, 239,
0, T6963C_BLACK)
'
'
'
*
* draw solid boxes
*
T6963C_box(0,
0, 239,
8, T6963C_BLACK)
T6963C_box(0, 119, 239, 127, T6963C_BLACK)
'
'
'
*
* draw circles
*
T6963C_circle(120, 64, 10, T6963C_BLACK)
T6963C_circle(120, 64, 30, T6963C_BLACK)
T6963C_sprite(76, 4, @einstein, 88, 119)
T6963C_setGrPanel(1)
' draw a sprite
' select other graphic panel
T6963C_Image(@banner_bmp)
388
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
while TRUE
'
*
'
* if P2_0 is pressed, toggle the display between graphic
panel 0 and graphic 1
'
*
if ( P2_0 = 0 ) then
Inc(panel)
panel = panel and 1
T6963C_displayGrPanel(panel)
Delay_ms(300)
'
'
'
*
* if P2_1 is pressed, display only graphic panel
*
else
if ( P2_1 = 0 ) then
T6963C_graphics(1)
T6963C_text(0)
Delay_ms(300)
'
'
'
*
* if P2_2 is pressed, display only text panel
*
else
if (P2_2 = 0) then
T6963C_graphics(0)
T6963C_text(1)
Delay_ms(300)
'
'
'
*
* if P2_3 is pressed, display text and graphic panels
*
else
if(P2_3 = 0) then
T6963C_graphics(1)
T6963C_text(1)
Delay_ms(300)
'
'
'
*
* if P2_4 is pressed, change cursor
*
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
389
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
else
if(P2_4 = 0) then
curs = curs + 1
if (curs = 3) then
curs = 0
end if
select case curs
case 0
T6963C_cursor(0)
case 1
T6963C_cursor(1)
T6963C_cursor_blink(1)
case 2
T6963C_cursor(1)
T6963C_cursor_blink(0)
end select ' end case
Delay_ms(300)
end if
end if
end if
end if
end if
'
'
'
*
* move cursor, even if not visible
*
Inc(cposx)
if(cposx = txtcols) then
cposx = 0
cposy = cposy + 1
if (cposy = (128 div T6963C_CHARACTER_HEIGHT)) then
if y end
cposy = 0
grafic height (128) div character height
end if
end if
T6963C_set_cursor(cposx, cposy)
Delay_ms(100)
wend
end.
390
'
'
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
HW Connection
T6963C GLCD HW connection
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
391
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
UART LIBRARY
The UART hardware module is available with a number of 8051 compliant MCUs. The mikroBasic for 8051 UART Library provides comfortable work with the Asynchronous (full duplex) mode.
Library Routines
-
Uart_Init
Uart_Data_Ready
Uart_Read
Uart_Write
Uart_Init
Prototype
sub procedure Uart_Init(dim baud_rate as longint)
Returns
Nothing.
Configures and initializes the UART module.
The internal UART module module is set to:
Description
-
8-bit data, no parity
1 STOP bit
disabled automatic address recognition
timer1 as baudrate source (mod2 = autoreload 8bit timer)
Parameters :
- baud_rate: requested baud rate
Refer to the device data sheet for baud rates allowed for specific Fosc.
392
Requires
MCU with the UART module and TIMER1 to be used as baudrate source.
Example
' Initialize hardware UART and establish communication at 2400
bps
Uart_Init(2400)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Uart_Data_Ready
Prototype
Returns
sub function Uart_Data_Ready() as byte
- 1 if data is ready for reading
- 0 if there is no data in the receive register
Description The function tests if data in receive buffer is ready for reading.
MCU with the UART module.
Requires
Example
The UART module must be initialized before using this routine. See the Uart_Init
routine.
dim receive as byte
...
' read data if ready
if (Uart_Data_Ready()=1) then
receive = Uart_Read()
Uart_Read
Prototype
sub function Uart_Read() as byte
Returns
Received byte.
Description
The function receives a byte via UART. Use the Uart_Data_Ready function to
test if data is ready first.
MCU with the UART module.
Requires
Example
The UART module must be initialized before using this routine. See Uart_Init
routine.
dim receive as byte
...
' read data if ready
if (Uart_Data_Ready()=1) then
receive = Uart_Read()
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
393
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Uart_Write
Prototype
sub procedure Uart_Write(dim TxData as byte)
Returns
Nothing.
The function transmits a byte via the UART module.
Description Parameters :
- TxData: data to be sent
MCU with the UART module.
Requires
Example
The UART module must be initialized before using this routine. See Uart_Init
routine.
dim data as byte
...
data = 0x1E
Uart_Write(data)
Library Example
This example demonstrates simple data exchange via UART. If MCU is connected to the PC, you
can test the example from the mikroBasic for 8051 USART Terminal.
program UART
dim uart_rd as byte
main:
Uart_Init(4800)
Delay_ms(100)
while TRUE
if (Uart_Data_Ready() &lt;&gt; 0) then
data
uart_rd = Uart_Read()
Uart_Write(uart_rd)
end if
wend
end.
394
' Initialize UART module at 4800 bps
' Wait for UART module to stabilize
' Endless loop
' Check if UART module has received
' Read data
' Send the same data back
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
HW Connection
UART HW connection
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
395
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
BUTTON LIBRARY
The Button library contains miscellaneous routines useful for a project development.
External dependecies of Button Library
The following variable
must be defined in all
projects using Button
library:
dim Button_Pin as
sbit external
Description:
Example :
Declares Button_Pin,
dim Button_Pin as
which will be used by But- sbit at P0_0
ton Library.
Library Routines
- Button
396
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Button
Prototype
sub function Button(dim time_ms as byte, dim active_state as
byte) as byte
- 255 if the pin was in the active state for given period.
- 0 otherwise
Returns
The function eliminates the influence of contact flickering upon pressing a button
(debouncing). The Button pin is tested just after the function call and then again
after the debouncing period has expired. If the pin was in the active state in both
cases then the function returns 255 (true).
Description
Parameters :
- time_ms: debouncing period in milliseconds
- active_state: determines what is considered as active state. Valid values: 0
(logical zero) and 1 (logical one)
Button_Pin variable must be defined before using this function.
Requires
Button pin must be configured as input.
P2 is inverted on every P0.B0 one-to-zero transition :
program Button
' Button connections
dim Button_Pin as sbit at P0.B0;
It will be used by Button Library.
' End Button connections
bit oldstate;
Example
main:
P0 = 255
P2 = 0xAA
' Declare Button_Pin.
' Old state flag
' Configure PORT0 as input
' Initial PORT2 value
do {
if (Button(1, 1))
' Detect logical one
oldstate = 1;
' Update flag
if (oldstate &amp;&amp; Button(1, 0)) { ' Detect one-to-zero transition
P2 = ~P2;
' Invert PORT2
oldstate = 0;
' Update flag
}
} while(1);
' Endless loop
}'~!
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
397
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
CONVERSIONS LIBRARY
mikroBasic for 8051 Conversions Library provides routines for numerals to strings
and BCD/decimal conversions.
Library Routines
You can get text representation of numerical value by passing it to one of the following routines:
-
ByteToStr
ShortToStr
WordToStr
IntToStr
LongintToStr
LongWordToStr
FloatToStr
The following sub functions convert decimal values to BCD and vice versa:
- Dec2Bcd
- Bcd2Dec16
- Dec2Bcd16
398
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
ByteToStr
Prototype
sub procedure ByteToStr(dim input as word, dim byref output as
string[2])
Returns
Nothing.
Converts input byte to a string. The output string is right justified and remaining
positions on the left (if any) are filled with blanks.
Description Parameters :
- input: byte to be converted
- output: destination string
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim t as word
txt as string[2]
...
t = 24
ByteToStr(t, txt) ' txt is &quot; 24&quot; (one blank here)
ShortToStr
Prototype
sub procedure ShortToStr(dim input as short, dim byref output as
string[3])
Returns
Nothing.
Converts input short (signed byte) number to a string. The output string is right
justified and remaining positions on the left (if any) are filled with blanks.
Description Parameters :
- input: short number to be converted
- output: destination string
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim t as short
txt as string[3]
...
t = -24
ByteToStr(t, txt) ' txt is &quot; -24&quot; (one blank here)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
399
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
WordToStr
Prototype
sub procedure WordToStr(dim input as word, dim byref output as
string[4])
Returns
Nothing.
Converts input word to a string. The output string is right justified and the
remaining positions on the left (if any) are filled with blanks.
Description Parameters :
- input: word to be converted
- output: destination string
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim t as word
txt as string[4]
...
t = 437
WordToStr(t, txt) ' txt is &quot;
437&quot; (two blanks here)
IntToStr
Prototype
sub procedure IntToStr(dim input as integer, dim byref output as
string[5]
Returns
Nothing.
Converts input integer number to a string. The output string is right justified and
the remaining positions on the left (if any) are filled with blanks.
Description Parameters :
- input: integer number to be converted
- output: destination string
Requires
Example
Nothing.
dim input as integer
txt as string[5]
'...
input = -4220
IntToStr(input, txt)
400
' txt is ' -4220'
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
LongintToStr
Prototype
sub procedure LongintToStr(dim input as longint, dim byref output
as string[10])
Returns
Nothing.
Converts input longint number to a string. The output string is right justified and
the remaining positions on the left (if any) are filled with blanks.
Description Parameters :
- input: longint number to be converted
- output: destination string
Requires
Example
Nothing.
dim input as longint
txt as string[10]
'...
input = -12345678
IntToStr(input, txt)
' txt is '
-12345678'
LongWordToStr
Prototype
sub procedure LongWordToStr(dim input as longword, dim byref output as string[9])
Returns
Nothing.
Converts input double word number to a string. The output string is right justified
and the remaining positions on the left (if any) are filled with blanks.
Description Parameters :
- input: double word number to be converted
- output: destination string
Requires
Example
Nothing.
dim input as longint
txt as string[9]
'...
input = 12345678
IntToStr(input, txt)
' txt is '
12345678'
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
401
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
FloatToStr
Prototype
Returns
sub function FloatToStr(dim input as real, dim byref output as
string[22])
-
3
2
1
0
if
if
if
if
input number is NaN
input number is -INF
input number is +INF
conversion was successful
Converts a floating point number to a string.
Parameters :
- input: floating point number to be converted
Description - output: destination string
The output string is left justified and null terminated after the last digit.
Note: Given floating point number will be truncated to 7 most significant digits
before conversion.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim ff1, ff2, ff3 as real
txt as string[22]
...
ff1 = -374.2
ff2 = 123.456789
ff3 = 0.000001234
FloatToStr(ff1, txt)
FloatToStr(ff2, txt)
FloatToStr(ff3, txt)
402
' txt is &quot;-374.2&quot;
' txt is &quot;123.4567&quot;
' txt is &quot;1.234e-6&quot;
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Dec2Bcd
Prototype
sub function Dec2Bcd(dim decnum as byte) as byte
Returns
Converted BCD value.
Converts input number to its appropriate BCD representation.
Description Parameters :
- decnum: number to be converted
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim a, b as byte
...
a = 22
b = Dec2Bcd(a) ' b equals 34
Bcd2Dec16
Prototype
sub function Bcd2Dec16(dim bcdnum as word) as word
Returns
Converted decimal value.
Converts 16-bit BCD numeral to its decimal equivalent.
Description Parameters :
- bcdnum: 16-bit BCD numeral to be converted
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim a, b as word
...
a = 0x1234
b = Bcd2Dec16(a)
' a equals 4660
' b equals 1234
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
403
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Dec2Bcd16
Prototype
sub function Dec2Bcd16(dim decnum as word) as word
Returns
Converted BCD value.
Converts decimal value to its BCD equivalent.
Description Parameters :
- decnum decimal number to be converted
404
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim a, b as word
...
a = 2345
b = Dec2Bcd16(a)
' b equals 9029
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
MATH LIBRARY
The mikroBasic for 8051 provides a set of library functions for floating point math
handling. See also Predefined Globals and Constants for the list of predefined math
constants.
Library Functions
-
acos
asin
atan
atan2
ceil
cos
cosh
eval_poly
exp
fabs
floor
frexp
ldexp
log
log10
modf
pow
sin
sinh
sqrt
tan
tanh
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
405
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
acos
Prototype
sub function acos(dim x as real) as real
The function returns the arc cosine of parameter x; that is, the value whose
Description cosine is x. The input parameter x must be between -1 and 1 (inclusive). The
return value is in radians, between 0 and Π (inclusive).
asin
Prototype
sub function asin(dim x as real) as real
The function returns the arc sine of parameter x; that is, the value whose sine is
Description x. The input parameter x must be between -1 and 1 (inclusive). The return value
is in radians, between -Π/2 and Π/2 (inclusive).
atan
Prototype
sub function atan(dim arg as real) as real
The function computes the arc tangent of parameter arg; that is, the value
Description whose tangent is arg. The return value is in radians, between -Π/2 and Π/2
(inclusive).
atan2
Prototype
sub function atan2(dim y as real, dim x as real) as real
This is the two-argument arc tangent function. It is similar to computing the arc
tangent of y/x, except that the signs of both arguments are used to determine
Description
the quadrant of the result and x is permitted to be zero. The return value is in
radians, between -Π and Π (inclusive).
ceil
Prototype
sub function ceil(dim x as real) as real
Description The function returns value of parameter x rounded up to the next whole number.
cos
Prototype
sub function cos(dim arg as real) as real
Description The function returns the cosine of arg in radians. The return value is from -1 to 1.
cosh
406
Prototype
sub function cosh(dim x as real) as real
Description
The function returns the hyperbolic cosine of x, defined mathematically as
(ex+e-x)/2. If the value of x is too large (if overflow occurs), the function fails.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
eval_poly
Prototype
sub function eval_poly(dim x as real, dim byref d as array[10] of
real, dim n as integer) as real
Description
Function Calculates polynom for number x, with coefficients stored in d[], for
degree n.
exp
Prototype
sub function exp(dim x as real) as real
Description
The function returns the value of e — the base of natural logarithms — raised to
the power x (i.e. ex).
fabs
Prototype
sub function fabs(dim d as real) as real
Description The function returns the absolute (i.e. positive) value of d.
floor
Prototype
sub function floor(dim x as real) as real
Description The function returns the value of parameter x rounded down to the nearest integer.
frexp
Prototype
sub function frexp(dim value as real, dim byref eptr as integer)
as real
The function splits a floating-point value value into a normalized fraction and an
Description integral power of 2. The return value is a normalized fraction and the integer
exponent is stored in the object pointed to by eptr.
ldexp
Prototype
sub function ldexp(dim value as real, dim newexp as integer) as real
Description
The function returns the result of multiplying the floating-point number value by
2 raised to the power newexp (i.e. returns value * 2newexp).
log
Prototype
sub function log(dim x as real) as real
Description The function returns the natural logarithm of x (i.e. loge(x)).
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
407
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
log10
Prototype
sub function log10(dim x as real) as real
Description The function returns the base-10 logarithm of x (i.e. log10(x)).
modf
Prototype
sub function modf(dim val as real, dim byref iptr as real) as real
Description
The function returns the signed fractional component of val, placing its whole
number component into the variable pointed to by iptr.
pow
Prototype
sub function pow(dim x as real, dim y as real) as real
Description
The function returns the value of x raised to the power y (i.e. xy). If x is negative, the function will automatically cast y into longint.
sin
Prototype
sub function sin(dim arg as real) as real
Description The function returns the sine of arg in radians. The return value is from -1 to 1.
sinh
Prototype
sub function sinh(dim x as real) as real
Description
The function returns the hyperbolic sine of x, defined mathematically as
(ex-e-x)/2. If the value of x is too large (if overflow occurs), the function fails.
sqrt
Prototype
sub function sqrt(dim x as real) as real
Description The function returns the non negative square root of x.
tan
408
Prototype
sub function tan(dim x as real) as real
Description
The function returns the tangent of x in radians. The return value spans the
allowed range of floating point in mikroBasic for 8051.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
tanh
Prototype
sub function tanh(dim x as real) as real)
Description
The function returns the hyperbolic tangent of x, defined mathematically as
sinh(x)/cosh(x).
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
409
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
STRING LIBRARY
The mikroBasic for 8051 includes a library which automatizes string related tasks.
Library Functions
-
memchr
memcmp
memcpy
memmove
memset
strcat
strchr
strcmp
strcpy
strlen
strncat
strncpy
strspn
strcspn
strncmp
strpbrk
strrchr
strstr
memchr
Prototype
sub function memchr(dim p as word, dim ch as byte, dim n as word)
as word
The function locates the first occurrence of the word ch in the initial n words of
memory area starting at the address p. The function returns the offset of this
occurrence from the memory address p or 0xFFFF if ch was not found.
Description
For the parameter p you can use either a numerical value (literal/variable/constant) indicating memory address or a dereferenced value of an object, for
example @mystring or @PORTB.
410
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
memcmp
Prototype
sub function memcmp(p1, p2, n as word) as integer
The function returns a positive, negative, or zero value indicating the relationship of first n words of memory areas starting at addresses p1 and p2.
This function compares two memory areas starting at addresses p1 and p2 for n
words and returns a value indicating their relationship as follows:
Value
&lt; 0
Description = 0
&gt; 0
Meaning
p1 &quot;less than&quot; p2
p1 &quot;equal to&quot; p2
p1 &quot;greater than&quot; p2
The value returned by the function is determined by the difference between the
values of the first pair of words that differ in the strings being compared.
For parameters p1 and p2 you can use either a numerical value (literal/variable/constant) indicating memory address or a dereferenced value of an object,
for example @mystring or @PORTB.
memcpy
Prototype
Description
sub procedure memcpy(p1, p2, nn as word)
The function copies nn words from the memory area starting at the address p2
to the memory area starting at p1. If these memory buffers overlap, the memcpy
function cannot guarantee that words are copied before being overwritten. If
these buffers do overlap, use the memmove function.
For parameters p1 and p2 you can use either a numerical value (literal/variable/constant) indicating memory address or a dereferenced value of an object,
for example @mystring or @PORTB.
memmove
Prototype
sub procedure memmove(p1, p2, nn as word)
The function copies nn words from the memory area starting at the address p2
to the memory area starting at p1. If these memory buffers overlap, the Memmove
function ensures that the words in p2 are copied to p1 before being overwritten.
Description
For parameters p1 and p2 you can use either a numerical value (literal/variable/constant) indicating memory address or a dereferenced value of an object,
for example @mystring or @PORTB.
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
411
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
memset
Prototype
sub procedure memset(dim p as word, dim character as byte, dim n
as word)
The function fills the first n words in the memory area starting at the address p
with the value of word character.
Description
For parameter p you can use either a numerical value (literal/variable/constant)
indicating memory address or a dereferenced value of an object, for example
@mystring or @PORTB.
strcat
Prototype
sub procedure strcat(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100])
Description
The function appends the value of string s2 to string s1 and terminates s1 with
a null character.
strchr
Prototype
sub function strchr(dim byref s as string[100], dim ch as byte)
as word
The function searches the string s for the first occurrence of the character ch.
The null character terminating s is not included in the search.
Description
The function returns the position (index) of the first character ch found in s; if no
matching character was found, the function returns 0xFFFF.
strcmp
Prototype
sub function strcmp(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100]) as integer
The function lexicographically compares the contents of the strings s1 and s2
and returns a value indicating their relationship:
Value
&lt; 0
Description = 0
&gt; 0
Meaning
s1 &quot;less than&quot; s2
s1 &quot;equal to&quot; s2
s1 &quot;greater than&quot; s2
The value returned by the function is determined by the difference between the
values of the first pair of words that differ in the strings being compared.
412
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
strcpy
Prototype
sub procedure strcpy(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100])
Description
The function copies the value of the string s2 to the string s1 and appends a
null character to the end of s1.
strcspn
Prototype
sub function strcspn(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100]) as word
The function searches the string s1 for any of the characters in the string s2.
Description
The function returns the index of the first character located in s1 that matches
any character in s2. If the first character in s1 matches a character in s2, a
value of 0 is returned. If there are no matching characters in s1, the length of
the string is returned (not including the terminating null character).
strlen
Prototype
sub function strlen(dim byref s as string[100]) as word
Description
The function returns the length, in words, of the string s. The length does not
include the null terminating character.
strncat
Prototype
sub procedure strncat(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100], dim size
as byte)
The function appends at most size characters from the string s2 to the string s1
Description and terminates s1 with a null character. If s2 is shorter than the size characters, s2 is copied up to and including the null terminating character.
strncmp
Prototype
sub function strncmp(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100], dim len as
byte) as integer
The function lexicographically compares the first len words of the strings s1 and
s2 and returns a value indicating their relationship:
Value
&lt; 0
Description = 0
&gt; 0
Meaning
s1 &quot;less than&quot; s2
s1 &quot;equal to&quot; s2
s1 &quot;greater than&quot; s2
The value returned by the function is determined by the difference between the
values of the first pair of words that differ in the strings being compared (within
first len words).
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
413
CHAPTER 6
Libraries
mikroBasic for 8051
strncpy
Prototype
sub procedure strncpy(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100], dim size
as byte)
The function copies at most size characters from the string s2 to the string s1.
Description If s2 contains fewer characters than size, s1 is padded out with null characters
up to the total length of the size characters.
strpbrk
Prototype
sub function strpbrk(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100]) as word
The function searches s1 for the first occurrence of any character from the
string s2. The null terminator is not included in the search. The function returns
Description
an index of the matching character in s1. If s1 contains no characters from s2,
the function returns 0xFFFF.
strrchr
Prototype
sub function strrchr(dim byref s as string[100], dim ch as byte)
as word
The function searches the string s for the last occurrence of the character ch.
The null character terminating s is not included in the search. The function
Description
returns an index of the last ch found in s; if no matching character was found,
the function returns 0xFFFF.
strspn
Prototype
sub function strspn(dim byref s1, s2 as string[100]) as word
The function searches the string s1 for characters not found in the s2 string.
Description
The function returns the index of first character located in s1 that does not
match a character in s2. If the first character in s1 does not match a character in
s2, a value of 0 is returned. If all characters in s1 are found in s2, the length of
s1 is returned (not including the terminating null character).
strstr
Prototype
sub function strstr( dim byref s1, s2 as string[100]) as word
The function locates the first occurrence of the string s2 in the string s1 (excluding the terminating null character).
Description
The function returns a number indicating the position of the first occurrence of
s2 in s1; if no string was found, the function returns 0xFFFF. If s2 is a null string,
the function returns 0.
414
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
TIME LIBRARY
The Time Library contains functions and type definitions for time calculations in the UNIX time format which counts the number of seconds since the &quot;epoch&quot;. This is very convenient for programs
that work with time intervals: the difference between two UNIX time values is a real-time difference measured in seconds.
What is the epoch?
Originally it was defined as the beginning of 1970 GMT. ( January 1, 1970 Julian day ) GMT,
Greenwich Mean Time, is a traditional term for the time zone in England.
The TimeStruct type is a structure type suitable for time and date storage.
Library Routines
- Time_dateToEpoch
- Time_epochToDate
- Time_datediff
Time_dateToEpoch
Prototype
sub function Time_dateToEpoch(dim byref ts as TimeStruct) as longint
Returns
Number of seconds since January 1, 1970 0h00mn00s.
This function returns the UNIX time : number of seconds since January 1, 1970
0h00mn00s.
Description
Parameters :
- ts: time and date value for calculating UNIX time.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dm ts1 as TimeStruct
Epoch as longint
...
' what is the epoch of the date in ts ?
epoch = Time_dateToEpoch(ts1)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
415
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Time_epochToDate
Prototype
sub procedure Time_epochToDate(dim e as longint, dim byref ts as
TimeStruct)
Returns
Nothing.
Converts the UNIX time to time and date.
Description
Parameters :
- e: UNIX time (seconds since UNIX epoch)
- ts: time and date structure for storing conversion output
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim ts2 as TimeStruct
epoch as longint
...
' what date is epoch 1234567890 ?
epoch = 1234567890
Time_epochToDate(epoch,ts2)
Time_dateDiff
Prototype
sub function Time_dateDiff(dim t1 as ^TimeStruct, dim t2 as
^TimeStruct) as longint
Returns
Time difference in seconds as a signed long.
This function compares two dates and returns time difference in seconds as a
signed long. The result is positive if t1 is before t2, null if t1 is the same as t2
and negative if t1 is after t2.
Description
Parameters :
- t1: time and date structure (the first comparison parameter)
- t2: time and date structure (the second comparison parameter)
416
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim ts1, ts2 as TimeStruct
diff as longint
...
' how many seconds between these two dates contained in ts1 and
ts2 buffers?
diff = Time_dateDiff(ts1, ts2)
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
Library Example
Demonstration of Time library routines usage for time calculations in UNIX time format.
program Time_Demo;
{*
* simple time structure
*}
type TimeStruct = record
ss as byte ;
' seconds
mn as byte ;
' minutes
hh as byte ;
' hours
md as byte ;
' day in month, from 1 to 31
wd as byte ;
' day in week, monday=0, tuesday=1, .... sunday=6
mo as byte ;
' month number, from 1 to 12 (and not from 0
to 11 as with UNIX C time !)
yy as word ;
' year Y2K compliant, from 1892 to 2038
end;
var
ts1, ts2
: TimeStruct ;
buf
as array[256] of byte ;
epoch, diff : longint ;
ts1.ss
ts1.mn
ts1.hh
ts1.md
ts1.mo
ts1.yy
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
0 ;
7 ;
17 ;
23 ;
5 ;
2006 ;
{*
* what is the epoch of the date in ts ?
*}
epoch := Time_dateToEpoch(ts1) ;
' epoch = 1148404020
{*
* what date is epoch 1234567890 ?
*}
epoch := 1234567890 ;
Time_epochToDate(epoch, ts2) ;
' ts2.ss :=
' ts2.mn
' ts2.hh
' ts2.md
' ts2.wd
' ts2.mo
' ts2.yy
30
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
;
31 ;
23 ;
13 ;
4 ;
2 ;
2009 ;
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
417
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
{*
* how much seconds between this two dates ?
*}
diff := Time_dateDiff(ts1, ts2) ; ' diff = 86163870
end.
TimeStruct type definition
type TimeStruct = record
ss as byte ;
' seconds
mn as byte ;
' minutes
hh as byte ;
' hours
md as byte ;
' day in month, from 1 to 31
wd as byte ;
' day in week, monday=0, tuesday=1, .... sunday=6
mo as byte ;
' month number, from 1 to 12 (and not from 0
to 11 as with UNIX C time !)
yy as word ;
' year Y2K compliant, from 1892 to 2038
end;
418
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
TRIGONOMETRY LIBRARY
The mikroBasic for 8051 implements fundamental trigonometry functions. These functions are
implemented as look-up tables. Trigonometry functions are implemented in integer format in order
to save memory.
Library Routines
- sinE3
- cosE3
sinE3
Prototype
sub function sinE3(dim angle_deg as word) as integer
Returns
The function returns the sine of input parameter.
The function calculates sine multiplied by 1000 and rounded to the nearest integer:
result = round(sin(angle_deg)*1000)
Description
Parameters:
angle_deg: input angle in degrees
Note: Return value range: -1000..1000.
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim res as integer
...
res = sinE3(45) ' result is 707
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
419
CHAPTER 6
mikroBasic for 8051
Libraries
cosE3
Prototype
sub function cosE3(dim angle_deg as word) as integer
Returns
The function returns the cosine of input parameter.
The function calculates cosine multiplied by 1000 and rounded to the nearest
integer:
result = round(cos(angle_deg)*1000)
Description
Parameters:
angle_deg: input angle in degrees
Note: Return value range: -1000..1000.
420
Requires
Nothing.
Example
dim res as integer
...
res = cosE3(196) ' result is -193
MIKROELEKTRONIKA - SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE SOLUTIONS FOR EMBEDDED WORLD
Mouser Electronics
Authorized Distributor
Click to View Pricing, Inventory, Delivery &amp; Lifecycle Information:
mikroElektronika:
MIKROE-406 MIKROE-720
">
Hello! I am the chat assistant for this document, which is the mikroBasic for 8051 User Manual. I have read the document and can answer questions you have about the language, IDE, libraries, and 8051 microcontroller specifics.
Show related prompts
Assistant typing
Assistant is out of keyboard. Please, try again later.
Key features

Intuitive development environment
Windows-based point-and-click interface
Broad set of built-in routines
Comprehensive Help system
Practical code examples
Software Simulator
Frequently asked questions

mikroBasic for 8051 is a BASIC compiler designed for developing applications for 8051 microcontrollers.
mikroBasic for 8051 provides implemented tools, many practical code examples, broad set of built-in routines, and a comprehensive Help.
What is mikroBasic for 8051?

What kind of support does mikroBasic for 8051 provide?

Related

mikroBasic PRO for AVR User Manual: AI Chat & PDF Access

mikroBasic PRO for PIC Compiler Manual - mikroElektronika

PIC32 mikroBasic PRO Manual

mikroBasic PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 User Manual

mikroC for 8051 User Manual

mikroBASIC User's manual

Programming PIC Microcontrollers in BASIC - mikroElektronika User Manual

mikroPascal PRO for 8051 User Guide

mikroC PRO for 8051 - Creating the first project

MikroElektronika Compiler's IDE Manual: AI Chat & PDF

MikroElektronika 8051Flash User Manual | AI Chat & PDF

mikroPASCAL PRO for AVR User Manual
